JP6931789B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

Some gaming machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines have a plurality of set values having different jackpot winning probabilities in the jackpot lottery.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2000-024234

By the way, as a gaming machine, it is important to raise the degree of attention and interest in gaming to improve the player's motivation to play.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing the degree of attention and interest in a game and improving the player's motivation to play.

The gaming machine according to the present invention
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A storage means (41) for storing each numerical information (game set value) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous judgment probabilities (big hit probabilities) different from each other, and
Selection means (41) for selecting each numerical information, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information, and
When a specific condition is satisfied, at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information is shown in a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. Display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) on display means (35, 39, 341), and
With
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

The perspective view which shows an example of the structure of the gaming machine which concerns on 1st Embodiment of this invention. The development view which shows an example of the structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The development view which shows an example of the structure of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The front view which shows an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing an example of an opening / closing door provided on the game board shown in FIG. FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of an opening / closing door, a crune device, and a game ball staying portion provided in the game board shown in FIG. Perspective view of the Kroon device. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view taken along the X1-X1 cutting line of FIG. A specific period for retaining the game ball in the game ball retention unit, a predetermined period for accumulating the number of game balls that have entered the special out ball mouth of the crune device, and specific information indicating a non-set value are displayed on the 7-segment display unit. The figure for demonstrating the specified period. 10 (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X2-X2 cutting line of FIG. 8, and FIGS. 10 (B) and 10 (C) are cross-sectional views taken along the X3-X3 cutting line of FIG. 11 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment display unit provided on the game board shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 11 (B) is a diagram showing an example of displaying numbers on the 7-segment display unit, and FIG. 11 (C). Is a diagram showing an example of displaying alphabets on the 7-segment display unit. The block diagram which shows an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The block diagram which shows an example of the storage area of the main control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the main control unit. The figure which shows an example of the table used in the main control unit. The block diagram which shows an example of the storage area of a main controller. The figure which shows an example of the performance information display device of a main control device schematically. The figure which shows the display example on the performance display monitor of a performance information display device. The figure which shows the display example in the setting value display part of the performance information display device. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt processing executed by the main control unit. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the main timer interrupt process of FIG. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the first hold command setting process executed in the start winning process of FIG. 21. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the main processing executed by the main control unit. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a variable game control process executed in the main process of FIG. 23. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of data setting processing executed in the variable game control processing of FIG. 24. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the variation start processing executed in the variation game control process of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the setting value change processing executed in the main processing of FIG. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update processing executed in the main processing of FIG. The figure which shows an example of the base information which is updated by the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of display control processing of the performance display monitor executed in the main processing of FIG. 23. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the display order setting process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34. The figure which shows an example of the number display order determination table referred to in the display order setting process of FIG. 35. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of command determination processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st stop symbol selection table and the variation type table used when the variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 37. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an effect pattern type selection table used when a variation pattern command is received in the command determination process of FIG. 37. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of setting value suggestion processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a 7-segment display unit control process executed in the set value suggestion process of FIG. 40. The figure for demonstrating the 7-segment display part control information storage area set in the voice lamp control device. The figure for demonstrating the control example of the segment display part, and the update example of the 7-segment display part control information storage area. The figure for demonstrating the control example of a 7-segment display part. The figure for demonstrating the update example of the 7-segment display part control information storage area. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the ending addition image control processing executed in the setting value suggestion processing of FIG. 40. The figure which shows the screen transition example in the ending production of a jackpot game. The flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the setting value suggestion processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine which concerns on 2nd Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the 7-segment display unit control process executed in the set value suggestion process of FIG. 48. FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of an ending additional image control process executed in the set value suggestion process of FIG. 48. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of display order setting processing executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine according to the third embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a table referred to in the display order setting process of FIG. 51. The perspective view which shows an example of the structure of the gaming machine which concerns on 4th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an example of a system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 53. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a sub-timer interrupt process executed by the voice lamp control device of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 53. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of an operation detection process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 55. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the operation button operation detection process executed in the operation detection process of FIG. 56. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process executed in the operation detection process of FIG. 56. A table showing the relationship between the detection pattern and the operation status. The figure which shows the screen transition example in the symbol display part in a standby state. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a standby state screen transition process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 55. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of a standby state screen transition process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 55. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of the 7-segment history selection screen processing executed in the standby state screen transition processing of FIG. 62. The front view which shows an example of the gaming board of the gaming machine which concerns on 5th Embodiment of this invention. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an example of a system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 64. The figure which shows the example of turning on and off in the lamp display part. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing an example of a procedure of setting value suggestion processing executed in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. 34. The figure for demonstrating the update example of the 7-segment display part control information storage area set in the voice lamp control device. It is a figure which shows the screen transition example in the round game when the lamp display part is controlled in a jackpot game. The figure which shows the display screen example in the ending effect of a jackpot game. The figure which shows another example of a lamp display part.

Hereinafter, the first to fifth embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings, and the present invention will be understood. Further, each of the following embodiments is an example embodying the present invention, and does not limit the technical scope of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
First, the gaming machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 47.

[Outline configuration of gaming machine 10]
Here, FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the gaming machine 10, FIGS. 2 and 3 are development views of the gaming machine 10, and FIG. 4 is a front view of the gaming board 31 of the gaming machine 10. Hereinafter, the front-back, left-right, and up-down expressions used in the present embodiment are defined by the front-back direction D1, the up-down direction D2, and the left-right direction D3 shown in FIGS.

As shown in FIGS. 1 to 3, the gaming machine 10 is a pachinko gaming machine including a front frame 11, an inner frame 12, a back pack unit 13, and an outer frame 14, and is provided on an island facility (not shown) in a gaming hall. By fixing the outer frame 14, it is installed in the game hall. In the present embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine, but other gaming machines such as a rotating body type gaming machine (slot machine), an arrange ball gaming machine, and a Jiyan ball gaming machine will be described. The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines.

[Structure of front frame 11]
The front frame 11 can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame 14 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the outer frame 14. Further, the inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the front frame 11. Further, the back pack unit 13 can be opened and closed with respect to the inner frame 12 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the inner frame 12.

The front frame 11 includes an operation button 20, a firing handle 22, an upper plate 23, a lower plate 24, a panel 25, a speaker 26, an illumination unit 27, and the like.

The operation button 20 is provided in front of the upper plate 23. The operation button 20 includes an operation switch 20a (see FIG. 12) that switches an input signal to the voice lamp control device 5 described later according to the presence or absence of a pressing operation. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the operation state (with or without operation) of the operation button 20. The operation button 20 is executed triggered by an operation on the operation button 20 by the player during a predetermined operation acceptance period in the variable game production executed in the variable game in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is clearly shown to the player. Operation buttons Operated to execute effects.

The installation position of the operation button 20 is not limited to the front of the upper plate 23, and may be any position of the front frame 11 as long as it can be operated by the player. Further, the number of operation buttons 20 is not limited to one, and may be two or more.

Further, instead of the operation button 20, it is conceivable to provide a touch panel that displays a touch key and accepts an operation of the touch key by a player. Further, the operation button 20 may be provided with a jog dial. In these cases, the player's operation on the touch panel or the panel 25 in the variable game effect is reflected in the operation button effect and the like.

The firing handle 22 is a rotary handle operated by the player to launch the game ball. In the game machine 10, a basic game is performed by firing a game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 32, which will be described later, with a strength corresponding to the amount of rotation of the launch handle 22 by the player. In the gaming machine 10, when the firing handle 22 is operated by the player, the gaming ball launching mechanism 32 is driven and controlled so that one gaming ball is launched toward the gaming area every 0.6 sec.

The upper plate 23 is arranged below the panel 25, stores the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 of the payout mechanism 130 described later, and arranges the stored game balls in a row. It is used to guide the game ball launch mechanism 32. Further, the lower plate 24 is provided further below the upper plate 23, and is used for storing the game balls surplus in the upper plate 23.

The panel 25 is colorless transparent or colored transparent glass or synthetic resin that allows the player to visually recognize the game board 31 of the inner frame 12 from the front of the game machine 10. The speakers 26 are a pair of speakers provided on the left and right sides of the upper end portion of the front frame 11, and execute an audio output effect for outputting audio. The installation position of the speaker 26 is not limited to the upper end of the front frame 11. Further, the illumination unit 27 has a built-in light source such as an indicator lamp and an LED, and executes a lamp effect according to a blinking mode such as a lighting color, lighting or extinguishing.

[Structure of inner frame 12]
As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the inner frame 12 includes a game board 31, a game ball launch mechanism 32, and a control unit 33. The inner frame 12 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11 by rotatably supporting the left end portion of the front frame 11 as described above. Therefore, the game board 31, the game ball launch mechanism 32, and the control unit 33 can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11. In FIG. 2, the description on the board surface of the game board 31 is omitted for the sake of simplification of the illustration.

The control unit 33 is provided on the back side of the game board 31, and has a main control unit 331 and a sub control unit 332. In the gaming machine 10, a command (control signal) for instructing the control content is transmitted from the main control unit 331 to one direction of the sub control unit 332. Details of the main control unit 331 and the sub control unit 332 will be described in detail later.

As shown in FIG. 4, the game board 31 has an inner rail 311, an outer rail 312, a general winning opening 313, a first winning opening 314, a second winning opening 315, a variable winning opening 316, a through gate 317, and an out opening 318. , A variable display unit 34, a main display unit 36, a crune device 37, a game ball retention unit 38, and a 7-segment display unit 39 are provided.

The inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 are transport paths for sending the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the game area on the board surface of the game board 31. Then, after being launched from the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312, the game balls that did not enter the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, or the variable winning opening 316 are discharged from the out opening 318. Will be done.

Here, as shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 32 includes a launching rail 321, a ball feeding device 322, and a solenoid 323. The launch rail 321 is formed from the game ball launch mechanism 32 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312 of the game board 31, and the game ball launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 is formed on the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. It is a guide. The ball feeding device 322 has a driving means such as a solenoid, and supplies the game balls stored in the upper plate 23 one by one onto the launch rail 321. The solenoid 323 is a driving means for launching the game ball supplied on the launch rail 321 toward the inner rail 311 and the outer rail 312. Then, in the game machine 10, the solenoid 323 is driven and controlled in response to the operation of the launch handle 22 by the player, and the game ball is launched from the game ball launch mechanism 32 to the game board 31. The game ball launching mechanism 32 may be a mechanism for launching the game ball by using another driving means such as a motor instead of the solenoid 323.

Returning to the description of FIG. 4, openings penetrating the game board 31 in the front-rear direction are formed in the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, the variable winning opening 316, and the out opening opening 318. ing. Then, on the back side of the game board 31, the entry of the game ball can be individually detected corresponding to each of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316. Ball entry sensors 313a, 314a, 315a, 316a (see FIG. 12) are provided. Further, the game balls that have passed through the openings of the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the out opening 318 are collected on the back side of the game board 31, and the out ball sensor 318a described later is collected. (See FIG. 12). Further, the variable winning opening 316 is provided in the central portion on the right side of the game board 31, and a game ball launched in the right area of the game board 31 can enter the ball. The game ball that has passed through the penetrating portion 316b of the variable winning opening 316 is guided to the crune device 37 by the guide path 316c (see FIG. 6) described later. The through gate 317 is a gate through which the game ball can pass, and has a ball entry sensor 317a (see FIG. 12) capable of individually detecting the game ball passing through the through gate 317. In the game board 31, there is a possibility that the game ball launched in the right area of the game board 31 passes through the through gate 317, and the second winning opening is triggered by the detection of the passage of the game ball at the through gate 317. A normal winning lottery for whether or not to open 315 is executed.

The ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a and the special out ball sensor 384 (see FIG. 12) are electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a and the special out ball sensor 318a. The detection result of the ball sensor 384 is input to the main control unit 331. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) transmits a command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the game ball according to the detection results of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a. Hereinafter, the detection of the entry of a game ball by the entry sensors 313a to 316a may be referred to as winning. Further, the main control unit 331 (MPU41) counts the number of out balls based on the detection result of the out ball sensor 318a. The number of out balls counted here coincides with the number of launched game balls launched on the game board 31 by the game ball launch mechanism 32.

Further, the main control unit 331 (MPU41) determines that the game ball detected based on the detection result of the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 described later. The special out-ball detection command shown is set, and this special out-ball detection command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. 23. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls.

The ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a, and the special out ball sensor 384 are, for example, electromagnetic induction type proximity sensors, but it is possible to individually detect the ball entry of a game ball by another detection method. Any sensor may be used.

Further, the second winning opening 315 is provided with an electric accessory (electric role) 315b for switching whether or not there is a restriction on the entry of the game ball into the second winning opening 315. The electric accessory 315b is opened and closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, the electric accessory 315b opens to allow the game ball to enter the second winning opening 315, and the electric accessory 315b closes to allow the game ball to enter the second winning opening 315. The sphere is restricted.

Further, the variable winning opening 316 is provided with an opening / closing door 319 for switching whether or not there is a restriction on the entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening 316. The opening / closing door 319 is opened / closed by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. Then, in the game board 31, the opening / closing door 319 allows the game ball to enter the variable winning opening 316, and the opening / closing door 319 restricts the entry of the game ball into the variable winning opening 316. NS. The opening / closing door 319 is moved to a position where the variable winning opening 316 is opened in the round game in the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot game, and is otherwise waited at a position where the variable winning opening 316 is closed. As a result, the game ball 99 launched in the right area of the game board 31 in the round game in the jackpot game can enter the variable winning opening 316.

As shown in FIGS. 5 and 6, the opening / closing door 319 has a base 319a, a pair of guard walls 319b, and a pair of guides 319c. The base 319a has a pair of attachment portions 319d for rotatably attaching the opening / closing door 319 to the game board 31, and projects slightly upward from the game board 31 when the opening / closing door 319 is in the operating position. .. As a result, the opening / closing door 319 can receive the game ball 99 launched into the right region of the game board 31 when it is in the operating position. The pair of guard walls 319b extend at the left and right edges of the base 319a to prevent the game ball 99 received by the base 319a from spilling from the left and right sides of the base 319a. Further, the pair of guides 319c guide the game ball 99 received by the base 319a to the variable winning opening 316. The pair of guides 319c extend from the guard wall 319b to the vicinity of the variable winning opening 316, forming a gap through which the game ball 99 can pass. Further, the variable winning opening 316 has a penetrating portion 316b for discharging the game ball 99 received by the opening / closing door 319 to the back side of the game board 31. The penetrating portion 316b communicates with the guide path 316c provided on the back side of the game board 31. The guide path 316c extends in the vertical direction D2 and has a lower opening. Then, the game ball 99 received by the opening / closing door 319 is entered into the variable winning opening 316 and guided to the crune device 37 via the penetrating portion 316b and the guide path 316c. The guide path 316c is provided with a ball entry sensor 316a. As a result, the game ball 99 entered into the variable winning opening 316 is detected when it passes through the penetrating portion 316b and is introduced into the guide path 316c. The ball entry sensor 316a is electrically connected to the main control unit 331. As a result, the detection result of the ball entry sensor 316a is input to the main control unit 331, and the main control unit 331 can detect that the game ball 99 has entered the variable winning opening 316.

In the gaming machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 is detected by the entry sensor 314a or the entry sensor 315a, the main control unit 331 performs a big hit lottery. Then, the main control unit 331 controls the display of the main display unit 36 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. Further, the lottery result by the main control unit 331 is transmitted to the sub control unit 332, and the sub control unit 332 controls the display of the variable display unit 34 and the like according to the lottery result.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, when the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316 is detected by the entry sensors 313a to 316a, A preset number of prize balls will be paid out. For example, the number of prize balls when entering the general winning opening 313 is 10, the number of winning balls when entering the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315 is 3, and the number of winning balls is entered into the variable winning opening 316. If so, the number of prize balls is 10. In particular, in the gaming machine 10, when the lottery result performed by the main control unit 331 is a jackpot, the gaming machine 10 shifts to the jackpot gaming state (special gaming state), and the variable winning opening 316 is opened, which will be described later. ) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (for example, 5 or 16 times), so that a large amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out.

Further, when a game ball wins a prize in the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, a big hit lottery is executed. Then, when the lottery result is won, the game shifts to a predetermined jackpot game state which is more advantageous than the normal game state. In the present embodiment, the jackpot gaming state includes a 5R jackpot gaming state (5R normal jackpot gaming state and 5R probability variation jackpot gaming state), and a 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state. In the 5R jackpot game state, there are five round games (unit games) in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened until a predetermined time elapses or until a maximum number (for example, 9) or more game balls are won in the variable winning opening 316. It is a gaming state including an opening / closing execution mode to be performed. The 16R probability variation jackpot game state is a game state including an open / close execution mode in which a round game (unit game) is performed 16 times, and a larger amount of prize balls can be expected to be paid out than in the 5R jackpot game state, compared to the 5R jackpot game state. It is an advantageous gaming state for the player.

As shown in FIG. 4, the variable display unit 34 has a symbol display unit 341 such as a liquid crystal display that is visibly arranged through an opening 31A formed in a substantially central portion of the game board 31. The symbol display unit 341 displays a still image or a moving image, and the display content of the symbol display unit 341 is controlled by the sub control unit 332. Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, a variable display effect of the decorative symbol according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery performed by the main control unit 331 according to the ball entering the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315. , And various image effects such as the variable game effect executed in association with the variable display effect are performed. Further, the symbol display unit 341 may be a dot matrix display, a plasma display, an organic EL display, or the like, or may be a combination of a liquid crystal display or a plasma display and an organic EL display.

For example, in the variable display effect of the decorative symbol on the symbol display unit 341, for example, a plurality of types of decorative symbols with numbers "1" to "9" are scrolled in the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, the diagonal direction, and the like in order. Will be done. In addition, sub-designs such as other characters or symbols may be displayed between the decorative symbols. Further, in the present embodiment, there are no sub-symbols, and there are nine types of decorative symbols "1" to "9".

In the gaming machine 10, in the variable game, the decorative symbol variation display is executed so that the variation of all the decorative symbols stops after the lapse of the preset variation display time from the start of the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341. Will be done. More specifically, in the variation display of the decorative symbol, first, all the decorative symbols are varied along the preset variation directions (for example, the horizontal direction, the vertical direction, etc.), and the variation of the plurality of decorative symbols is stopped in order. Then, when the variation of the decorative symbol on all the lines is stopped and a predetermined time elapses, the variation display of the decorative symbol ends.

When the variation display of the decorative symbol on the symbol display unit 341 is completed, the symbol display unit 341 displays a state in which the decorative symbols are lined up on one or a plurality of effective lines. At this time, the stopped state of the decorative symbol clearly or suggests the lottery result in the jackpot lottery by the main control unit 331. For example, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot" or "5R normal jackpot", a state in which decorative symbols of the same type are lined up on the effective line is displayed, and it is clearly indicated that the lottery is a jackpot. Will be done. In addition, the jackpot type may be specified by the combination of decorative symbols on the effective line, but it is not always specified. Specifically, for example, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", a state in which, for example, "777" symbol combinations set as symbol combinations indicating 16R probability variation jackpot among decorative symbols are lined up on the effective line. Is displayed, or a state in which combinations of the same decorative symbols other than "777" are lined up on the effective line is displayed. Further, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", a state in which symbol combinations such as "333", which are set in advance as symbol combinations indicating 5R probability variation jackpot among the decorative symbols, are lined up on the effective line is displayed. Or, a state in which the same combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of symbols indicating 16R probability variation jackpot or 5R probability variation jackpot such as "777" and "333" is lined up on the effective line is displayed. Further, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", other than the combination of decorative symbols such as "222" and "444" which are set in advance as a symbol combination indicating a normal jackpot among the decorative symbols. The state in which the same combination of decorative patterns is lined up on the effective line is displayed. When the lottery result is "off", a state in which a combination of different decorative symbols is lined up on the effective line (for example, "323" or "723") is displayed.

Further, the symbol display unit 341 displays a variable display of the decorative symbol in the variable game and a variable game effect suggesting the degree of expectation that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit. If the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot" and a state in which jackpot symbol combinations other than the decorative symbol combination indicating the 16R probability variation jackpot is lined up on the effective line is displayed, the 5R probability variation jackpot is displayed as a variable game effect. Alternatively, a suggestion effect suggesting that the 5R is a normal jackpot is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 16R probability variation jackpot is executed. Similarly, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" and a state in which jackpot symbol combinations other than the combination of decorative symbols indicating the probability variation jackpot are lined up on the effective line is displayed, the 5R normal jackpot is displayed as a variable game effect. A suggestion effect suggesting that is is executed. In this case, in the jackpot game effect, a promotion effect or the like that clearly indicates that the lottery result for the variable game is a 5R probability variation jackpot is executed.

Further, when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state, the symbol display unit 341 displays a jackpot game effect including an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode effect, and an ending effect.

Further, it is conceivable to provide the game board 31 with a magnet sensor and a radio wave sensor (both not shown). The magnet sensor is provided, for example, around the first winning opening 314 and the variable winning opening 316. The magnet sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit, and the detection result of the magnet sensor is input to the main control unit 331. As a result, when an act of illegally guiding the game ball to the first winning opening 314 or the variable winning opening 316 using a magnet is performed, the fraudulent act can be detected. On the other hand, the radio wave sensor is provided around, for example, the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315. The radio wave sensor is electrically connected to the main control unit 331, and the detection result of the radio wave sensor is input to the main control unit 331. As a result, when an act of illegally inputting a radio wave into the ball entry sensors 314a and 315a to erroneously detect the entry of a game ball is performed, the fraudulent act can be detected. The radio wave sensor can detect radio waves of, for example, 50 MHz to 3 GHz.

As shown in FIG. 4, the crune device 37 puts the game ball entered in the variable winning opening 316 into either the normal out ball opening 378 or the special out ball opening 373 (see FIGS. 7 and 8) described later. It is something to sort. Here, FIG. 6 is a diagram showing an example of an opening / closing door 319, a crune device 37, and a game ball retention portion 38 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the crune device 37, and FIG. 8 is FIG. It is sectional drawing which follows the X1-X1 cutting line of.

As shown in FIGS. 6 to 8, the crune device 37 has a dish shape having a bottom wall 371 and an annular peripheral wall 372 surrounding the bottom wall 371. The bottom wall 371 is circular in a plan view, and has a high bottom portion 371a, a low bottom portion 371b, and a downward-sloping inclined portion 371c provided between the high bottom portion 371a and the low bottom portion 371b.

The high bottom portion 371a constitutes a right side portion of the bottom wall 371 and is inclined downward to the right. The high bottom portion 371a is provided with a special out ball passage 374 having a special out ball mouth 373 (special discharge port). The special out ball passage 374 is provided adjacent to the right edge of the inclined portion 371c and extends in the vertical direction D2 at the central portion of the high bottom portion 371a in the front-rear direction D1. The special out ball passage 374 is formed in a cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than the diameter of the game ball 99. Further, a first guide member 375 is connected to the lower end of the special out ball passage 374. The first guide member 375 is for guiding the game ball 99 passing through the special out ball passage 374 to the game ball retention portion 38. The first guide member 375 has an upper opening 375a and a lower opening 375b connected to the lower end of the special out-ball passage 374. The lower opening 375b is provided on the right side of the upper opening 375a, and discharges the game ball 99 of the special out ball passage 374 from the right side of the special out ball passage 374 toward the game ball retention portion 38.

It is also possible to give the first guide member 375 a function of retaining the game ball 99 that cannot be retained in the game ball retention portion 38. By the way, in the present embodiment, the numbers (specific information) corresponding to the non-set values that are the game set values other than the set values that are the game set values set in the game machine 10 are set in the predetermined period (see FIG. 9). It is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the number of game balls 99 (the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period) that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37. Further, in the present embodiment, since the number of segments of the 7-segment display unit 39 is 7 (excluding the dot point DP), one non-set value can be reliably specified with 7 pieces of information. Further, since the game setting values are in 6 stages of 1 to 6, there are 5 non-setting values, and therefore all the non-setting values can be specified by 35 pieces of information. That is, the gaming machine 10 is required to be able to present at least 35 pieces (specified number of pieces of information) of information. Therefore, it is preferable that the game ball retention unit 38 is configured so that a predetermined number or more of game balls 99 can be retained during a specific period (see FIG. 9) described later. However, depending on the arrangement of various members of the gaming machine 10, it may be difficult to configure the gaming ball retaining portion 38 to retain a predetermined number or more of the gaming balls 99. In this case, by providing the first guide member 375 with a function of storing the game balls 99, a number of game balls 99, which is difficult to be stored only by the game ball retention portion 38, are retained by using the first guide member 375. be able to. As a result, it becomes possible to retain a predetermined number or more of the game balls 99 in a specific period, and information necessary for specifying all the non-set values is presented. Similarly, the game ball 99 may be retained in the special out ball passage 374 to which the first guide member 375 is connected. As a result, due to the arrangement of various members, it is difficult to retain more than the specified number of game balls 99 even if the first guide member 375 has a function of retaining the game balls 99 as well as the game ball retention portion 38. In such a case, by using the special out ball passage 374, it is possible to retain a predetermined number or more of the game balls 99. As a result, it becomes possible to retain a predetermined number or more of the game balls 99 in a specific period, and there is a possibility that information necessary for specifying all the non-set values is presented.

On the other hand, it is also conceivable to set a limit on the number of game balls 99 to be retained in a specific period. For example, it is conceivable to set the limit number to the specified number (match the limit number with the specified number). In this case, for example, when the number of information (individual information of the specific information) corresponding to the number of the game balls 99 entering the special out ball mouth 373 is presented, all the non-set values are set in one specific period. Information may be provided to identify. Further, when information on the number of game balls 99 that satisfy a predetermined condition among the game balls 99 to the special out ball mouth 373, for example, the number corresponding to the number of winning lottery is presented, the lottery is won. The expected number of information according to the probability is presented, and since the expected number of this information is basically smaller than the specified number, it is possible that not all the information necessary to identify all the non-set values is presented. There is. As a result, it is possible to prevent the set value from being specified by the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball mouth 373 in one specific period, and as a result, when the set value is low (when the jackpot probability is low). In addition, it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game on the gaming machine 10 during the game at an early stage.

As a means for setting a limit on the number of game balls 99 to be retained in a specific period, for example, a configuration in which the game balls 99 are retained in the game ball retention portion 38, the first guide member 375, and the special out ball passage 374 is adopted. However, when a limited number of game balls 99 are entered into the special out ball passage 374, the game balls 99 are positioned in the vicinity of the special out ball mouth 373 (by causing a ball jam), which is special. It is conceivable to limit the entry of the game ball 99 into the out ball passage 374. According to such a configuration, it is possible to limit the number of game balls 99 to be retained for a specific period to a limited number by a simple mechanical configuration without requiring a complicated configuration or control.

On the other hand, the game ball retention portion 38 has a retention lane 381 inclined downward to the left as described later. That is, the first guiding member 375 guides the game ball 99 to the right portion (upstream side) of the retention lane 381 in the game ball retention portion 38. Then, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball mouth 373 does not enter the various winning openings 313 to 316 and does not pass through the through gate 317. Therefore, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball mouth 373 is when the ball cannot be expected to enter the various winning openings 313 to 316 or pass through the through gate 317, for example, when it is introduced into the special out ball passage 374 (special). It is treated as an out ball at the time when it is detected by the out ball sensor 384).

The low bottom portion 371b constitutes the left side portion of the bottom wall 371 and is inclined so as to be low toward the center. The lower bottom 371b is provided with a normal passage 376 having a normal out ball mouth 378. The normal passage 376 is provided so as to extend in the vertical direction D2 at a position adjacent to the left edge of the inclined portion 371c, except for a portion along the peripheral wall 372 in the lower bottom portion 371b. The normal passage 376 is for guiding the game ball 99 that has entered through the normal out ball mouth 378 to the back side of the game board 31, and has a semi-cylindrical shape having a larger opening area than the special out ball mouth 373. Is formed in. A second guide member 377 is connected to the lower end of the normal passage 376. The second guide member 377 collects the game balls 99 passing through the normal passage 376 on the back side of the game board 31 in the same manner as the game balls passing through the opening of the out port 318. Then, the game ball 99 collected by the second guide member 377 is detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12) and counted as an out ball.

In such a crune device 37, a game ball 99 launched into the right region of the game board 31 and received by the opening / closing door 319 as described above is guided by the guide path 316c. Then, the game ball 99 guided by the crune device 37 moves on the bottom wall 371 along the peripheral wall 372. As a result, the flow of the game ball 99 is delayed in the crune device 37. Then, most of the game balls 99 moving on the bottom wall 371 usually have an out ball mouth due to, for example, a decrease in kinetic energy and a collision with the peripheral wall 372 of the crune device 37 or another game ball 99. Enter the ball at 378. The game ball 99 that has entered the normal out ball mouth 378 moves through the normal passage 376 and the second guide member 377 and is guided to a position that can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

On the other hand, a part of the game ball moving on the bottom wall 371 usually changes its moving direction due to a collision with the peripheral edge of the out ball mouth 378 or another game ball, and enters the special out ball mouth 373. do. The game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball mouth 373 is discharged toward the game ball retention portion 38 via the special out ball passage 374 and the first guide member 375.

Here, the probability of the game ball 99 moving on the bottom wall 371 entering the special out ball mouth 373 is set to, for example, 0.5% or more and 5% or less, preferably 1% or more and 3% or less. .. In other words, the expected number of balls to enter the special out ball mouth 373 per 10R round game is set to, for example, 0.5 or more and 5 or less, preferably 1 or more and 3 or less. By setting the ball entry probability or the expected number of ball entry in such a range, it is possible to prevent the player from identifying the set value at an early stage, but it is possible to realistically specify the set value. It will be possible. As a result, while preventing the game on the gaming machine 10 from being terminated when the set value is specified early, such as when the set value is low, the gaming machine feels bored due to the inability to specify the set value. It is possible to prevent the game at 10 from being terminated.

In the present embodiment, the special out ball mouth 373 is provided on the high bottom portion 371a of the bottom wall 371, and the normal out ball mouth 378 has a larger opening area than the special out ball mouth 373. Therefore, the special out ball mouth 373 Is significantly more difficult for the game ball 99 to enter than the normal out ball mouth 378, but in place of or in addition to all or part of these, the game ball is inserted into the special out ball mouth 373 by other means. It is also possible that 99 makes it difficult to enter the ball. For example, it is conceivable to provide an obstructing means for inhibiting the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball mouth 373 in the peripheral portion of the special out ball mouth 373. Examples of the blocking means include an obstacle that hinders entry into the special out ball mouth 373, such as a wall surrounding the special out ball mouth 373, and a magnetic force or electromagnetic force that repels the game ball 99 in the peripheral portion of the special out ball mouth 373. A means for generating a force and a means for forming an air curtain by ejecting air around the special out ball mouth 373 can be considered.

Further, an opening / closing portion for opening / closing the special out ball mouth 373 may be provided, and the opening / closing portion may make it difficult for the game ball to enter the special out ball mouth 373. In this case, the special out ball mouth 373 may be provided on the same plane as the normal out ball mouth 378, and the normal out ball mouth 378 is formed as having the same or substantially the same opening area as the special out ball mouth 373. May be good.

Further, the distribution means for distributing the game ball 99 entered in the variable winning opening 316 into the normal out ball opening 378 and the special out ball opening 373 is not limited to the crune device 37, and may be another means. For example, by adjusting the arrangement of a rotating member such as a switching valve, a rotating member, or a nail placed on the game board 31, the normal out ball mouth 378 and the special out ball mouth 373 may be distributed. ..

As shown in FIGS. 4 and 8, the game ball retention unit 38 receives the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37, and retains the game ball 99 until a specific period elapses. Is. Then, after the elapse of the specific period, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39, which will be described later, are controlled, and 7 according to the cumulative number of the game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 by the elapse of the predetermined period. A number is displayed on the segment display unit 39. Here, FIG. 9 shows a specific period for retaining the game ball in the game ball retention portion, a predetermined period for accumulating the number of game balls that have entered the special out ball mouth of the crune device, and specific information indicating a non-set value. It is a figure for demonstrating the specified period to be displayed on a 7-segment display part.

In the following, referring to FIG. 9, the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 for a predetermined period as a period for retaining the game ball 99 in the game ball retention portion 38. As the period for accumulating the number, all the numbers (specific information) indicating the non-set value based on the number of the game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 in the "specified period" in the specific period, or Although a part of the period is described as a period for displaying a part on the 7-segment display unit 39, the "specific period" is not limited to the period for retaining the game ball 99 in the game ball retention unit 38, and the "predetermined period" is the crune device. It is not limited to the period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 of 37. That is, the "specific period", "predetermined period" and "specified period" include at least the period described below.

As shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, during the specific period in which the game ball 99 is retained in the game ball retention portion 38, the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot game is set after the jackpot game (opening) is started. It is until the end (ending starts), and a specific period is set for each jackpot game started in a predetermined period. That is, the beginning of the specific period is the time when the jackpot game is started, and the end of the specific period is the time when the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game is ended (the time when the ending is started). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9A, when a normal jackpot is won in the low probability mode (when the first hit is a normal jackpot and a single jackpot), the jackpot game is started for a specific period. From to the end of the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game. Further, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the probability variation jackpot is won in the low probability mode (when the first hit is the probability variation jackpot and the jackpot consecutive villa is started), when the normal jackpot is won in the high probability mode. For all the jackpot games that are executed until the jackpot consecutive villa is finished by the normal jackpot game, the period from the start of each jackpot game to the end of the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game is specified. Set as a period. That is, in the jackpot villa, a plurality of specific periods are set according to the number of jackpot games executed during the jackpot villa.

In other words, regardless of the type of jackpot and the winning timing, the number corresponding to the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 during a specific period of one jackpot game, which will be described later, is 7. The segments A to G of the segment display unit 39 are controlled to turn on and off during the ending of the jackpot game during the specified period. That is, in the specified period, the probability that the lottery result in the big hit lottery set in the game machine 10 will be a big hit based on the number of the game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 in the specific period. A number indicating a game set value (a plurality of non-set values) other than the game set value (set value) that defines the above is set as a period for displaying on the 7-segment display unit 39.

If the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 during a specific period of one jackpot game is 7 or more and less than 14, the jackpot lottery set for the game machine 10 is performed. A number that specifies a game setting value (plural non-setting values) other than the game setting value (setting value) that defines the probability that the lottery result will be a big hit is set in the display order setting process of FIG. 36 described later. One is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending (specified period) after the lapse of a specific period in the jackpot game. Further, in the ending (specified period) after the lapse of a specific period in the jackpot game, the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball mouth 373 in the specific period of one jackpot game is 14 on the 7-segment display unit 39. When the number is 20 or more and less than 20, two numbers for specifying a plurality of non-setting values are displayed in the order corresponding to the display order, and when the number is 21 or more and less than 28, a plurality of non-setting values are specified. The three numbers to be displayed are displayed in the order according to the display order, and when the number is 28 or more and less than 35, the four numbers specifying a plurality of non-set values are displayed in the order according to the display order. When the number is 35 or more, five numbers (all numbers) that specify a plurality of non-set values are displayed in an order according to the display order. If the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 during the specific period of one jackpot game is less than 7, the ending (specified period) after the lapse of the specific period in the jackpot game is 7 The segment display unit 39 does not display any number that specifies a plurality of non-set values.

As described above, in the game machine 10, each time the jackpot game is executed, the 7-segment display unit 39 described later is based on the number of the game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 during a specific period. One to five numbers that specify a plurality of non-set values can be displayed in, and the set values can be specified by displaying the numbers that specify the five non-set values. For example, it is possible to identify that the game setting value 1 is a non-set value by displaying the number 1 on the 7-segment display unit 39, and the game setting value by displaying the number 2 on the 7-segment display unit 39. It is possible to identify that 2 is a non-set value, and by displaying the number 3 on the 7-segment display unit 39, it is possible to identify that the game set value 3 is a non-set value, and the number 3 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. When 4 is displayed, it can be specified that the game set value 4 is a non-set value, and when the number 5 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, it is specified that the game set value 5 is a non-set value. It is possible to specify that the game set value 6 is a non-set value by displaying the number 6 on the 7-segment display unit 39. Further, since it can be specified that the non-set value is the game set value 2 to 6 by displaying the five numbers 2 to 6 on the 7-segment display unit 39, it is grasped that the set value is the game set value 1. can. Similarly, it can be grasped that the set value is the game set value 2 by displaying the five numbers 1, 3 to 6 on the 7-segment display unit 39, and 1, 2, 4 to 6 on the 7-segment display unit 39. It can be grasped that the set value is the game set value 3 by displaying the five numbers of, and the set value is the game by displaying the five numbers 1, 3, 5, and 6 on the 7-segment display unit 39. It can be grasped that the set value is 4, and it can be grasped that the set value is the game set value 5 by displaying the five numbers 1 to 4 and 6 on the 7-segment display unit 39, and 1 on the 7-segment display unit 39. It can be grasped that the set value is the game set value 6 by displaying the five numbers of ~ 5.

Further, the numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be grasped before all the segments A to G are controlled. For example, when segments A to G are controlled in the order of segment A → segment B → segment C → segment D → segment E → segment F → segment G, the first control target, segment A, is turned off. The candidates for the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 are "1" and "4". Then, when the sixth control target segment F is turned on, it can be recognized as "4", and when the segment F is turned off, it can be recognized as "1". That is, the numbers "1" or "4" can be recognized at the stage when the sixth control target, the segment F, before all the segments A to G are the control targets, is the control target. Further, when the segment A, which is the first control target, is turned on, the numerical candidates displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 are "2", "3", "5", and "6". Then, when the second control target segment B is turned on, it can be determined that it is either "2" or "3", and when the segment B is turned off, "5" and "" It can be determined that it is one of 6 ”. Further, when the third control target segment C is turned on, it can be recognized as “3”, and when the segment C is turned off, it can be recognized as “2”. That is, the number "2" or "3" can be recognized at the stage when the third control target, the segment C, before all the segments A to G are the control targets, is the control target. Further, when the fifth control target segment E is turned on, it can be recognized as “6”, and when the segment E is turned off, it can be recognized as “5”. That is, the number "5" or "6" can be recognized at the stage when the fifth control target, the segment E, before all the segments A to G are the control targets, is the control target. That is, the numbers "2" and "3" can be recognized at the stage when the third control target segment C is turned on or off, and the numbers "5" and "6" are the fifth control target segments. The numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when E is turned on or off, and the numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when the sixth control target segment F is turned on or off. Then, in the present embodiment, even if the numbers indicating the non-set values are grasped before all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 become the control target, all the segments A to G are controlled. Unless it becomes a target, control for displaying the next priority number is not started. As a result, in order to identify all the non-set values, the control for displaying the next priority number is started at the stage where the number corresponding to the non-set value can be grasped. Many specific conditions need to be met. As a result, the difficulty level until all the non-set values are specified, and by extension, the difficulty level in which the set values are recognized can be increased, so that the set values are prevented from being recognized in a short game time. Therefore, even when the set value is low, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the set value in a short time, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in the gaming time on the gaming machine 10, and the gaming machine 10 can be prevented from decreasing. It is possible to suppress the decrease in the operating rate of.

When the numbers indicating the non-set values are grasped before all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are controlled, the control for displaying the next priority number is started. It may be. For example, when the priority of the numbers is "1"-> "2"-> "3"-> ..., the segment F whose control order for the number "1" is the sixth is set as the control target. When it is determined that the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is "1", the number "1", which is the next priority, is not controlled without targeting the segment G having the 7th control order. 2 ”may be started to be displayed. By the way, when the segments A to G are controlled to display the next display target number after all the segments A to G are controlled targets, before all the segments A to G are controlled targets. Even if the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be recognized, the control of the segments A to G for displaying the numbers to be displayed next must be after all the segments A to G have been controlled. Does not start. Therefore, even if the player recognizes the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 before all the segments A to G are controlled, the display of the numbers to be displayed next is started. Up to, the information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in order to identify the numbers already recognized by the player. That is, when the segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all the segments A to G are controlled, the information unnecessary for the player is the 7-segment display unit 39. In the period when such unnecessary information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease. On the other hand, when the numbers indicating the non-set values are grasped before all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are controlled, the control for displaying the next priority number is performed. If it is started, after one non-set value can be specified, the segments A to G that do not contribute to the estimation of the non-set value cannot be controlled. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the segments A to G being unnecessarily controlled.

On the other hand, during the predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37, the normal jackpot opening / closing execution mode is set after the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode is started. Until the end. That is, the beginning of the predetermined period is the time when the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode is started, and the end of the predetermined period is the time when the opening / closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game is ended (the ending of the normal jackpot game is started). At the time of being done). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9A, when a normal jackpot is won in the low probability mode (when the first hit is a normal jackpot and a single jackpot), the jackpot game is started for a predetermined period. From to the end of the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game. That is, in the case of a single-shot jackpot, the predetermined period corresponds to a specific period in which the game ball 99 is retained in the game ball retention unit 38. Further, as shown in FIG. 9B, when the probability variation jackpot is won in the low probability mode (when the first hit is the probability variation jackpot and the jackpot consecutive villa is started), the jackpot consecutive villa is started for a predetermined period. It is the period from the start of the probabilistic jackpot game for the first hit that triggers to the end of the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the normal jackpot that triggers the end of the jackpot consecutive villa. That is, in the case of the jackpot consecutive villa, the predetermined period does not coincide with the specific period for retaining the game ball 99 in the game ball retention unit 38, and a plurality of predetermined periods are set according to the number of jackpot games started within the predetermined period.

By the way, when the jackpot game is started, the game is not ended in the middle of the jackpot game or the game is not ended in the middle of the jackpot consecutive villa unless there are special circumstances. Therefore, by setting a specific period for retaining the game ball 99 in the game ball retention unit 38 for each jackpot game, it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game before the end of the specific period. In addition, the predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 is from the start of the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the normal jackpot. By setting up to, it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game before the end of the predetermined period. Then, in the jackpot game, in the ending (specified period) after the lapse of the specific period, the number of the game balls 99 staying in the game ball retention unit 38 in the specific period (the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37) is entered. By controlling the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the number of game balls 99), information (all or part of the numbers corresponding to the non-set values) that can be specified or inferred from the non-set values is displayed, and is usually In the ending after the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the jackpot has elapsed, a non-set value can be specified or estimated according to the cumulative number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 in a predetermined period. Information (all or part of the numbers corresponding to the non-set values) is displayed. As a result, even when a player who does not know the timing when the non-set value other than the set value can be specified or can be guessed advances the game, the game is ended before the timing when the non-set value can be specified or guessed. Is prevented. Therefore, even a player who cannot know the timing at which the non-set value can be specified or can be guessed can specify or guess the non-set value, and the set value can be specified by specifying all the non-set values. Will also be possible. In addition, it is possible to eliminate the so-called hyena behavior of other players who play the game aiming at the timing when the non-set value can be specified or guessed.

Further, by setting a specific period for each jackpot game that starts in a predetermined period, in the consecutive villa jackpot, the predetermined period is set from the first jackpot to the last jackpot game of the jackpot consecutive villa. Therefore, the predetermined period is longer in the consecutive villa jackpot than in the single-shot hit, and the predetermined period becomes longer as the number of times the jackpot game is executed increases. As a result, there is a high possibility that the number of game balls 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 will be larger in the consecutive villa jackpot than in the single-shot hit, and the more consecutive villas are in the consecutive villa jackpot. There is a high possibility that the number of game balls 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 373 will increase. As a result, the player can obtain not only the expected value of the game value that can be obtained increases as the number of consecutive villa jackpots increases, but also a large amount of information for identifying or estimating the non-set value, and thus the non-set value and thus the set value. You can get the benefit of making it easier to guess or identify the value.

The start of the specific period in which the game ball 99 is retained in the game ball retention unit 38 may be set during the jackpot game, and the opening / closing execution mode starts not only at the start of the jackpot game (the opening of the first hit ends). It may be at the time when it is done. Further, the end of the specific period may be set during the jackpot game, or may be set during the ending that usually shifts after the jackpot. Preferably, the specific period is set as one section including the opening / closing execution mode for one big hit game. As a result, based on the number of specific conditions that are established when the game ball 99 is entered into the variable winning opening 316 in the open / close execution mode (the game ball 99 that has passed through the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37). Information for identifying the non-set value can be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 after the elapse of the specific period (based on the number of). As a result, in the open / close execution mode, the game can be enjoyed by paying attention to whether or not the game ball 99 is inserted into the special out ball mouth 373, and after the end of the open / close execution mode, that is, after a lapse of a specific period. Focusing on the content displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, the non-set value can be specified or estimated based on the displayed content to enjoy the game.

Further, the start of a predetermined period for cumulatively counting the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 is limited to the time when the big hit game for the first hit (big hit in the low probability mode) is started. Instead, you can set it to a jackpot game. Preferably, the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game for the first hit (big hit in the low probability mode), for example, the jackpot game for the first hit (big hit in the low probability mode) is started (the opening of the first hit ends). You may. In this way, by setting the start of the predetermined period to the jackpot game for the first hit, the predetermined period is always set for each first hit regardless of the single-shot jackpot or the consecutive villa jackpot. The opportunity to guess or identify the non-set value for the first hit is guaranteed at least once.

On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period may be set not only at the time when the open / close execution mode of the normal jackpot game ends but also during the jackpot game, for example, the ending of the jackpot game, typically the ending of the normal jackpot game. Can be considered. Further, the end of the predetermined period may be a time when the normal jackpot game ends (the ending at the jackpot ends) or a time when the time saving mode shifted after the normal jackpot ends. Further, in the present embodiment, the description is based on the premise of a loop probabilistic machine, but in other types of gaming machines such as ST machines, V-ST machines, and first-class and two-kind mixers, a predetermined period is set according to the mode. It is also possible to set it. For example, in the V-ST machine, when there is no V prize at the first hit (normal jackpot), the predetermined period is set in the same manner as in the case of the normal jackpot of the loop probability change machine, and when there is a V prize at the first hit (probability change jackpot). ), The start of the jackpot game of the first hit or the opening / closing execution mode is set as the start of the predetermined period, and the end time of the opening / closing execution mode in the jackpot without V prize, or the end time of the specified number of jackpot lottery in the high probability mode, etc. It is conceivable that it will be the end of a predetermined period.

It is also conceivable to set the predetermined period to the period during which the variable game is executed (the period from the end of the jackpot game to the start of the jackpot game) regardless of the jackpot game. For example, the predetermined period can be set according to the type of condition (specific condition) in which all or part of the specific information (number) indicating the non-set value is displayed, and the normal gaming state (high probability mode and high probability mode) can be set. The period of stay in the low frequency support mode (the period from the end of the time saving mode to the start of the next jackpot), the period of staying in the time saving mode (the period from the end of the normal jackpot to the transition to the normal gaming state) Period), the period of stay in the low probability mode (the period from the end of the normal jackpot to the start of the next jackpot game), until the predetermined number of jackpot lottery is received in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. A predetermined number of game balls 99 in the general winning opening 313 in one or both of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode, and the period until a predetermined number of ordinary winning lottery is received in one or both of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode. Until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are won in the first winning opening 314 in one or both of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode, one or both of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode. The period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are won in the second winning opening 315 in both sides, and the period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 pass through the through gate 317 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. , The period until a predetermined number of game balls 99 are launched into the game board 31 in one or both of the high probability mode and the low probability mode. Further, the predetermined period may be set for each variable game. That is, it is conceivable to set the predetermined period to the period from the start of the variable game (the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol) to the end of the variable game (the end of the variable display of the decorative symbol). In this case, the entire period of one variable game may be set as a predetermined period, or a part of the period of one variable game may be set as a predetermined period. When a part of the period of one variable game is set as a predetermined period, the predetermined period is the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the reach state of the decorative symbol, and from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol. The period from the start of the development effect such as the special reach effect, the period from the reach state of the decorative symbol to the start of the development effect, and the period from the reach state of the decorative symbol to the end of the development effect. Period, period when development production is executed, etc. can be considered.

In this way, by setting a predetermined period in the period in which the variable game is executed, it is possible to specify or estimate the non-set value and recognize or infer the set value even in a period other than the period in which the jackpot game is executed. It will be possible. This makes it possible to enjoy the progress of the game while specifying or estimating the non-set value (set value) during the period in which the variable game is executed.

When the predetermined period is set to the period during which the variable game is executed, the distribution means such as the crune device 37 normally launches the game ball 99 launched into the left region of the game board 31 to perform a left-handed game ball. Positions where 99 is distributed to the normal out ball mouth 378 and the special out ball mouth 373 (for example, the left side area (above or below the general winning opening 313) or the center area (above or side of the first winning opening 314) of the game board 31). ) Can be provided. In this case, the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated without performing a special launch (a right-handed launch of the game ball 99 in the right region of the game board 31). As a result, the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated while proceeding as usual without lowering the probability of the game ball 99 entering the general winning opening 313 or the first winning opening 314. Can be done.

Further, it is conceivable that the start of the predetermined period is set when the main power supply for the gaming machine 10 is turned on, depending on the type of specific conditions. Further, the end of the predetermined period may be set when the main power supply for the gaming machine 10 is turned off, depending on the type of specific conditions.

As a specific condition, instead of the game ball 99 distributed by the distribution means such as the crune device 37 being entered into the special out ball mouth 373 in a predetermined period, a specific area other than the special out ball mouth 373 is used. The game ball 99 passes through, for example, the game ball 99 passes through the through gate 317 or the game ball 99 is inserted into various winning openings 313 to 316.

Further, a game in which a game ball 99 that enters a general winning opening 313 or a first winning opening 314 or passes through a through gate 317 is guided to a sorting means such as a crune device 37, and is sorted by the sorting means. A specific condition may be that the ball 99 is inserted into the special out ball mouth 373. Also in this case, it is possible to enjoy the identification or guessing of the non-set value (set value) while proceeding with the game as usual without performing a special launch.

Further, the specific condition may be that a specific event that can occur in the progress of the game occurs. The specific event in this case may be either an advantageous event or an unfavorable event for the player. When a specific event is an event that is advantageous to the player, the player has all or part of the specific information indicating the non-set value (set value) in addition to the privilege obtained by the occurrence of the specific event. Can be further obtained. On the other hand, when a specific event is an event that is disadvantageous to the player, the player can relieve the disadvantage caused by the occurrence of the specific event, and all or one of the specific information indicating the non-set value (set value). You can get more parts. Specific events include, for example, winning a jackpot a predetermined number of times (including one) or more (a jackpot game is executed a predetermined number of times (including one) or more), a probability change or a normal jackpot a predetermined number of times (one time). (Including) Winning (probability change or normal jackpot game is executed more than a predetermined number of times (including once)), and the number of jackpot consecutive villas reaches a predetermined number of times or more (probability change by the time the normal jackpot is won) Winning the jackpot more than a predetermined number of times in a row), the number of jackpot lottery until winning the jackpot reaches the predetermined number or more, and the winning of the game ball 99 exceeding the upper limit in the round game of the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game (Over winning) may occur.

Further, as a specific event, a specific effect preset in a variable game or a jackpot game may be executed. The specific effect in this case is not particularly limited, and may be set to, for example, any of the non-reach effect and the reach effect, and may be set to any of the opening effect, the round game effect, and the ending effect. Typically, a specific effect is a premier effect in which a jackpot or a probabilistic jackpot is determined among the variable game effects, and a hold consecutive villa is executed after the end of the jackpot game in the jackpot game (at the start of the jackpot game). At the start of the open / close execution mode, at the end of the open / close execution mode, or at the end of the jackpot game, the lottery result is included in the hold at a specific time of the jackpot game). .. Further, as a specific event, it is conceivable that the decorative symbol is stopped or temporarily stopped (intermediate stop display) in a specific combination on the symbol display unit 341. For example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "777" on the symbol display unit 341, when it is stopped and displayed at a specific reach deviation such as "767", it is stopped and displayed at a specific non-reach deviation such as "367". Temporary stop display (intermediate stop) that clearly indicates that the development effect will be executed when the development effect such as super reach effect or special reach effect is executed as the reach effect, in addition to the case where the stop display is displayed at (separate eyes). Display) is possible. As a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) that clearly indicates that the development effect is executed, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the reach state (intermediate stop display), for example, "7 development 7". It is conceivable that a symbol that clearly indicates that a development effect such as "development" will be executed is temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol. In addition, a specific condition may be that a plurality of specific events of a specific combination occur.

Further, the specific condition may be satisfied in relation to the set value. That is, the set value may be included in the specific condition, and for example, the specific condition may be satisfied when a specific event occurs in the specific set value. In this case, while the type of the specific condition depends on the set value, the display order of the numbers indicating the non-set value on the 7-segment display unit 39 is defined by the set value as described later. Therefore, the numbers indicating the non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a different order depending on the type of the specific condition. This makes it possible to set the display order for each set value based on, for example, whether the jackpot lottery probability is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of numbers indicating multiple non-set values for each set value. become.

In addition, the specified period for displaying specific information indicating a non-set value or a part thereof (special information) when a specific condition is satisfied is not limited to the case where it is set for each ending of the jackpot game, and other It may be the timing, and it is conceivable to set it according to the relationship with a predetermined period, the relationship with a specific period, the relationship with a specific condition, and the like. For example, the specified period may be only the ending of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is typically set after the lapse of the predetermined period as described in the second embodiment described later. Other than that, for example, it may be after the end of the jackpot game. In addition, when the predetermined period is set to the execution period of the variable game, for example, when the decorative symbol starts to change in the variable game, the decorative symbol is in the reach state, the temporary stop display timing, the super reach effect, the special reach effect, etc. It is conceivable that the development production of the above is started, the development production is being executed, and so on. That is, it is conceivable to set the specified period to the period during which the variable game is executed. When the specified period is set to the period during which the variable game is executed, it becomes possible to display the specific information indicating the non-set value together with the result of the jackpot lottery. For example, when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is displayed by the variable display of the decorative symbol on the symbol display unit 341, it is also possible to display the specific information on the symbol display unit 341 at the same time. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in variable games by displaying specific information.

Here, FIG. 10A is a cross-sectional view taken along the X2-X2 cutting line of FIG. 8, and FIG. 10B is taken along the X3-X3 cutting line of FIG. 8 when the stopper portion 383 described later is at the upper limit position. FIG. 10 (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the X3-X3 cutting line of FIG. 8 when the stopper portion 383 is in the lower limit position. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game ball retention portion 38 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 8 in addition to FIG.

As shown in FIGS. 6, 8 and 10, the game ball retention unit 38 retains the game ball 99 in which the game ball is inserted into the special out ball mouth 373 for a specific period, and the retention lane 381. , A discharge lane 382 and a stopper 383 are provided.

The retention lane 381 accepts the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37, and allows the game ball 99 to stay. The upper part of the retention lane 381 is open and slopes downward to the left. The depth dimension of the retention lane 381 is smaller than the diameter of the game ball, and at least a part of the game ball 99 retained in the retention lane 381 is visible (see FIG. 4). As a result, it is possible to visually recognize that the game balls 99 are accumulated in the retention lane 381, and the number of the retained game balls 99, that is, the balls are entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 within a specific period. The number of game balls 99 can be visually recognized. Further, the retention lane 381 is preferably formed transparently with a resin or the like. By doing so, it becomes easy to grasp the number of game balls 99 stayed in the staying lane 381. Instead of or in addition to making the game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381 visible, the number of game balls 99 staying in the staying lane 381 may be displayed. The number of game balls 99 accumulated in the retention lane 381 may be displayed by, for example, the number of lamps lit, the image display on the symbol display unit 341, or the like.

The discharge lane 382 is continuous with the left end portion of the retention lane 381, and guides the game ball 99 retained in the retention lane 381 to a predetermined portion, for example, a position that can be detected by the out-ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

Further, the discharge lane 382 is provided with a special out-ball sensor 384. The special out-ball sensor 384 detects when the game ball 99 staying in the staying lane 381 moves in the discharge lane 382. That is, the special out ball sensor 384 counts the number of game balls 99 accumulated in the retention lane 381, that is, the number of special out balls that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 within a specific period. It will be used. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12, the special out-ball sensor 384 is connected to the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, and the MPU 41 monitors the output from the special out-ball sensor 384 by the MPU 41. It is determined whether or not the game ball 99 has moved in the discharge lane 382. Further, the MPU 41 sets a special out ball detection command when the game ball 99 is detected by the special out ball sensor 384, and outputs this special out ball detection command to the external output of step S1301 in the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the process. On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 5 receives the special out ball detection command, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls and displays the number on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the number of special out balls and the set value. The content is controlled (see the command determination process in FIG. 37 and the setting value suggestion process in FIG. 40).

As the special out-ball sensor 384, for example, an electromagnetic induction type proximity sensor is used, but the game ball 99 may be detected by another detection method (for example, an optical sensor). Further, the special out-ball sensor 384 may be connected to the voice lamp control device 5. In this case, the special out-ball detection command is not set in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4, but the voice lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out-balls based on the output from the special out-ball sensor 384.

The stopper portion 383 is provided between the retention lane 381 and the discharge lane 382, and is moved up and down between the upper limit position and the lower limit position by a driving means such as a solenoid provided on the back side of the game board 31. .. The upper limit position is a position where the tip portion protrudes upward, and when the stopper portion 383 is in the upper limit position, the game ball 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381 (see FIG. 10B). On the other hand, the lower limit position is a position where the tip portion does not protrude upward, and the stopper portion 383 is in the lower limit position so that the game ball 99 of the retention lane 381 can be discharged via the discharge lane 382 (FIG. FIG. 10 (C)). Then, the game ball 99 guided to the discharge lane 382 is guided to a position that can be detected by the out ball sensor 318a (see FIG. 12).

The means for allowing the game ball 99 to stay in the staying lane 381 and discharging the game ball 99 in the staying lane 381 to the discharge lane 382 is not limited to the stopper portion 383 that can move up and down, for example, a stopper that can move back and forth. It may be another means such as a portion, a stopper portion that can rotate between an upright state and a prone position, and the like. Further, the game ball 99 may be retained by preventing the game ball 99 from moving due to the action of the magnetic force or the electromagnetic force, and the game ball 99 may be discharged by canceling the action of the magnetic force or the electromagnetic force. .. Further, by making the retention lane 381 movable up and down, it is possible to realize a state in which the game ball 99 is retained and a state in which the game ball 99 is discharged. For example, the game ball 99 is retained by making the residence lane 381 stand by at a position lower than the discharge lane 382, while the game ball 99 is discharged by moving the retention lane 381 to a position higher than the discharge lane 382. It may be configured to shift to. In addition, the game board 31 is provided with an opening capable of discharging the game ball 99 on the back side of the game board 31, a position where the game ball 99 can be stayed in the retention lane 381, and the game board 99 from the opening. The staying lane 381 may be configured to be movable up and down with and from a position where it can be discharged to the back side of the lane. Further, by moving the box-shaped movable body instead of the staying lane 381, the game ball 99 can be kept in the movable body and the game ball 99 can be discharged to the back side of the game board 31. It is also possible.

Here, FIG. 11A is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment display unit 39 provided on the game board 31 shown in FIG. 4, and FIG. 11B is a diagram showing an example of displaying numbers on the 7-segment display unit. FIG. 11C is a diagram showing an example of displaying alphabets on the 7-segment display unit.

As shown in FIG. 11A, the 7-segment display unit 39 includes seven segments A to G and a dot point DP. The segments A to G and the dot point DP can be individually turned on and off, and the numbers are at least 1 to 6 as shown in FIG. 11 (B), and at least A to 6 as shown in FIG. 11 (C). The alphabet of F can be displayed. In the present embodiment, the 7-segment display unit 39 has a plurality (six) game settings corresponding to the jackpot probabilities (see FIGS. 14 (A) and 14 (B)) in which the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. From the value (numerical information), a plurality of (five) game set values (non-set values) other than the game set value (set value (predetermined numerical information)) set to specify the jackpot probability in the game machine 10 A number (specific information) indicating each of (specific numerical information)) is displayed as a number by turning on or off each of the segments A to G. Specifically, when the non-set value is the game set value 1, the 7-segment display unit 39 displays the number 1 by lighting the segments B and C, and the non-set value is the game set value. When the number is 2, the segments A, B, D, E and G are lit to display the number 2, and when the non-set value is the game set value 3, the segments A to D and G are lit. By doing so, the number 3 is displayed, and when the non-set value is the game setting value 4, the segments B, C, F and G are lit to display the number 4, and the non-set value is the game setting. When the value is 5, the segments A, C, D, F and G are lit to display the number 5, and when the non-set value is the game set value 6, the segments A, C to G are displayed. When it is lit, the number 6 is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, the dot point DP is lit at the stage when the number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed, and it is clearly shown that the number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed.

Further, the numbers corresponding to the non-set values on the 7-segment display unit 39 are displayed in the order determined when the main power is turned on (when the power is turned on) or when the set value is changed, as will be described later (FIGS. 35 and 35). 36). Further, as will be described later, the control order of turning on or off each of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 is set to segment A, segment B, segment C, segment D, segment E, segment F, and segment G ( It is fixed).

Then, in the 7-segment display unit 39, as described later, the segment corresponding to the number of game balls 99 (the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period) that entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 during the predetermined period. Is a control target for turning on and off, and a number or a part of the number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Here, the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 indicate non-set values other than the set values after the game set values. Therefore, a part of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 does not indicate the game set value, but indicates a part of the specific information indicating the non-set value, and corresponds to the one indicating the special information. .. In other words, the special information is displayed by using a part of a plurality of segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39. In this way, not only the number indicating the non-set value but also a part of the number (special information) is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, so that the player can display the number on the 7-segment display unit 39. In this case, not only the non-set value can be specified, but also the non-set value can be estimated based on a part of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, even when the number is not displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, the non-set value can be estimated and enjoyed based on a part of the number, so that the interest of the game is improved.

It should be noted that whether or not each of the segments A to G is the control target on the 7-segment display unit 39 may or may not be clearly indicated to the player. When it is clearly stated that each of the segments A to G is the control target, it becomes easier to estimate the set value as compared with the case where it is not clearly stated. Further, in the present embodiment, since the control order of each of the segments A to G is fixed, it is not clearly indicated that each of the segments A to G is the control target, and a method in which it is difficult to estimate the set value is adopted. Has been done. When clearly indicating to the player that each of the segments A to G is the control target, for example, by blinking the control target segment, it is clearly shown to the player that the segment is the control target, and the control target is controlled. It is conceivable to clearly indicate to the player that the segment is the control target by lighting the segment in a color different from that in the case of lighting the segment.

Further, the 7-segment display unit 39 may display the information for specifying the non-set value in the alphabet corresponding to the non-set value. For example, when the non-set value is the game set value 1, the alphabet A is displayed, when the non-set value is the game set value 2, the alphabet B is displayed, and the non-set value is the game set value 3. In this case, the alphabet C is displayed, the alphabet D is displayed when the non-set value is the game setting value 4, and the alphabet E is displayed when the non-set value is the game setting value 5, and the non-set value is displayed. It is conceivable that the alphabet F is displayed when the game setting value is 6 (see FIG. 11 (C)).

The main display unit 36 is a normal symbol display unit 361, a first special symbol display unit 362, a second special symbol display unit 363, a first reserved number display unit 364, and a second reserved number arranged in the upper right portion of the game board 31. A display unit 365 is provided.

The ordinary symbol display unit 361 includes an LED pair as an ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol), and is a lottery in a lottery per ordinary symbol as to whether or not to open the electric accessory 315b that is executed when a prize is won in the through gate 317. The result is displayed by a combination of turning on and off the LED pair. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) blinks the LED pair (normal symbol is fluctuated) when the through gate 317 is won, and turns on or off each LED after the fluctuating display time elapses. Display the result of.

The first special symbol display unit 362 includes a 7-segment display device as the first special symbol (first special symbol), and whether or not to execute the jackpot game executed when the first winning opening 314 is won. The lottery result in the first special symbol lottery (first special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) is displayed by a combination of turning on and off the seven segments in the seven-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) blinks seven segments of the seven-segment display device (variates the first special symbol) when the first winning opening 314 is won, and after the variation display time elapses, each segment is displayed. The result of the jackpot lottery is displayed by turning it on or off.

The second special symbol display unit 363 includes a 7-segment display device as the second special symbol (second special symbol), and whether or not to execute the jackpot game executed when the second winning opening 315 is won. The lottery result in the second special symbol lottery (second special symbol lottery, jackpot lottery) is displayed by the combination of turning on and off the seven segments in the seven-segment display device. The main control unit 331 (MPU41) blinks seven segments of the seven-segment display device (variates the second special symbol) when the second winning opening 315 wins a prize, and after the variation display time elapses, each segment is displayed. The result of the jackpot lottery is displayed by turning it on or off.

The first hold number display unit 364 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and the hold number N of the first special figure of the variable display generated by winning a prize in the first winning opening 314 is determined by the number of lights of the four LEDs. indicate.

The second hold number display unit 365 includes an LED group consisting of four LEDs, and the hold number M of the second special figure of the variable display generated by winning the second winning opening 315 is determined by the number of lights of the four LEDs. indicate.

[Back pack unit 13]
As shown in FIG. 3, the back pack unit 13 includes a payout mechanism 130 and a peripheral control unit 140.

The payout mechanism 130 includes a tank 131 for storing the ball game balls supplied from the island equipment (not shown) of the game hall, and a payout device 132 for paying out the game balls from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23. When the game balls on the upper plate 23 are saturated, the game balls paid out from the payout device 132 are paid out to the lower plate 24.

As shown in FIG. 12, the peripheral control unit 140 includes a payout control device 7, a launch control device 8, and a power supply control device 9. The payout control device 7 controls the number of balls to be paid out by the payout device 132. The launch control device 8 controls the game ball launch mechanism 32 in response to the operation of the launch handle 22. The power supply control device 9 converts the electric power supplied from the island equipment (not shown) to which the gaming machine 10 is connected into a predetermined voltage level, and supplies the electric power to the control device and the driving means provided in the gaming machine 10.

[System configuration of gaming machine 10]
Next, the system configuration of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 19.

[Main control unit 331]
As shown in FIG. 12, the main control unit 331 includes a main control device 4 that executes main control of the game in the gaming machine 10. The main control device 4 executes a jackpot lottery as a lottery for transition to a preset jackpot gaming state. The main control device 4 includes an MPU 41, an input / output I / F 42, and a performance information display device 4A.

The MPU 41 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 41 has a built-in ROM 411 and a RAM 412. The MPU 41 executes the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 411 or the like. Further, a part or all of the processing executed by the main control device 4 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

The input / output I / F 42 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the main control device 4 and outputs a control signal from the main control device 4. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a, the special out ball sensor 384, and the like. Then, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the ball has entered the general winning opening 313, the first winning opening 314, the second winning opening 315, and the variable winning opening 316 based on the detection signals from the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, and the through gate 317. It is determined whether or not the game ball 99 has passed through. Further, the MPU 41 counts the number of out balls (the number of fired balls) based on the detection signal from the out ball sensor 318a. Further, the input / output I / F 42 is connected to the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, the power supply control device 9, and the like.

Then, the MPU 41 gives the voice lamp control device 5 a variable pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot game start command, a round game start command, a round game end command, an ending start command, and a jackpot game. Outputs commands such as end command, special out ball detection command, and setting value change command.

The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the variation display time and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, and includes information on the jackpot type when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot. The variation pattern command is set in step S1605 in the variation start process of FIG. 26 described later based on the information stored in the hold storage area 412b described later when the symbol variation display by the main display unit 36 is started. NS. The fluctuation pattern command may be a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 of only the fluctuation display time. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery and the jackpot type is set as a command different from the variation pattern command.

The first hold command and the second hold command are the lottery result, the fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation pattern in the jackpot lottery for the increased hold when the hold number N or the hold number M stored in the hold storage area 412b described later increases. This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the number of holds N or the number of holds M. The first hold command and the second hold command are set based on the information stored in the hold storage area 412b described later when the hold number N or the hold number M increases (FIG. 22 described later). Step S1207 or step S1209 of the first hold command setting process.

The shift command indicates the lottery result in the jackpot lottery in the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 or the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 when the hold number N or the hold number M decreases. This is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the pass / fail information has been shifted. The shift command is set in step S1508 in the data setting process of FIG. 25, which will be described later.

The jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game starts, that is, the game state shifts to the jackpot game state, and when shifting to the jackpot game state, FIG. 23 described later. It is set in the game state transition process in the main process of. Further, since the jackpot game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game will start, the voice lamp control device 5 starts the jackpot game by receiving the jackpot game start command. Not only that, but also the opening will be started. However, an opening start command may be set separately from the jackpot start command so that the voice lamp control device 5 knows that the opening is started by the opening start command.

The round game start command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 of the round number information indicating the start of each round game and the number of rounds of the round game in the open / close execution mode in the jackpot game. , Set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later. In the voice lamp control device 5, it can be grasped that the opening is ended and the open / close execution mode is started by the round game start command, but the opening end command is set at the end of the opening separately from the round game start command. Alternatively, the open / close execution mode start command may be set when the open / close execution mode starts. Further, apart from the round game start command, a command indicating the number of rounds of the round game to be started may be set at the start of the round game, and the command may be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5.

The round game end command is a command that notifies the voice lamp control device 5 that the corresponding round game is ended in the open / close execution mode in the jackpot game, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later. NS.

The jackpot game end command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the jackpot game is finished, and is set in the jackpot game control process in the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later.

The special out ball detection command is a command indicating that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37, and is a command shown in FIG. It is set in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process. The voice lamp control device 5 counts the number of special out balls in a predetermined period based on the special out ball detection command, and determines the control content on the 7-segment display unit 39.

The set value change command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the set value has been changed and the changed set value, and is set in step S1710 in the set value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later. ..

Although commands other than the above-mentioned commands may be output from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, their description will be omitted.

Further, the main control device 4 is also equipped with an oscillation circuit, a frequency dividing circuit, and the like as means for supplying an operation clock to the MPU 41. The oscillating circuit outputs a clock signal having a predetermined frequency, and the frequency dividing circuit changes the frequency of the clock signal output from the oscillating circuit and inputs it to the MPU 41. Specifically, the execution cycle of the main timer interrupt process, which will be described later, executed by the MPU 41 is determined by the clock signal output from the frequency divider circuit.

In the present embodiment, a clock signal is supplied from the frequency divider circuit to the MPU 41 at a preset interval (for example, 4 msec), and the MPU 41 is divided into main timers, which will be described later, each time a rising edge (or falling edge) of the clock signal occurs. It is assumed that the interrupt process is started and executed. The oscillation circuit and the frequency dividing circuit are also mounted on the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140 as needed, and supply the operation clock of the control main body in the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140. Further, a clock signal may be supplied from the main control unit 331 to the sub control unit 332 and the peripheral control unit 140.

The ROM 411 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. The RAM 412 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 41. For example, the RAM 412 is used for setting a command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 and the like. The RAM 412 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 13, a storage area for the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the gaming machine 10 to perform a big hit lottery or the like will be described. Specifically, the MPU 41 executes the jackpot lottery and the setting of the variable display time by using the counter information stored in the lottery counter 412a, the hold storage area 412b, and the electric service hold area 412c of the RAM 412.

The lottery counter 412a includes a jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot winning lottery, a jackpot type counter C2 used for determining the jackpot type, and a reach random number counter C3 used for determining the loss type. included. Further, the lottery counter 412a includes a random number initial value counter CIN1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a variation type counter CS1 for determining the variation display time in the main display unit 36 and the symbol display unit 341. Is done. Further, the lottery counter 412a is set to the normal hit random number counter C4 used for lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second winning opening 315 is in the electric service open state, and the initial value setting of the normal hit random number counter C4. The normal hit initial value counter CIN2 used for is included. Hereinafter, when these multiple types of counters are collectively described, they are simply abbreviated as counters.

Then, the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1 are used as loop counters in which 1 is added to the previous value at short intervals by the MPU 41, and after reaching a preset maximum value, the counter returns to 0. The updated values are recorded in the counters C1 to C4, CIN1, CIN2, and CS1, and are referred to by the MPU 41 when the jackpot lottery and the variable display time are set.

The hold storage area 412b includes a first hold storage area REA, a second hold storage area REB, and an execution area AE. The first hold storage area REA includes a first hold area REA1, a second hold area REA2, a third hold area REA3, a fourth hold area REA4, and a hold number storage area NAA. Hereinafter, the type of the variable game in which the jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the first reserved storage area REA and the first special symbol display unit 362 displays the variable display and the stop is referred to as the first special symbol game. Sometimes. The second hold storage area REB includes a first hold area REB1, a second hold area REB2, a third hold area REB3, a fourth hold area REB4, and a hold number storage area NAB. Hereinafter, the type of the variable game in which the jackpot lottery is performed based on each value stored in the second reserved storage area REB and the second special symbol display unit 363 displays the variable display and the stop is referred to as the second special symbol game. Sometimes.

Then, when the game ball enters the first winning opening 314, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as the winning / failing information used in the lottery, and is stored in one of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 of the first holding storage area REA. When a game ball enters the second winning opening 315, the information corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 stored in the RAM 412 is a jackpot. It is acquired as the winning / failing information used in the lottery, and is stored in one of the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4 of the second holding storage area REB. The acceptance / rejection information acquisition process is executed by the MPU 41 that functions as the determination means of the present invention by executing the process according to the control program. The lottery counters 412a (big hit random number counter C1, jackpot type counter C2, reach random number counter C3, variable type counter CS1, etc.) are individually corresponding to the first hold storage area REA and the second hold storage area REB. It may be provided in.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10, in addition to the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, the variable type counter CS1 is the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area of the first hold storage area REA. It is stored in one of the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the REA4 and the second hold storage area REB.

Therefore, 19 games are played based on the hit / fail information stored in the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 and the second hold storage area REB. In addition to the lottery result of the jackpot lottery, it is possible to determine in advance the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341.

Specifically, when a game ball enters the first winning opening 314, the winning / failing information is vacant in the priority order of the first holding area REA1, the second holding area REA2, the third holding area REA3, and the fourth holding area REA4. It is stored in the area where it is. In the hold number storage area NAA, the number of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 in which the hit / fail information is stored is stored as the hold number N.

When a game ball enters the second winning opening 315, the winning / failing information is vacant in the order of priority of the first holding area REB1, the second holding area REB2, the third holding area REB3, and the fourth holding area REB4. Stored in the area. In the hold number storage area NAB, the number of the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 in which the hit / fail information is stored is stored as the hold number M.

That is, in the gaming machine 10, the first winning opening 314 has a total of eight storage areas corresponding to the maximum number of holdings of the first holding area REA1 to the fourth holding area REA4 and the first holding area REB1 to the fourth holding area REB4. It is possible to hold up to four winning / failing information as a winning history for each of the second winning opening 315 and the second winning opening 315.

In addition, it is considered as another embodiment that the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315 are provided with a holding area having a maximum number of holdings of eight, and even in this case, a maximum of eight can be held in total. It is possible to withhold the winning / failing information as the winning history. The storage process of the pass / fail information is executed by the MPU 41 by executing the process according to the control program.

The execution area AE is the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA or the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB when the symbol variation display on the main display unit 36 and the symbol display unit 341 is started. It is a storage area used for moving the pass / fail information stored in. Specifically, the pass / fail information of the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB is preferentially moved to the execution area AE, and the pass / fail information does not exist in the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB. When the hold number storage area NAB is 0, the pass / fail information of the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE.

The difference between the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA and the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAB of the second hold storage area REB is 2 or more. In the case of, it is considered as another embodiment that the value of the holding area having the larger number is preferentially moved to the execution area AE. Further, it is also considered as another embodiment that the pass / fail information of the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA and the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB is alternately moved to the execution area AE.

Then, at the start of one variable game, the MPU 41 performs a big hit lottery or the like based on the numerical information stored as the hit / fail information in the execution area AE. At this time, when the first hold area REA1 of the first hold storage area REA is moved to the execution area AE, the pass / fail information stored in the second hold area REA2 is shifted to the first hold area REA1 and the third hold area REA1 is moved. The pass / fail information stored in the hold area REA3 shifts to the second hold area REA2, and the pass / fail information stored in the fourth hold area REA4 shifts to the third hold area REA3.

Similarly, when the first hold area REB1 of the second hold storage area REB is moved to the execution area AE, the pass / fail information stored in the second hold area REB2 shifts to the first hold area REB1 and is held third. The winning / failing information stored in the area REB3 shifts to the second holding area REB2, and the winning / failing information stored in the fourth holding area REB4 shifts to the third holding area REB3.

The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 637, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CIN1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CIN1 is a loop counter that is updated within the same range (0 to 738) as the jackpot random number counter C1. The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

Two types of random number values for winning the jackpot are set according to the winning / failing table stored in the winning / failing table storage area in the ROM 411, corresponding to the low probability mode and the high probability mode which is the probability variation game state. Here, FIG. 14A is a diagram showing an example of a low-probability mode hit / fail table corresponding to a low-probability mode, and FIG. 14B is a diagram showing an example of a high-probability mode hit / miss table corresponding to a high-probability mode.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 14 (A) and 14 (B), the probability that the lottery result in the big hit lottery will be a big hit (big hit probability) is set as the game setting value as the low probability mode hit / miss table and the high probability mode hit / miss table, respectively. A plurality of different pass / fail tables are provided depending on the situation. The low-probability mode pass / fail table and the high-probability mode pass / fail table each include six win / fail tables corresponding to the six-stage game setting values 1 to 6. In the order of the game setting value 6, the game setting value 5, the game setting value 3, the game setting value 2, and the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot is high, which is advantageous to the player.

In the game setting value 1, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 206 (0 to 205) for the low probability mode winning / failing table, which is high. The number of probability mode hit / fail tables is 821 (0 to 820). That is, at the game setting value 1, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 318.1 (206/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/79. 9 (820/65536).

In the game setting value 2, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 212 (0 to 211) for the low probability mode winning / failing table, which is high. The number of probability mode hit / fail tables is 845 (0 to 844). That is, in the game setting value 2, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 309.1 (212/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/77. 6 (845/65536).

In the game setting value 3, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 218 (0 to 217) for the low probability mode winning / failing table, which is high. The number of probability mode hit / fail tables is 869 (0 to 868). That is, at the game setting value 3, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 300.6 (218/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/75. 4 (869/65536).

In the game setting value 4, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 224 (0 to 223) for the low probability mode winning / failing table, which is high. The number of probability mode hit / fail tables is 893 (0 to 892). That is, at the game setting value 4, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 292.6 (224/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/73. 4 (893/65536).

In the game setting value 5, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 230 (0 to 229) for the low probability mode winning / failing table, which is high. The number of probability mode hit / fail tables is 917 (0 to 916). That is, at the game setting value 5, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 284.9 (230/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/71. 5 (917/65536).

In the game setting value 6, out of 65536 random values from 0 to 65535, the number of random numbers for which the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is 236 (0 to 235) for the low probability mode winning / failing table, which is high. The number of probability mode hit / fail tables is 941 (0 to 940). That is, at the game setting value 6, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is about 1 / 277.7 (236/65536), and the jackpot probability in the high probability mode is about 1/69. 6 (941/65536).

If the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is other than the random number values for winning the jackpot, the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be missed.

Here, in the low-probability mode win / fail table and the high-probability mode win / fail table, the random numbers that are the big hits in the big hit lottery between the same game setting values are common, but it is also considered that the random numbers that are the big hits are not common. Be done. In addition, the random numbers that win the jackpot may not be continuous values but may be partially or wholly discrete values.

Further, six low-probability mode hit / miss tables and six high-probability mode hit / miss tables are provided according to the game setting values of six stages, but at least one win / miss table for each mode is sufficient. That is, the game setting value is not limited to 6 stages. It is also conceivable to provide a plurality of low-probability mode hit / miss tables corresponding to a plurality of stages of game setting values, while providing one high-probability mode hit / miss table. That is, it is conceivable that a plurality of stages of game setting values are provided for the low probability mode, and a stepwise game setting value is not provided for the high probability mode, and the jackpot probability is made uniform. Of course, the jackpot probability in the low probability mode may be made uniform, and a plurality of stages of game setting values may be provided for the high probability mode.

The jackpot type counter C2 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 19, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315. In the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 corresponding to each of the two types of jackpots, the probabilistic jackpot and the normal jackpot, is set by the sorting table stored in the sorting table storage area in the ROM 411.

Here, FIG. 14C is a diagram showing an example of a distribution table. In the example shown in FIG. 14C, when the type of the variable game is the first special symbol game triggered by the winning of the first winning opening 314, the number of random numbers that becomes the 5R probability variation jackpot is 10 of 0 to 9. The number of random numbers that are 16R probability variation jackpots is 5 from 10 to 14, and the number of random numbers that are 5R normal jackpots is 5 from 15 to 19. On the other hand, when the type of the variable game is the second special symbol game triggered by winning the second winning opening 315, the number of random numbers that become the 5R probability variation jackpot is 5 from 0 to 4, and the 16R probability variation jackpot. The number of the fourth random numbers is 10 from 5 to 14, and the number of random numbers to be a 5R normal jackpot is 5 from 15 to 19. That is, the gaming machine 10 is a so-called loop probabilistic machine in which the probability of the probabilistic jackpot in the first special symbol game and the second special symbol game is the same. Further, in the gaming machine 10, the probability of 16R probability variation jackpot in the second special symbol game is set higher than that in the first special symbol game. That is, in the probabilistic gaming state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode in which the opening probability of the electric accessory 315b is high), the time saving gaming state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the normal gaming state (low probability mode and electric combination). Compared to the low-frequency support mode in which the opening probability of the object 315b is low), the expected value of the game ball when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is set higher.

In this embodiment, individual swings are made for each of the first winning opening 314, which triggers the execution of the first special symbol game by winning, and the second winning opening 315, which triggers the execution of the second special symbol game by winning. A minute table is set, and the distribution probability of the jackpot type differs depending on which of the first winning opening 314 and the second winning opening 315 the game ball wins, but the first special symbol game and the second special symbol It is also possible that the distribution probability of the jackpot type is the same as that of the game. Further, the gaming machine 10 is not limited to the loop probabilistic machine, but may be configured as a so-called ST machine, a V-ST machine, a type-two type mixer, or the like.

Then, in the MPU 41, the lottery results in the jackpot lottery are "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot", and "5R normal" based on the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. Determine whether it is a "big hit" or a "missing".

Here, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variable jackpot or a 5R normal jackpot, an open / close execution mode is executed in which the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened is repeated five times in the jackpot game. Further, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 16R probability variation jackpot, the open / close execution mode in which the round game is repeated 16 times in the jackpot game is executed.

In the case of a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, after the jackpot game is completed, the player shifts to a probability variation game state in which the jackpot winning probability is high and the opening probability of the electric accessory 315b is high. Then, in the present embodiment, the probability variation game state continues until the MPU 41 determines that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is "5R probability variation jackpot", "16R probability variation jackpot", or "5R normal jackpot".

On the other hand, in the case of a 5R normal jackpot, after the jackpot game is completed, the player shifts to a time-saving game state in which the jackpot winning probability is low and the electric accessory 315b is open in a high frequency support mode. Then, in the present embodiment, the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) notifies the player of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery of a predetermined number of preset times such as 50 times and 100 times. It ends when the player decides that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit before the lapse of the specified number of times.

By the way, when the game machine 10 is configured as an ST machine or a V-ST machine instead of a loop probability change machine, a preset predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times, 100 times) of big hits is made after the end of the big hit game at the time of the probability change big hit. When the lottery is executed in the probabilistic game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode) and the lottery result in the big hit lottery does not become a big hit by the lapse of the specified number of times, the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) Mode) and the high frequency support mode ends. Further, in the variable game, it is also conceivable to perform a fall lottery from the probabilistic game state to the time-saving game state or the normal game state as another embodiment. If the lottery result in the big hit lottery is out of order, the game state is not changed to the big hit game state or the time saving game state. In the present embodiment, the case where the gaming machine 10 has three types of jackpots, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and 5R normal jackpot, will be described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, 2 round probability variation jackpot, 2 It is also conceivable to have other jackpot types such as round regular jackpot and 16R regular jackpot.

Further, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 238, for example, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is periodically updated, and is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

In the gaming machine 10, the reach random number counter C3 selects the type of stop result of the variable display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out of order. Specifically, due to the deviation type table stored in the deviation type table storage area in the ROM 411, the front-rear detachment reach, in which the final stop symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach symbol after the reach occurs, and the reach also occurs. The value of the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to each of the three types of outliers, that is, the reach other than the front-back deviation in which the final stop symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach symbol, and the complete deviation in which reach does not occur, is set.

Here, FIG. 14 (D) is a diagram showing an example of an outlier type table. In the example shown in FIG. 14 (D), the value of the random number that reaches the front-back deviation is 0 to 8, the value of the random number that becomes the reach other than the front-back deviation is 9 to 38, and the value of the random number that becomes the complete deviation is 39. ~ 238. The MPU 41 determines that reach is generated regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the variable game in which the 5R probability variable jackpot, the 16R probability variable jackpot, or the 5R normal jackpot is won, that is, the variable game that shifts to the open / close execution mode.

Here, the reach indicates a state in which a symbol combination of decorative symbols indicating that a jackpot has been won is likely to occur between the start of the variable display of the symbol on the symbol display unit 341 and the stop display of the symbol. It is a fluctuating state. In one example, the same symbol is stopped and displayed at two of the three stop positions on the effective line on the symbol display unit 341, and the display symbol corresponding to the remaining one stop position fluctuates. In addition, while the reach of the symbol display unit 341 is in a fluctuating state, a story effect process in which a moving image of a predetermined character or the like is displayed to suggest the degree of expectation, or an operation by the player on the operation button 20 is reflected in the effect. Person participation type operation effect processing and the like are executed. It is conceivable that the variable display on the symbol display unit 341 may be hidden, reduced or enlarged, and displayed during the execution of these effect processing.

The electric accessory opening counter C4 is, for example, incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 250, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory opening counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric service holding area 412c in the RAM 412 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 317. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not the electric accessory 315b is opened for a predetermined time according to the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 412c. For example, it is considered that the winning is won when the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 0 to 199, and the loss is considered when the electric accessory opening counter C4 is 200 to 250.

The variation type counter CS1 is incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 199, and is returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 determines the variation pattern type (variation display time) of the symbol variation display displayed on the symbol display unit 341 according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery. By determining the variation pattern type in this way, the voice lamp control device 5 has a rough variation game effect such as a high-speed variation effect (basic effect, non-reach effect), a normal reach effect, a super reach effect, and a special reach effect. The type is determined according to the fluctuation pattern type (variation display time). The variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process described later is executed by the MPU 41, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. Further, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is stored in the hold storage area 412b at the timing when the game ball wins the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315.

Then, the MPU 41 determines a fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the preset fluctuation table. Specifically, the MPU 41 specifies the type of fluctuation pattern with reference to the normal jackpot fluctuation table, the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table, or the deviation fluctuation table stored in advance in the fluctuation table storage area of ROM 411. Note that these fluctuation tables may be provided individually for each of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode. Further, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

Here, FIGS. 15 (A), 15 (B), and 15 (C) are diagrams showing an example of a normal jackpot fluctuation table, a probabilistic jackpot fluctuation table, and a deviation fluctuation table. As shown in FIGS. 15 (A), 15 (B) and 15 (C), in the normal jackpot fluctuation table, the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table and the deviation fluctuation table, the fluctuation pattern is preliminarily set according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. It is associated. Then, the MPU 41 is a normal jackpot fluctuation table when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is "5R normal jackpot", a probability variation jackpot fluctuation table when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" or "16R probability variation jackpot", and a lottery. If the result is "off", refer to the out-of-variation table and specify the type of fluctuation pattern.

More specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15A and 15B, in the normal jackpot fluctuation table and the probability variation jackpot fluctuation table, the fluctuation patterns “01” to “03” are set according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. Is selected. When the variation pattern "01" is selected here, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a normal reach effect pattern in which the variation display time is 30 s as the variation type (effect pattern type), and the symbol display unit 341 determines the normal reach effect pattern. Is executed. The normal reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal reach effect. When the variation pattern "02" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a super reach effect pattern in which the variation display time is 60 s as the variation type (effect pattern type), and the symbol display unit 341 determines the super reach effect. The pattern is executed. The super reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the super reach effect. Further, when the variation pattern "03" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines the special reach effect pattern having the longest variation display time of 90s as the variation type (effect pattern), and the symbol display unit 341 determines the special reach effect pattern. The production pattern is executed. The special reach effect pattern is an effect pattern in which the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the special reach effect.

As shown in FIG. 15C, in the deviation variation table, the variation type counter CS1 is used for each stop type (reach before and after deviation, reach other than front and rear deviation, complete deviation) determined by the value of the reach random number counter C3. The correspondence between and the fluctuation pattern is defined. More specifically, when the stop type at the time of disconnection is front / rear deviation reach or non-front / rear deviation reach, one of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. .. On the other hand, when the stop type at the time of disengagement is completely deviated, either the fluctuation pattern "04" or "05" is selected according to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. When the fluctuation pattern "04" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) in which the variation display time is 7 s as the variation type (effect pattern type), and displays the symbol. A non-reach effect pattern is executed in unit 341. When the variation pattern "05" is selected, the voice lamp control device 5 determines a non-reach effect pattern (non-reach effect pattern) in which the variation display time is 10 s as the variation type (effect pattern type), and displays the symbol. A non-reach effect pattern is executed in unit 341.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, as the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern “04”, the variation display of the deviation pattern is stopped at the deviation pattern without accompanying the advance notice effect such as displaying a character, a message, or the like. Is executed. Further, in the gaming machine 10, as the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern "05", the variation display of the deviation pattern that stops at the pattern is displayed with a notice effect of displaying a character, a message, or the like. Will be executed. Further, in the case of the variation display at the time of deviation corresponding to the variation pattern "05", a player participation type operation effect reflecting the operation of the operation button 20 by the player may be executed as a notice effect.

The type of fluctuation pattern is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 15 (A), 15 (B) and 15 (C). Further, the probability variation jackpot variation table may be provided individually for each of the 5R probability variation jackpot and the 16R probability variation jackpot.

For example, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of normal reach effects having different characters, stories, and the like are prepared as normal reach effects executed in the normal reach effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "01", and any of them is selected. The normal reach production is executed.

Similarly, in the gaming machine 10, a plurality of types of super reach effects having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared as super reach effects executed in the super reach effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "02", and a selection is made from among them. One of the super reach productions that have been done is performed. The super reach production is a reach production with a longer fluctuation time than the normal reach production, and the probability (expectation) that the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit is higher than the normal reach production, and the big hit is won more than the special reach production. It is executed when suggesting to the player that the probability (expectation) is low.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, as a special reach effect executed in the special reach effect pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern "03", a plurality of types of special reach effects having different characters, stories, etc. are prepared, and a selection is made from among them. One of the special reach productions that have been done is performed. The special reach effect is a reach effect having a longer variation time than the normal reach effect, and is an effect developed from, for example, a normal reach effect or a super reach effect. The special reach effect is executed when it is suggested to the player that the probability (expectation degree) of winning a big hit is higher than that of the normal reach effect or the special reach effect.

The effect pattern corresponding to the variation pattern includes an operation effect in which the operation status of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect, for example, a one-shot operation effect in which the one-shot operation is reflected in the effect, and an operation button 20 by the player. A player participation type operation effect such as a continuous hit operation effect in which the continuous hit operation is reflected in the effect and a long press operation effect in which the long press operation of the operation button 20 by the player is reflected in the effect may be included.

Then, when the MPU 41 specifies a fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation display time by the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 and the symbol display unit 341 of the main display unit 36, the fluctuation pattern and the jackpot lottery A variation pattern command indicating the lottery result is input to the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the MPU41 has a fluctuation pattern command "A" in front of the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03" to indicate that it is a 5R normal jackpot. Output any one of "A01" to "A03". Further, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the MPU41 is a variation pattern command "B01" in which "B" indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot is added before the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". ~ Outputs any of "B03". Further, the MPU 41 is a variation pattern command "C01" in which, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", "C" indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot is added before the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". ~ Outputs any of "C03". Further, in the MPU 41, when the lottery result is "off", the fluctuation pattern commands "D01" to "D05" in which "D" indicating that the lottery is out are added before the fluctuation patterns "01" to "05". Output one of. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) and the lottery result based on the fluctuation pattern command, and the symbol display unit 341 is based on the fluctuation pattern and the lottery result. The details of the variation mode such as the variation type and the effect type displayed in are determined. Then, the voice lamp control device 5 causes the symbol display unit 341 to execute the fluctuation display based on the details of the determined fluctuation mode, reproduces the voice from the speaker 26 in accordance with the fluctuation display, and lights and blinks the illumination unit 27. Or turn it off.

As described above, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 performs a simple process of determining the fluctuation pattern (variation display time) based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation table for the fluctuation display in the symbol display unit 341. Will be executed. Therefore, even when the MPU 41 of the gaming machine 10 is composed of an 8-bit microcomputer, the MPU 41 can stably execute the jackpot lottery. Further, since the details of the variation mode actually displayed on the symbol display unit 341 are determined by the voice lamp control device 5, it is possible to selectively execute a wide variety of variation modes as the variation mode.

Here, FIG. 16 is a block diagram showing an example of the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412 in the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 of the game machine shown in FIG. The game information storage area 412d stores game information related to game history, ball ejection performance, and the like. In the present embodiment, in the game information storage area 412d, as game information, "number of out balls", "number of general winning lots paid out", "number of first winning lots paid out", "number of second winning lots paid out" , "Variable winning slot payout number", "Set value", "Base information", "Continuous character ratio information", "Character ratio information", "Cumulative jackpot lottery count", "Unit jackpot lottery count", The "number of jackpots" and the "number of consecutive misses" are stored. Of these game information, "set value", "base information", "continuous bonus ratio information", "feature ratio information", and "unit jackpot lottery count" are game information (performance information) related to ball ejection performance. Corresponds to.

The “number of out balls” is an integrated value of the number of game balls fired on the game board 31 in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "number of out balls" is stored as a value obtained by counting the out balls detected by the out ball sensor 318a in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20, which will be described later.

The "general winning opening payout number" is an integrated value of game balls paid out for winning a prize in the general winning opening 313 in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "number of balls to be paid out from the general winning opening" is set to the winning ball command setting in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. When setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the prize in the general prize opening 313 in the process, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out by this prize. ..

The "number of balls paid out in the first winning opening" is an integrated value of the game balls paid out for winning a prize in the first winning opening 314 in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). This "number of balls paid out from the first winning opening" is the winning ball in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later, when the winning sensor 314a detects the winning of the first winning opening 314 in the normal gaming state. A value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out from this prize when setting a prize ball command for the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the prize to the first prize opening 314 in the command setting process. Update to.

The "number of balls paid out from the second winning opening" is an integrated value of the game balls paid out for winning the second winning opening 315 in the time-saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode). This "number of balls to be paid out from the second winning opening" is the winning ball in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. A value obtained by adding the number of balls to be paid out from this prize when setting a prize ball command for the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the prize to the second prize opening 315 in the command setting process. Update to.

The "variable winning slot payout number" is an integrated value of the game balls paid out for winning the variable winning slot 316 in the jackpot game state. This "variable winning opening payout number" is set as the winning ball command setting in step S1303 in the main process of FIG. When setting the prize ball command for causing the payout control device 7 to pay out the number of prize balls according to the winning of the variable winning opening 316 in the processing, the value is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out by this winning. ..

The "set value" is for selecting a low-probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 14 (A)) and a high-probability mode winning / failing table (see FIG. 14 (B)) used in the jackpot lottery (win / fail determination). In other words, the "set value" defines the jackpot probability in the low probability mode and the high probability mode. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, set values in six stages (six types of low-probability mode hit / miss tables with different jackpot probabilities (see FIG. 14 (A)) and high-probability mode hit / miss tables (see FIG. 14 (B))). Is being prepared. The "set value" is updated in the set value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later.

The "base information" is information about the "base" which is the refund rate (ball output rate) in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and this "base" is the "number of out balls" in the normal game state. Is the ratio of the total number of balls to be paid out to "the number of balls to be paid out from the general winning lot" and "the number of balls to be paid out from the first winning lot". When the "base" is expressed by a mathematical formula, "base" = 100 x ("general winning lot payout number" + "first winning lot payout number") / "out number of balls". "Base information" includes information on the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2. Here, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 are updated every time the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28, which will be described later (steps S1805 and S1806). Specifically, the "base" when the latest number of out balls reaches 60,000 is the previous 60,000 base B1, and the "base" when the previous number of out balls reaches 60,000 is It is saved as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM 412 as the 60,000 ball base B2 two times before. Further, until the counter value of the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls, the current base BL is calculated as the current base BL (step S1804), and the current base BL is stored as "base information" in the game information storage area of the RAM 412. In addition, when the counter value of the number of out balls is calculated as the current base BL until the counter value reaches 60,000 balls, the "base information" includes the "general winning opening number of payout balls" and the "first winning opening". In addition to the "number of balls to be paid out" and the "number of balls to be paid out", the "number of balls to be paid out from the general winning slot", the "number of balls to be paid out from the first winning slot" and the "number of balls to be paid out" for base calculation are stored.

In this embodiment, the "base information" includes the "current base BL", the "previous 60,000 ball base B1", and the "previous 60,000 ball base B2", and the history of the past two 60,000 ball bases. However, the 60,000-ball base for the past three times or more may be left as a history. Further, as the "base information", the cumulative base from the time when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the gaming hall to the present may be included.

"Continuous prize ratio information" is the total number of balls to be paid out by winning all the winning openings (general winning opening 313, first winning opening 314, second winning opening 315 and variable winning opening 316) for which prize balls are paid out. This is information on the "continuous bonus ratio", which is the ratio of the number of balls paid out from the variable winning lots. When the "continuous bonus ratio" is expressed by a mathematical formula, "continuous bonus ratio" = 100 x "variable winning lot payout number" / "total payout number". The "continuous accessory ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the "continuous bonus ratio information" is stored as the cumulative continuous bonus ratio from the time when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the gaming hall to the present. The "continuous bonus ratio information" is for a certain period (for example, a certain number of big hits (for example, 100 times), and a period until a certain number of big hit lottery (for example, 1000 times) is executed in a normal game state. , The ratio of continuous bonuses to a certain number of out balls (for example, the period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls)) may be used. Of course, the "continuous bonus ratio information" may include both the cumulative continuous bonus ratio and the continuous bonus ratio over a certain number of periods.

"Character ratio information" is the total number of balls to be paid out by winning all the winning openings (general winning opening 313, first winning opening 314, second winning opening 315 and variable winning opening 316) for which prize balls are paid out. , Information on the "feature ratio", which is the ratio of the total number of balls paid out to the number of balls paid out from the second winning lot and the number of balls paid out from the variable winning lot. When the "feature ratio" is expressed by a mathematical formula, "feature ratio" = 100 x ("second winning slot payout number" + "variable winning slot payout number") / "total payout number". The "accessory ratio information" is updated, for example, in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the "character ratio information" is stored as the cumulative character ratio from the time when the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present. The "feature ratio information" is for a certain period (for example, a certain number of big hits (for example, 100 times), or a period until a certain number of big hit lottery (for example, 1000 times) is executed in a normal game state. It may be a bonus ratio to a certain number of out balls (for example, a period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls)). Of course, the "continuous bonus ratio information" may include both the cumulative bonus ratio and the bonus ratio over a certain number of periods.

Regarding the "cumulative jackpot lottery count", the jackpot lottery was performed in the normal gaming state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode) from the start of the gaming machine 10 before the opening of the game hall to the present. The number of times. In other words, the "cumulative jackpot lottery count" is a cumulative variation display in which the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display unit 362 of the main display unit 36 is executed with the winning of the first winning opening 314 in the normal gaming state as a trigger. It is also the number of times. The “cumulative jackpot lottery number” is added by 1 each time the symbol variation display of the main display unit 36 is started in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 26, which will be described later. Further, the "cumulative jackpot lottery count" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 by turning off the main power of the game machine 10.

The "unit jackpot lottery number" is the number of times a jackpot lottery is received (main) when a certain number of negative difference balls are won in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). The number of times the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display unit of the display unit 36 is executed). In the present embodiment, the fixed number is "250 balls", and the difference ball is the number of balls obtained by subtracting the "general winning opening payout number" and the "first winning opening payout number" from the "out ball number". In other words, the "unit jackpot lottery count" is the variable display count of the first special symbol of the first special symbol display unit 362 with an average of 1000 yen (big hit lottery) when 250 balls are rented for 1000 yen at the game hall. The number of times it was received). The "unit jackpot lottery number" may be the number of times a jackpot lottery is received per a certain number of "out balls" in the normal game state. The "unit jackpot lottery count" is updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28, which will be described later. In the present embodiment, the "number of unit jackpot lottery" is stored as the cumulative number of unit jackpot lottery from the time the gaming machine 10 is installed in the game hall to the present. The "unit jackpot lottery number" is for a certain period (for example, for a certain number of jackpots (for example, 100 times), or until a certain number of jackpot lottery (for example, 1000 times) is executed in a normal gaming state. It may be for the period until the number of out balls reaches a certain number (for example, 60,000 balls). Of course, as the "number of unit jackpot lottery", both the cumulative number of unit jackpot lottery and the number of unit jackpot lottery in a certain number of periods may be stored as game information.

The “number of jackpots” is the number of times that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery conducted from the start of the game machine 10 before the opening of the game hall to the present is the number of jackpots. The "number of jackpots" is added by 1 each time the gaming state is shifted to the jackpot gaming state in the game state transition process executed in step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23, which will be described later. Further, the "number of jackpots" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 by turning off the main power of the game machine 10.

The "number of consecutive misses" is the number of times that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is consecutively missed in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode), and is set to 0 when the lottery result is a jackpot. It will be cleared. The "number of consecutive deviations" is the result of the hit / fail determination based on the low probability mode hit / miss table in step S1603 when the symbol change display of the main display unit 36 is started in step S1606 in the change start process of FIG. 26, which will be described later. If it is off, it is added one by one, and if the result of the hit / fail judgment is a big hit, it is cleared to 0 times. In the present embodiment, the "number of consecutive disconnections" is cleared from the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 by turning off the main power of the game machine 10. Of course, the "number of consecutive disconnections" may not be cleared from the game information storage area 412d by turning off the main power of the game machine 10.

Returning to the description of FIG. 12, the performance information display device 4A displays "base information" and "set value" stored as game information (performance information) in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. .. The performance information display device 4A includes a performance display monitor 43, a performance display switch 44, a set value display unit 45, a set value change operation unit 46, and a ROM 47. Here, FIG. 17 is a diagram schematically showing an example of the performance information display device 4A.

As shown in FIG. 17, the performance display monitor 43 displays "base information" in the gaming machine 10, and is provided at a position where it can be visually recognized when the inner frame 12 is unfolded (FIG. 3). reference). The performance display monitor 43 is composed of a plurality of (four in this embodiment) 7-segment displays 431 to 434, and is referred to as a 4-digit 7-segment display. The performance display monitor 43 is preferably provided in the main control device 4, but may be provided in a device other than the main control device 4 in the main control unit 331, and other components of the game other than the main control unit 331. It may be provided in. It is also conceivable to display the "base information" by using the first special symbol display unit 362 and / or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36.

The 7-segment display 431 to 434 can display the numbers "0" to "9" and the alphabets "A" to "F". In the 7-segment display 431 to 434, when displaying the alphabet "B", a dot is lit to distinguish it from the number "8" and "8." is displayed, and the alphabet "D" is displayed. When displaying, a dot is lit to distinguish it from the number "0" and "0." is displayed. Further, when displaying any of the alphabets "A" to "F", it is conceivable to light the dots to clearly indicate that the alphabet is an alphabet.

In the performance display monitor 43, the left two 7-segment displays 431 and 432 of the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are identification segments in which the "base type" is displayed by an abbreviation, and the right two 7 segments. The display 433 and 434 are ratio segments in which the base value (%) calculated by the MPU 41 is displayed. For example, when the current base BL is 31%, the abbreviations "BL" of the current base BL are "8." and "L" in the two left 7-segment displays 431 and 432 which are the identification segments. Is displayed as, and the base value "31" is displayed as "3" and "1" on the right two 7-segment displays 433 and 434 which are ratio segments. That is, on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434, "8.", "L", "3", and "1" are displayed in order from the left.

The performance display switch 44 collectively switches the power on / off of the performance display monitor 43 (four 7-segment displays 431 to 434) by a pressing operation, and is in a position where it is easy to operate when the inner frame 12 is expanded. It is provided (see FIG. 3). In the illustrated example, the power is turned on by pressing the upper half of the performance display switch 44, and the power is turned off by pressing the lower half. When the operation of turning on the power of the performance display switch 44 is performed, the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are energized, and the base information can be displayed on the performance display monitor 43. On the other hand, when the power is turned off for the performance display switch 44, the energization of the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 is cut off, and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden. .. The performance display switch 44 may be provided in addition to the main control device 4.

Here, FIG. 18A is a display example on the performance display monitor 43. As shown in FIG. 18A, when the performance display switch 44 is off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are in the off state, so that the base information is not displayed. As shown in FIGS. 18 (B) to 18 (D), when the performance display switch 44 is turned on, unless the performance display switch 44 is turned off, as "base information", the current base BL → the previous 60,000 The ball base B1 → 60,000 ball base B2 before the previous time → the current base BL are looped in this order, and each base is repeatedly displayed at regular intervals. In the example shown in FIG. 18 (B), the current base BL is 28%, and in the example shown in FIG. 18 (C), the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 34%. In the example shown in, it is shown that the 60,000 ball base B2 is 32% two times before. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the performance display switch 44 is turned off, the 7-segment displays 431 to 434 are turned off and the base information on the performance display monitor 43 is hidden.

A program required to display "base information" on the performance display monitor 43, for example, a program that calculates the current base BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2, and the current base on the performance display monitor 43. A program for displaying BL, the previous 60,000 ball base B1 and the previous 60,000 ball base B2 in order at regular intervals is stored in a ROM 47 provided separately from the ROM 412 of the MPU 41 in the main controller 4. As a result, the load on the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 can be reduced. However, if the ROM 411 of the MPU 41 has a sufficient capacity, the ROM 411 may store a program necessary for displaying the "base information" on the performance display monitor 43. Further, a program necessary for displaying "base information" on the performance display monitor 43 may be stored in a storage means such as a ROM provided separately from the main control device 4.

Further, in the performance display monitor 43, instead of the "base information" or in addition to the "base information", it is stored in the game information storage area 412d such as "continuous character ratio information" and "character ratio information". Other performance information may be displayed.

Further, the performance display monitor 43 is not limited to the 7-segment display, and may be configured by other types of displays such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, and an organic EL display.

Returning to the description of FIG. 17, the set value display unit 45 selects the low-probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 14 (A)) and the high-probability mode hit / miss table (see FIG. 14 (B)) to be referred to in the jackpot lottery. It displays the above-mentioned set value of the above, and is composed of a 7-segment display. The set value display unit 45 is not limited to the 7-segment display, but may be configured by other types of displays such as a dot matrix display, a liquid crystal display, and an organic EL display, and the performance display monitor 43 is used. The set value may be displayed.

The setting value changing operation unit 46 switches the power supply of the 7-segment display on and off by a pressing operation, and enables the setting value to be changed by rotating the 7-segment display when the power is on. The set value changing operation unit 46 has, for example, a function as a contact type switch that is turned on and off by a pressing operation, and a function as a rotary switch that switches contacts by a rotation operation (rotation of a predetermined angle). Here, FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a display example on the set value display unit 45 of the main control device.

As shown in FIG. 19A, when the set value display unit 45 is in the off state and a pressing operation is performed on the set value change operation unit 46, the 7-segment display is energized and the set value display unit is energized. A number is displayed at 45. The numbers displayed at this time are the set values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and indicate the current set values. In the illustrated example, the set value is "1". On the other hand, when the set value change operation unit 46 is pressed while the set value display unit 45 is lit, the 7-segment display is cut off and the set value display unit 45 is turned off. Become.

As shown in FIG. 19B, when the set value display unit 45 is in the lit state and a rotation operation is performed on the set value change operation unit 46, the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 is changed. .. In the illustrated example, the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 becomes larger when the set value display unit 45 is rotated clockwise, and the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 is displayed when the set value display unit 45 is rotated counterclockwise. The number that is played becomes smaller. Then, when the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 is changed by rotating the set value display unit 45, the changed number is stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 as the set value. Therefore, if the 7-segment display is turned off by pressing the set value change operation unit 46 while the number corresponding to the target set value is displayed on the set value display unit 45, the power is turned off. The number displayed immediately before is determined as the set value. As a result, the MPU 41 is selected according to the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. A jackpot lottery can be conducted based on (see).

The method of changing the set value is not limited to the method of rotating the set value changing operation unit 46 and then turning off the power of the set value display unit 45. For example, a method of determining a set value by rotating the set value changing operation unit 46 and then pressing the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1), or setting by repeatedly hitting or holding down the operation button 20 (see FIG. 1). A method of turning off the power of the set value display unit 45 after changing the number displayed on the value display unit 45, or inserting the key into the keyhole provided in the main control device 4 or the like and rotating the key to display the set value. A method of removing the key after changing the number displayed in the unit 45 may be used.

Here, the performance information display device 4A including the set value display unit 45 is provided in the main control device 4 of the main control unit 331 in the control unit 33. Further, the control unit 33 is provided on the back side of the game board 31 and can be opened and closed with respect to the front frame 11. Therefore, the set value display unit 45 is provided on the back side of the game board 31, and by opening and closing the control unit 33 with respect to the front frame 11 together with the game board 31, the outside of the game machine 10 (the front side of the front frame 11). ) Can be selected from a visible state and an invisible state. That is, by closing the game board 31 (control unit 33) with respect to the front frame 11, the set value display unit 45 cannot be visually recognized, while the game board 31 (control unit 33) is opened with respect to the front frame 11. The set value display unit 45 can be visually recognized with. As a result, when the player executes the game on the game machine 10, the set value display unit 45 is not visually recognized unless the game board 31 is opened. Therefore, the set value display unit 45 is set by the number displayed on the set value display unit 45. It is prevented that the value is grasped by the player. Then, when the set value display unit 45 is in the lit state, the set value changing operation unit 46 is pressed to turn it off. Therefore, by keeping the set value display unit 45 off during the business hours of the game hall, the set value display unit 45 can be visually recognized by opening the game board 31 due to a jam in the gaming machine 10 or the like. Even if the state is set, it is possible to prevent the player from grasping the set value by the set value display unit 45.

On the other hand, when the set value display unit 45 is off, the set value changing operation unit 46 is pressed to turn it on, and the numbers corresponding to the set values are hidden. Therefore, outside the business hours of the game hall, the game board 31 is opened to the front frame 11 and the set value changing operation unit 46 is pressed to turn on the set value display unit 45. The set value can be confirmed based on the number displayed on the set value display unit 45, and the set value can be changed by rotating the set value changing operation unit 46. As a result, it is possible to change the set value outside the business hours by a simple operation while ensuring the confidentiality of the set value during the business hours.

[Sub control unit 332]
As shown in FIG. 12, the sub control unit 332 includes a voice lamp control device 5 and a display control device 6, and a symbol variation display and a symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 based on a control signal input from the main control unit 331. Execute the effect display.

[Voice lamp control device 5]
The voice lamp control device 5 includes an MPU 51, an input / output I / F 52, and the like. The MPU 51 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 51 has a built-in ROM 511 and a RAM 512.

The ROM 511 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. In addition, the ROM 511 also stores information such as voices used in the variable game effect, the jackpot game effect, and the lamp blinking pattern. The RAM 512 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 51. The RAM 512 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

The voice lamp control device 5 commands the display control device 6 based on the command (control signal) input from the main control device 4 by executing the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 511 by the MPU 51. (Control signal) is input to control the display of the symbol display unit 341. Further, the voice lamp control device 5 also controls the reproduced voice output from the speaker 26 and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 in accordance with the display of the symbol display unit 341. For example, the MPU 51 controls the image display on the symbol display unit 341, the reproduced sound output from the speaker 26, and the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27 when executing the variable game effect and the jackpot game effect described later.

The input / output I / F 52 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the voice lamp control device 5 and outputs a control signal from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the main control device 4 and the display control device 6 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, commands such as a fluctuation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command are input from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5. Further, the voice lamp control device 5 outputs a display fluctuation pattern command or the like to the display control device 6. Another embodiment is also conceivable in which the display control device 6 receives a command from the main control device 4 and inputs the command to the voice lamp control device 5. Further, another embodiment is also conceivable in which the sub control unit 332 includes one control device having both the functions of the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

Further, a speaker 26 and an illumination unit 27 are connected to the input / output I / F 52. Then, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 outputs the sound from the speaker 26 based on the command input from the main control device 4, the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27, and the stopper unit 383 of the game ball retention unit 38. It is possible to control the vertical movement of the 7-segment display unit 39 and the like. By controlling the vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 by the MPU 51, the game ball (special out) entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention portion 38. A state in which the ball) is retained and a state in which the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retention lane 381 is discharged via the discharge lane 382 are selected. Further, each segment A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled to be turned on or off by the MPU 51. Further, an operation switch 20a is connected to the input / output I / F 52. As a result, the MPU 51 detects that the operation button 20 has been operated, and based on the detection result, the image game effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 and the sound are output from the speaker 26. It is also possible to control the sound output effect, the lamp effect depending on the blinking mode of the illumination unit 27, and the like.

The MPU 51 executes predetermined arithmetic processing based on commands such as a variation pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, and a shift command input from the main control device 4.

Specifically, when the variation pattern command is input, the MPU 51 has a variation pattern (a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols (see FIG. 38 (A)), a variation display time, and a variation type (FIG. 38) based on the variation pattern command. (See (B)))) and the effect pattern type (see FIGS. 39 (A) to 37 (C)) are determined, and a display fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is transmitted to the display control device 6 (see FIG. 37). (Refer to step S2105 in the command determination process of the above), the symbol variation display on the symbol display unit 341 is started. At this time, when the variation pattern command indicates a deviation, the symbol display unit 341 displays a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation.

[Display control device 6]
The display control device 6 controls the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on a command (control signal) input from the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, the display control device 6 executes the symbol variation display and the effect display by controlling the display of the symbol display unit 341 based on the display variation pattern command or the like input from the voice lamp control device 5.

The display control device 6 includes an MPU 61, an input / output I / F 62, and the like, and the voice lamp control device 5 and the symbol display unit 341 are connected to the input / output I / F 62. Bidirectional communication may be possible between the voice lamp control device 5 and the display control device 6.

The MPU 61 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer, and the MPU 61 has a ROM 611 and a RAM 612 built-in. Further, the display control device 6 also has a built-in other circuit such as a timer circuit for measuring time and an interrupt circuit for accepting interrupts. The MPU 61 executes the process according to the control program stored in the ROM 611 or the like. Further, a part or all of the processing executed by the display control device 6 may be executed by an electronic circuit.

In addition to the control program, the ROM 611 stores a plurality of types of images such as decorative symbols used in the symbol variation display of the symbol display unit 341, advance notice effect images, reach effect images, jackpot effect images, and missed effect images. ing. The image displayed on the symbol display unit 341 includes a still image and a moving image. Further, the ROM 611 stores a display schedule corresponding to each variable display pattern command. Specifically, the display schedule includes not only the type and display timing of the image to be used, but also the variable display time of the variable symbol. Then, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 displays the image on the symbol display unit 341 according to the display schedule corresponding to the variation display pattern command, thereby realizing the symbol variation display and the effect display.

The RAM 612 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 61. The RAM 612 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

[Payout control device 7]
The payout control device 7 is equipped with an MPU 71, an input / output I / F 72, and the like. The MPU 71 is an arithmetic unit configured as a one-chip microcomputer. Further, the MPU 71 has a built-in ROM 711 and RAM 712.

The ROM 711 is a non-volatile storage unit in which control programs and parameter information are stored in advance. Further, the RAM 712 is a volatile storage unit capable of reading and writing various information, and is used as a primary storage area (work area) for processing executed by the MPU 71. The RAM 712 may be a non-volatile storage unit.

The input / output I / F 72 is an input / output interface that inputs a signal to the payout control device 7 and outputs a control signal from the payout control device 7. Specifically, the payout device 132 and the ball lending device 100 are connected to the input / output I / F 72.

As described above, the payout device 132 pays out the game ball from the tank 131 toward the upper plate 23, and has a drive unit 132a such as a motor for driving a ball stop member for switching whether or not the game ball is paid out. It is provided with a payout sensor 132b that individually detects the game balls to be paid out. The payout control device 7 pays out an arbitrary number of game balls by controlling the drive unit 132a based on the detection result by the payout sensor 132b. Further, the payout control device 7 is provided with a state return switch 73. The state return switch 73 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error such as a ball clogging of the payout device 132 occurs.

The ball lending device 100 is installed in the island facility together with the gaming machine 10. Then, the ball lending device 100 is stored in a recording medium such as a card inserted in the ball lending device 100 in response to the operation of the ball lending operation device (not shown) provided on the front frame 11 of the gaming machine 10. It is possible to pay out a number of game balls corresponding to a preset amount within the range of the set amount and lend them to the player. Specifically, when a control signal for paying out a predetermined number of game balls is input from the ball lending device 100 to the payout control device 7, the payout device 132 is controlled by the MPU 71 to generate a predetermined number of game balls. It will be paid out. The recording medium is not limited to a card, and may be, for example, a coin-type or stick-type storage medium having an IC chip built-in. Further, the ball lending device 100 may be capable of lending a predetermined number of game balls according to the cash by inserting cash.

[Launch control device 8]
The launch control device 8 includes a launch control IC 81 that controls the drive of the game ball launch mechanism 32. Specifically, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feed device 322 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 while the launch handle 22 is being rotated to launch the game ball stored in the upper plate 23 on the launch rail 321. Supply on. Then, the launch control IC 81 detects the amount of operation of the launch handle 22, and drives the solenoid 323 of the game ball launch mechanism 32 according to the amount of operation to direct the game ball on the launch rail 321 toward the game board 31. And fire. At this time, the launch control IC 81 drives the ball feeding device 322 and the solenoid 323 using a clock signal whose ON / OFF is switched at a preset cycle (for example, 0.6 sec) as a drive signal. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, one gaming ball is launched toward the gaming area every 0.6 sec.

Further, the firing handle 22 is provided with a variable resistor for detecting the rotation operation amount by the player, and a voltage is input to the firing control IC 81 according to the rotation operation amount of the firing handle 22. As a result, the launch control IC 81 increases the firing intensity of the game ball from the game ball launch mechanism 32 as the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 22 increases, based on the voltage value input according to the rotation operation amount of the launch handle 22. The voltage applied to the solenoid 323 is adjusted so that it becomes stronger.

Further, the launch handle 22 has a touch sensor 21a for detecting that the player is touching the launch handle 22, and a ball stop switch 21b for the player to arbitrarily stop the launch of the game ball. Is provided. The launch control IC 81 uses the touch sensor 21a and the ball stop switch 21b to detect that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 by the touch sensor 21a, or the ball stop switch 21b is operated by the player. When this is detected, the launch of the game ball by the game ball launch mechanism 32 is stopped. As a result, for example, the launch handle 22 is fixed in a rotationally operated state, and the game is prevented in a situation where the player is not touching the launch handle 22. Further, the player can stop the launch of the ball game ball by operating the ball stop switch 21b at an arbitrary timing with his thumb or the like while rotating the launch handle 22.

[Power control device 9]
The power supply control device 9 generates a + 12V voltage for driving various sensors, a drive unit, and the like, a + 5V voltage for logic used in the control device, and the like. Then, the power supply control device 9 supplies the generated + 12V or + 5V voltage to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the display control device 6, the payout control device 7, the launch control device 8, and the like.

The power control device 9 is provided with a power switch 90 for turning on / off the power of the gaming machine 10 and a RAM erasing switch 91 operated when the gaming machine 10 is returned to the initial state. The gaming machine 10 is initialized when the power switch 90 is operated and the power is turned on while the RAM erasing switch 91 is ON.

Further, the power supply control device 9 is provided with a capacitor and a secondary battery as charging means for being charged by the electric power supplied from the power supply equipment. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the information of the RAM provided in the control device is held for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the capacitor. Further, in the gaming machine 10, even when the power supply from the power supply equipment is cut off, the control device can be driven for a predetermined period by the power discharged from the secondary battery.

Further, when it is determined that the power supply is cut off, the power supply control device 9 inputs a power failure signal to the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like. For example, when the power supply control device 9 outputs a preset DC voltage of 24 V based on the power supplied from the power supply equipment, the power supply control device 9 is in a power failure state when the DC voltage reaches less than the preset 22 V. Judge. When the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like receive the power failure signal from the power control device 9, the main control device 4, the voice lamp control device 5, the payout control device 7, and the like interrupt the ongoing control and execute a predetermined NMI interrupt process.

[Processing of main controller 4]
Next, the process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 33. Specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the MPU 41 is executed at the time of power-on, a start-up process, a main process executed after the start-up process, a main timer interrupt process that is periodically started, and a power failure. Execute NMI interrupt processing and so on. In the present embodiment, the description of the start-up process, the NMI interrupt process, and the like will be omitted, and the main timer interrupt process and the main process will be described. Further, in the start-up process, it is confirmed whether or not the RAM 412 is operating normally, and the execution of the main timer interrupt process is permitted on condition that the RAM 412 is operating normally.

[Main timer interrupt processing of main controller 4]
Here, FIG. 20 is a flowchart for explaining an example of the procedure of the main timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. The main timer interrupt process is executed, for example, every 2 msec. Hereinafter, the main timer interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG.

<Step S1001>
As shown in FIG. 20, in step S1001, the MPU 41 executes a sensor detection process for determining a detection state of a sensor or the like connected to the main control device 4. For example, the detection states of the ball entry sensors 313a to 317a, the out ball sensor 318a, the special out ball sensor 384, and the like are determined. At this time, when the entry of the game ball into any of the entry sensors 313a to 317a is detected, the MPU 41 stores the information in the RAM 412 as the winning detection information. Further, when the out ball is detected by the out ball sensor 318a, the MPU 41 updates the number of out balls in the game information storage area 412d by adding 1 to the number of out balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. do. Further, the MPU 41 sets a special out-ball detection command when a special out-ball is detected by the special out-ball sensor 384, and stores this special out-ball detection command in the RAM 412.

<Step S1002>
Next, in step S1002, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1003>
Subsequently, in step S1003, the MPU 41 updates the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4. Specifically, the MPU 41 added 1 to each of the counter values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the normal hit random number counter C4, and the counter values reached the maximum value. If so, the counter value is cleared to 0.

<Steps S1004 and S1005>
After that, the MPU 41 executes the start winning process (step S1004) accompanying the winning of the first winning opening 314 or the second winning opening 315, and executes the firing control process (step S1005). The details of the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, in the launch control process, the game ball is on the condition that the touch sensor 21a detects that the player is touching the launch handle 22 and the ball stop switch 21b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to enable the firing of. Further, the launch control process invalidates the launch of the game ball when it is detected by the touch sensor 21a that the player is not touching the launch handle 22 or when the ball stop switch 21b is operated. It is a process to do. The MPU 41 instructs the launch control device 8 to launch the game ball when the launch of the game ball is effective.

<Step S1006>
In step S1006, the MPU 41 is subjected to a normal winning lottery as to whether or not the electric accessory 315b of the second winning opening 315 is set to the electric service open state based on the ordinary hit random number counter C4 stored in the electric service holding area 412c. Execute the through-gate processing to be executed. Specifically, in the through-gate process, the MPU 41 first determines whether or not the current game mode is the high-frequency support mode based on the high-frequency support mode flag. Then, when the MPU 41 is not in the high frequency support mode, it determines that the normal hit random number counter C4 is 0 to 29 and is a normal hit, and when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 30 to 249, it is out of order. Judge that there is. Further, in the case of the high frequency support mode, the MPU 41 determines that the normal hit random number counter C4 is a normal hit when it is 0 to 199, and deviates when the normal hit random number counter C4 is 200 to 249. Judge that there is. Then, when the MPU 41 determines that it is a normal hit in the through gate processing, the electric accessory 315b is opened for a predetermined time. As a result, it becomes possible to win a prize in the second winning opening 315 on the upper right side of the game board 31 in which the electric accessory 315b is arranged side by side.

[Starting prize processing]
Here, FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the start winning process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1004 in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20. Hereinafter, the start winning process will be described with reference to FIG. 21.

<Step S1101>
As shown in FIG. 21, in step S1101, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there has been a prize for the first winning opening 314. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that there has been a prize for the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1102, and when it is determined that there has been no winning for the first winning opening 314 (step S1101: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1106.

<Steps S1102 and S1103>
In step S1102, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of holds N is the maximum number of holds (step S1102: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1106. On the other hand, in the MPU 41, if the hold number N is not the maximum hold number (step S1102: No), 1 is added to the hold number N (step S1103).

<Step S1104>
In step S1104, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 20, and a variable type counter CS1 updated in the main process described later (step S1302 of FIG. 23). And S1312), and the counter value is stored in the first free hold area of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 of the first hold storage area REA of the hold storage area 412b in the RAM 412. ..

<Step S1105>
In step S1105, the MPU 41 displays the content of the hit / miss information before the hit / miss information for the first hold acquired in step S1104 becomes the target of determining the hit / miss of the jackpot in the fluctuation start process (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26) described later. After confirming, the first hold command setting process for setting the first hold command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the confirmation result. The details of the first hold command setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1106>
In step S1106, the MPU 41 determines whether or not there has been a prize for the second winning opening 315. Here, if the MPU 41 determines that the second winning opening 315 has won a prize (step S1106: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1107, and if it determines that the second winning opening 315 has not won a prize (step S1106: No). ), The start winning process is completed, and the process proceeds to step S1005 of FIG.

<Steps S1107 and S1108>
In step S1107, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAB of the RAM 412 is the maximum hold number (4 in the present embodiment). Here, if the number of holds M is the maximum number of holds (step S1107: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the start winning process and shifts the process to step S1005 of FIG. On the other hand, in the MPU 41, if the hold number M is not the maximum hold number (step S1107: No), 1 is added to the hold number M (step S1108).

<Step S1109>
In step S1109, the MPU 41 includes a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2 and a reach random number counter C3 updated in step S1003 of FIG. 20, and a variable type counter CS1 updated in the main process described later (step S1302 of FIG. 23). And S1312), and the counter value is stored in the first free hold area of the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 of the second hold storage area REB of the hold storage area 412b in the RAM 412. ..

<Step S1110>
In step S1110, the MPU 41 receives the hit / fail information before the hit / miss information for the second hold acquired in step S1109 becomes a target for determining the hit / miss of the jackpot in the fluctuation start process (S1408 in FIG. 24, FIG. 26) described later. The contents are confirmed, and the second hold command setting process for setting the second hold command in the RAM 412 is executed based on the confirmation result. Here, since the second hold command setting process is the same as the first hold command setting process described later with reference to FIG. 22, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the second hold command setting process, in the first hold command setting process of FIG. 22, if the "first hold command" is read as the "second hold command" and the "hold number N" is read as the "hold number M". good.

[1st hold command setting process]
Here, FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing a procedure of the first hold command setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1105 in the start winning process of FIG. 21. The first hold command includes information indicating that the command is the first hold command, and information such as the type (big hit type or miss) of the first hold command, the fluctuation pattern, and the number of holds N. .. Hereinafter, the first hold command setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 22.

<Step S1201>
As shown in FIG. 22, the MPU 41 reads the hold number N from the hold number storage area NAA of the first hold storage area REA, and reads the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each first hold from the RAM 412 (step). S1201).

<Step S1202>
In step S1202, the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is in the high probability mode, and if it is in the high probability mode (step S1202: Yes), the process shifts to step S1203, and if it is not in the high probability mode (step S1202). : No), the process proceeds to step S1204. For example, the MPU 41 is set to turn on whether or not it is in the high probability mode at the time of transition to the high probability mode in the game state transition process (step S1306 in FIG. 23) in the main process described later, and the jackpot game from the high probability mode. Judgment is based on the high probability mode flag that is set to off when transitioning to another gaming state such as a state.

<Steps S1203 and S1204>
In step S1203, the MPU 41 reads a high-probability mode pass / fail table (see FIG. 14B) saved according to the set value in step S1712 in the set value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later, and the high-probability mode pass / fail table. Based on the above, it is executed whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. On the other hand, in step S1204, the MPU 41 reads out the low-probability mode hit / fail table (see FIG. 14 (A)) saved according to the set value in step S1712 in the set value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later, and the low-probability mode. Based on the winning / failing table, the winning / failing determination of whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read in step S1201 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning is executed.

In steps S1203 and S1204, the pass / fail determination is executed based on the high-probability mode pass / fail table or the low-probability mode pass / fail table saved according to the set value in step S1712 in the set value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later. , In step S1203 or S1204, after reading the set value saved in step S1710 in the set value change process of FIG. You may select and make a pass / fail judgment.

<Step S1205>
In step S1205, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the counter value read from the jackpot random number counter C1 is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: Yes), the process shifts to step S1206, and the jackpot random number counter C1 If it is determined that the counter value read from is not a value corresponding to the jackpot winning (step S1205: No), the process proceeds to step S1208.

<Step S1206>
In step S1206, the MPU 41 reads the counter values of the jackpot type counter C2 and the variable type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. For example, when the winning / failing information is stored in the third holding area REA3 in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. 21, the jackpot type counter C2 and the variable type included in the winning / failing information stored in the third holding area REA3. The counter value of the counter CS1 is read out. Of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4, the hold area in which the hit / fail information is stored in step S1104 in the start winning process of FIG. 21 is the value of the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NA. It can be judged by.

<Step S1207>
In step S1207, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot type counter C2, the variable type counter CS1 and the hold number N in the first hold command. As described above, since the first hold command includes the hold number N read in step S1201, the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 that receives the first hold command is the hold number included in the first hold command. By referring to N, it is possible to recognize whether the first hold command corresponds to the pass / fail information stored in which of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4.

<Steps S1208 and S1209>
In step S1208, the MPU 41 reads the counter value of the variation type counter CS1 from the RAM 412. Next, the MPU 41 sets the information indicating that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is out, the variable type counter CS1 and the hold number N in the first hold command (step S1209).

The first hold command set to be turned on in the first hold command setting process is stored in the RAM 412, and is executed in the main process step S1301 of FIG. 23 described later, which is executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4. It is erased after being transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 together with the command of. Further, the content of the first hold command described here is only an example, and if the voice lamp control device 5 can grasp the same content as the hold command, it is not limited to the content described here. For example, it is conceivable that some or all of the information of the first hold command is included in another command.

[Main processing of main controller 4]
Next, with reference to FIG. 23, the main process executed by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 will be described. In the main process, the main control process for the progress of the variable game and the jackpot game is executed. In the main process, the processes of steps S1301 to S1309 are executed as periodic processes of, for example, a 4 msec cycle, and the counter update process of steps S131 to S1312 is executed in the remaining time from the end of the processes of steps S1301 to S1309 to the next cycle. NS.

<Step S1301>
As shown in FIG. 23, in step S1301, the MPU 41 transfers output data such as a command set in the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20 or the previous main process to a control device such as a sub control unit 332 or a peripheral control unit 140. Executes external output processing to be sent to. For example, in RAM412, commands such as a variable pattern command, a first hold command, a second hold command, a shift command, a jackpot start command, a round game start command, an ending start command, a setting value change command, and a unit jackpot lottery count update command are set. If so, the command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5. Further, when the prize ball command is set in the RAM 412 in the prize ball command setting process in step S1303 described later in the main process, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 7.

<Step S1302>
In step S1302, the MPU 41 updates the value of the variable type counter CS1. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter value of the variable type counter CS1 and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1303>
In step S1303, the MPU 41 sets the prize ball command to be output to the payout control device 7 and the sub control unit 332 in the RAM 412. Specifically, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a prize has been generated in the general winning opening 313, the variable winning opening 316, or the like, based on the winning detection information stored in the RAM 412. Then, when a prize has been won, a prize ball command indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out according to the prize is set in the RAM 412. At this time, the MPU 41 is stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 when a prize is generated in the general winning opening 313 or the first winning opening 314 in the normal game state (low probability mode and low frequency support mode). The number of balls paid out from the general winning lot or the number of balls paid out from the first winning lot is updated to the value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out by this winning. Further, the MPU 41 is a RAM 412 when a prize is generated in the second winning opening 315 in the time saving game state (low probability mode and high frequency support mode) or the probability variation game state (high probability mode and high frequency support mode). The number of balls paid out from the second winning opening stored in the game information storage area 412d of the above is updated to a value obtained by adding the number of balls paid out by the current winning. Further, in the jackpot game state, when a prize is generated in the variable winning opening 316, the MPU 41 sets the number of variable winning opening payout balls stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 as the number of balls paid out by this winning. Is updated to the added value.

<Step S1304>
In step S1304, the MPU 41 executes a variable game control process for controlling the game in the variable game. The details of the variable game control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 24. In the variable game control process, the above-mentioned jackpot lottery is executed, and the variable pattern command required for the symbol variable display by the symbol display unit 341 is set. Will be done. At this time, the MPU 41 has a jackpot random number counter C1 updated in step S1003 of the main timer interrupt process of FIG. 20, a jackpot type counter C2, a reach random number counter C3, and a variation updated in steps S1302 and S1312 of this process. Based on each value of the type counter CS1, a variation pattern command indicating the lottery result of the jackpot lottery and the variation display time is set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1305>
In step S1305, the MPU 41 executes a jackpot game control process for controlling the progress of the game in the jackpot game. In the jackpot game control process, the control process for the jackpot game including the opening, opening / closing execution mode, and ending is executed. In the open / close execution mode, the MPU 41 controls the opening / closing operation of the opening / closing door 319 for the round game in which the variable winning opening 316 is opened, and as a result, the result of the big hit lottery that triggered the transition to the big hit game (big hit type). ) Is executed as many times as necessary. For example, the MPU 41 executes a round game 5 times when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot and a 5R probability variation jackpot, and executes a round game 16 times when the jackpot type is a 16R probability variation jackpot. Further, in the jackpot game control process, the round game start command is set in the RAM 412 when each round game is started in the open / close execution mode, and the ending start command is set in the RAM 412 when the ending is started.

<Step S1306>
In step S1306, the MPU 41 executes a game state transition process for shifting the game state based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in step S1602 or S1603 in the fluctuation start process of FIG. 26, which will be described later. In the game state transition process, the MPU 41 sets the game state when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the jackpot game state in which the open / close execution mode is executed, the probability variation game state which is the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, the low probability mode and the high. It shifts to the time-saving game state which is the frequency support mode, the normal game state which is the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, and the like.

For example, when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, the MPU 41 shifts the game state to the big hit game state after the end of the variable game that notifies the lottery result. At this time, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game state flag stored in the RAM 412 to ON. Further, when the jackpot game is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to a predetermined gaming state according to the lottery result in the jackpot lottery that triggered the execution of the jackpot game. In the present embodiment, when the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot, the MPU 41 shifts to the probability variation game state after the end of the jackpot game, and the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is a 5R normal jackpot. In some cases, the game shifts to the time-saving game state after the jackpot game ends. In addition, when the notification of the lottery result for the specified number of jackpot lottery is completed in the time-saving game state, the game state is shifted to the normal game state after the end of the variable game.

Further, when the transition of the gaming state is shifted, the MPU 41 sets the flag for the gaming state before the transition to off, while the flag for the gaming state after the transition is set to on. For example, the MPU 41 sets the jackpot game flag off and the high probability mode flag on when there is a transition of the gaming state from the jackpot gaming state to the probability variation gaming state. On the other hand, when there is a transition of the gaming state from the probabilistic game state to the jackpot game state, the high probability mode flag is set to off, while the jackpot game flag is set to on.

Further, when shifting the game state to the big hit game state, the MPU 41 sets the big hit game start command in the RAM 412 and adds 1 to the "big hit number" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412.

<Step S1307>
In step S1307, the MPU 41 executes the set value change process. In this set value change process, a process of displaying or hiding the set value or controlling the change of the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d is executed according to the operation of the set value change operation unit 46. The details of the set value change process will be described later with reference to FIG. 27.

Further, in the present embodiment, the set value change process is executed in the main process, but is limited to the start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, or the period from the start-up process to the start of launching the game ball. It is also conceivable that it will be executed. As a result, after the game is started by the player, the set value cannot be changed until the next power is turned on, so that it is possible to prevent the set value from being changed during the business hours of the game hall. ..

<Step S1308>
In step S1308, the MPU 41 executes the specific performance information update process in the game information. In the present embodiment, the base information, the number of unit jackpot lottery, the continuous bonus ratio, and the bonus ratio are updated as the specific performance information. The details of the specific performance information update process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29.

<Step S1309>
In step S1309, the MPU 41 executes the display control process of the performance display monitor 43. In the display control process of the performance display monitor 43, a process of displaying the base information updated in step S1308 on the performance display monitor 43 is executed. The details of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33.

<Step S1310>
In step S1310, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has arrived, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time. Here, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes), the process shifts to step S1301 and executes each process after S1301 described above. On the other hand, when the MPU 41 determines that the execution timing of the next main process has not arrived (step S1310: No), until the execution timing of the next main process arrives, that is, at the execution timing of the next main process. During the remaining time until it is reached, step S1310, step S1311, and step S1312 are repeatedly executed until it is determined that the execution timing of the next main process has arrived (step S1310: Yes).

<Step S1311>
In step S1311, the MPU 41 updates the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2. Specifically, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the counter values of the random number initial value counters CIN1 and CIN2, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value.

<Step S1312>
In step S1312, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1. Specifically, 1 is added to the counter value of the variable type counter CS1, and when those counter values reach the maximum value, the counter value is cleared to 0. Then, the MPU 41 updates the variation type counter CS1 and then returns the process to step S1310.

[Variable game control processing]
Here, FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the variable game control process executed in step S1304 in the main process of FIG. 23. Hereinafter, the variable game control process will be described with reference to FIG. 24.

<Step S1401>
As shown in FIG. 24, in step S1401, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming machine 10 is in a jackpot game, and if it is in a jackpot game (step S1401: Yes), the variable game control process is performed. If it is finished and the jackpot game is not in progress (step S1401: No), the process proceeds to step S1402. Whether or not the jackpot game is executed is set to on when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23, and turns off when the jackpot game state shifts to another game state. Judgment is made based on the jackpot game flag set in.

<Step S1402>
In step S1402, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation is being displayed, and if the symbol variation is being displayed (step S1402: Yes), the process is shifted to step S1403, and if the symbol variation is not being displayed, the process is shifted to step S1403. (Step S1402: No), the process shifts to step S1406. For example, whether or not the symbol variation is being displayed is set to ON at the start of the variation display in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 26, which will be described later, and when the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes). The determination is made based on the variation display flag set to off in step S1405 of the variation game control process.

<Step S1403>
In step S1403, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the variation display time has elapsed from the start of the symbol variation display, and if it determines that the variation display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the process proceeds to step S1404. If it is determined that the variation display time has not elapsed (step S1403: No), the variation game control process is terminated.

<Steps S1404 and S1405>
When the variable display time has elapsed (step S1403: Yes), the MPU 41 determines the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable game on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 362 of the main display unit 36. The corresponding symbol is stopped and displayed (step S1404), and the variable display flag is set to off (step S1405).

<Step S1406>
When the symbol variation is not displayed (step S1402: No), the MPU 41 has a hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAA of the hold storage area 412b and a hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAB. It is determined whether or not both are 0 (step S1406). Here, when both the number of holds N and the number of holds M are 0 (step S1406: Yes), the MPU 41 ends the variable game control process. On the other hand, when either one of the number of holds N and the number of holds M is not 0 (step S1406: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1407.

<Step S1407>
In step S1407, the MPU 41 executes a data setting process for the data of the hit / miss information stored in the hold storage area 412b. When the MPU 41 finishes the process of step S1407, the process shifts to step S1408. The details of the data setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

<Step S1408>
In step S1408, the MPU 41 executes a variation start process for causing the symbol display unit 341 to execute a variation display based on the pass / fail information, and ends the variation game control process. The details of the fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Data setting process]
Here, FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the data setting process executed by the MPU 41 in step S1407 of FIG. 24. Hereinafter, the data setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 25.

<Step S1501>
As shown in FIG. 25, in step S1501, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the hold number M corresponding to the second special symbol game is 0, and when the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes). , The process proceeds to step S1502. On the other hand, when the number of holds M is not 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1505.

<Steps S1502 to S1504>
When the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: Yes), the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the hold number N stored in the hold number storage area NAA (step S1502), and shifts from the first hold area REA1 to the execution area AE. The pass / fail information is moved (step S1503). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the pass / fail information of the second reserved area REA2 to the fourth reserved area REA4 one by one (step S1504). Specifically, in step S1504, the pass / fail information of the second hold area REA2 is moved to the first hold area REA1, the pass / fail information of the third hold area REA3 is moved to the second hold area REA2, and the fourth hold area REA4. The pass / fail information is moved to the third holding area REA3. When the process of step S1504 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Steps S1505-S1507>
Step S1505 shifts to the case where the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: No), but step S1501 shifts to the case where both or one of the hold number M and the hold number N is not 0 in step S1406 of FIG. (Step S1406: No). Therefore, when the hold number M is 0 (step S1501: No), the MPU 41 can determine that the hold number N is not 0, and therefore executes the processes of steps S1505 to S1507.

Specifically, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the hold number M stored in the hold number storage area NAB (step S1505), and moves the hit / fail information from the first hold area REB1 to the execution area AE (step S1506). Subsequently, the MPU 41 shifts the pass / fail information of the second reserved area REB2 to the fourth reserved area REB4 one by one (step S1507). Specifically, in step S1507, the pass / fail information of the second hold area REB2 is moved to the first hold area REB1, the pass / fail information of the third hold area REB3 is moved to the second hold area REB2, and the fourth hold area REB4. The pass / fail information is moved to the third holding area REB3. When the process of step S1507 is completed, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1508.

<Step S1508>
In step S1508, the MPU 41 sets a shift command in the RAM 412 indicating that the pass / fail information of the first hold area REA1 to the fourth hold area REA4 or the first hold area REB1 to the fourth hold area REB4 has been shifted. Then, the shift command set in step S1508 is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5 in the external output process of step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41. As a result, the number of reserved symbols displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is changed. When the process of step S1508 is completed, the MPU 41 ends the data setting process and shifts the process to step S1408 of FIG. 24.

[Fluctuation start processing]
Here, FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU 41 in step S1408 of FIG. 24. Hereinafter, the fluctuation start processing will be described with reference to FIG. 26.

<Step S1601>
As shown in FIG. 26, in step S1601, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the gaming state is in the high probability mode. Whether or not the high probability mode is set is determined based on, for example, whether or not the high probability mode flag set to be turned on in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23 is set to on. .. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1602 when the gaming state is in the high probability mode (step S1601: Yes), and when the gaming state is not in the high probability mode (step S1601: No), that is, when the gaming state is in the low probability mode. If there is, the process proceeds to step S1603.

<Steps S1602 and S1603>
In step S1602, the MPU 41 of the hold storage area 412b is based on the high-probability mode hit / fail table (see FIG. 14B) saved according to the set value in step S1712 in the set value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the winning / failing information stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning. On the other hand, in step S1603, the MPU 41 has a hold storage area based on the low-probability mode hit / fail table (see FIG. 14 (A)) saved according to the set value in step S1712 in the set value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later. It is determined whether or not the counter value of the jackpot random number counter C1 included as numerical information in the winning / failing information stored in the execution area AE of 412b is a value corresponding to the jackpot winning.

In steps S1602 and S1603, the pass / fail determination is executed based on the high-probability mode pass / fail table or the low-probability mode pass / fail table saved according to the set value in step S1712 in the set value change process of FIG. 27, which will be described later. , In steps S1602 and S1603, after reading the set value saved in step S1710 in the set value change process of FIG. You may select and make a pass / fail judgment.

<Step S1604>
In step S1604, the MPU 41 sets the variation display time of the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 of the main display unit 36 corresponding to the variation pattern of the variable game in the variation display time counter. Specifically, when the result of the hit / fail determination in step S1602 or S1603 is a normal jackpot, the MPU 41 determines a fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the normal jackpot fluctuation table (see FIG. 15A). Identify. Further, when the result of the hit / fail determination in step S1602 or S1603 is the probability variation jackpot, the MPU 41 specifies the variation pattern based on the variation type counter CS1 and the probability variation jackpot variation table (see FIG. 15B). .. Further, when the result of the hit / fail determination in step S1602 or S1603 is wrong, the MPU 41 specifies the fluctuation pattern based on the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the deviation fluctuation table (see FIG. 15C).

<Step S1605>
In step S1605, the MPU 41 sets the RAM 412 with a variation pattern command including the lottery result in the jackpot lottery for the variation game and the variation pattern identified in step S1604. As a result, in step S1301 of the next main process (see FIG. 23) executed by the MPU 41, the fluctuation pattern command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 5, and the voice lamp control device 5 displays the symbol based on the fluctuation pattern command. The symbol variation display by the unit 341 is executed.

As described above, when the lottery result is "normal jackpot", the MPU 41 has "A01" to "A" in which "A" indicating that it is a 5R normal jackpot is added to the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". Any one of "A03" is set in RAM412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 is any of "B01" to "B03" in which "B" indicating that the lottery result is a 5R probability variation jackpot is added to the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". Is set in RAM412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", the MPU 41 is any of "C01" to "C03" in which "C" indicating that the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot" is added to the fluctuation patterns "01" to "03". Is set in RAM412 as a variation pattern command. Further, when the lottery result is "out of place", the MPU 41 changes any of "D01" to "D08" in which "D" indicating that the lottery pattern is out of order is added to the fluctuation patterns "01" to "08". Set to RAM 412 as a command. Further, when the lottery result is "out of place", the MPU 41 includes information on whether the lottery result is "out of front / back", reach other than front / back out, or complete out of order in the variation pattern command.

<Step S1606>
In step S1606, the MPU 41 starts the symbol variation display of the main display unit 36 and ends the variation start process. The MPU 41 sets the variable display flag to on when the symbol variation display of the main display unit 36 is started. This variation display flag is referred to in step S1402 in the variation game control process of FIG. 24 to determine whether or not the symbol variation display of the main display unit 36 is in progress. Further, when the symbol variation display of the main display unit 36 is started, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "cumulative jackpot lottery number" stored in the game information storage area 412d set in the RAM 412. Further, when the result of the hit / fail judgment based on the low probability mode hit / miss table in step S1603 is wrong, the MPU 41 adds 1 to the "number of consecutive hits" stored in the game information storage area 412d, and the hit / miss result is a big hit. In a certain case, clear the "number of consecutive deviations" to 0 times.

[Setting value change process]
Here, FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the set value changing process executed in step S1307 of the main process of FIG. 23. Hereinafter, the setting value changing process will be described with reference to FIG. 27.

<Step S1701>
As shown in FIG. 27, in step S1701, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the symbol variation is being displayed, and if the symbol variation is being displayed (step S1701: Yes), the set value change process is terminated. If the symbol variation display is not in progress (step S1701: No), the process shifts to step S1702. For example, whether or not the symbol variation is being displayed is determined based on the variation display flag set on in step S1606 in the variation start process of FIG. 26.

<Step S1702>
If the symbol variation is not displayed (step S1701: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not it is in the jackpot gaming state (step S1702), and if it is in the jackpot gaming state (step S1702: Yes), the set value. When the change process is completed and the game is not in the jackpot game state (step S1702: No), the process is shifted to step S1703. For example, whether or not it is a jackpot game is determined based on the jackpot game state flag set to be on in the game state transition process of step S1306 in the main process of FIG. 23.

<Step S1703>
When neither the symbol variation display nor the jackpot game state (No in both steps S1701 and S1702), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the power of the set value display unit 45 has been switched from off to on (step S1703), that is, the setting. It is determined whether or not the operation of turning on the power of the set value display unit 45 has been performed on the value change operation unit 46. That is, in the present embodiment, the set value is not displayed and the set value cannot be changed when the symbol variation is being displayed (step S1701: Yes) or in the jackpot game state (step S1702: Yes). Here, when the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1704 and switches the power of the set value display unit 45 from off to on. If not (step S1703: No), the process proceeds to step S1707.

<Steps S1704 to S1706>
When the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from off to on (step S1703: Yes), the MPU 41 reads out the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710 described later (step S1704). , A number indicating the read set value is displayed on the set value display unit 45 (step S1705). This makes it possible to check the current set value. Then, the MPU 41 sets the set value display flag indicating that the set value is displayed on the set value display unit 45 to on (step S1706), and ends the set value change process.

<Step S1707>
When the power of the set value display unit 45 is not switched from off to on (step S1703: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the set value display flag is set to on (step S1707). The set value display flag indicates that the set value is displayed on the set value display unit 45 as described above, and is set to ON in step S1706. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1708 when the set value display flag is set to on (step S1707: Yes), and when the set value display flag is set to off (step S1707: No). That is, when the set value display unit 45 is off and the power is not turned on, the set value change process is terminated.

<Step S1708>
When the set value display flag is set to ON (step S1707: Yes), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the set value changing operation unit 46 has been rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708). That is, the MPU 41 determines whether or not a rotation operation for changing the set value has been performed. When the set value changing operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1709, and when the set value changing operation unit 46 is not rotated (step S1708: No), The process proceeds to step S1711.

<Step S1709>
When the set value changing operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: Yes), the MPU 41 executes a process of changing the display on the set value display unit 45 (step S1709). For example, when the set value changing operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the right, the MPU 41 displays a number one larger than the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 before the rotation, and vice versa. When the set value changing operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the left, a number one smaller than the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 is displayed before the rotation.

If the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 before rotation is "6" and the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the right, it is displayed on the set value display unit 45. Is changed to "1", and when the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 before rotation is "1" and the set value change operation unit 46 is rotated by a predetermined angle to the left, the setting is set. The number displayed on the value display unit 45 is changed to "6". Further, when the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 is "6", the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 is "1" so as not to rotate further to the right. In addition, it may not rotate further to the left.

<Step S1710>
In step S1710, the MPU 41 overwrites and saves the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 as the set value in the set value of the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, and ends the set value change process. As a result, when the power of the setting value changing operation unit 46 is switched from on to off, the setting value saved in the RAM 412 immediately before the power is turned off is finally used as a valid setting value for the game information of the RAM 412. It is stored in the storage area 412d. Therefore, the set value stored in the RAM 412 is changed by changing the number displayed on the set value display unit 45 by rotating the set value change operation unit 46. Then, the set value can be determined by turning off the power of the set value display unit 45 in a state where the number corresponding to the target set value is displayed on the set value display unit 45.

<Step S1711>
When the set value changing operation unit 46 is not rotated by a predetermined angle (step S1708: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711), that is, the set value is changed. It is determined whether or not the operation unit 46 is operated to turn off the power of the set value display unit 45. When the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1712, and the power of the set value display unit 45 is not switched from on to off. In the case (step S1711: No), the setting value change process is terminated. When the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the set value display unit 45 cuts off the energization of the 7-segment display, thereby indicating the set value. Is turned off, and the set value is confirmed as described above.

<Steps S1712 and S1713>
When the power of the set value display unit 45 is switched from on to off (step S1711: Yes), the MPU 41 is a low-probability mode pass / fail table according to the set value stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 in step S1710. (See FIG. 14 (A)) and the high-probability mode hit / fail table (see FIG. 14 (B)) are selected and stored in the RAM 412 (step S1712). Then, the MPU 41 sets the set value display flag to off, and ends the set value change process.

Here, in step S1712, the low-probability mode hit / fail table (see FIG. 14 (A)) and the high-probability mode pass / fail table (see FIG. 14 (B)) according to the set values stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. Is selected. That is, since the hit / fail table with the same set value is selected between the low probability mode hit / miss table and the high probability mode hit / miss table, the operation of changing the set value is easy. However, the set value in the low probability mode and the set value in the high probability mode may be individually changed. In this case, for example, the setting value of the low probability mode is set to "1" and the setting value of the high probability mode is set to "6". Will be possible.

[Performance information update processing]
Here, FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the specific performance information update process executed in step S1308 in the main process of FIG. 23. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of base information updated in the specific performance information update process of FIG. 28. Hereinafter, the specific performance information update process will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29.

<Steps S1801 and S1802>
As shown in FIG. 28, the MPU 41 reads out the number of out balls for base calculation of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (step S1801), and the read out number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls. It is determined whether or not (step S1802). The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S1805 when the number of out balls has reached 60,000 balls (step S1802: Yes), and steps the process when the number of out balls has not reached 60,000 balls (step S1802: No). Move to S1803.

<Steps S1803 and S1804>
When the number of out balls has not reached 60,000 balls (step S1802: No), the MPU 51 reads out the number of general winning opening payout balls and the number of first winning opening payout balls for the base calculation of the base information (step S1808). Then, the MPU 51 sets the number of out balls for the base calculation of the base information read in step S1801 and the number of general winning lot payout balls and the number of first winning lot payout balls for the base calculation of the base information read out in step S1803. Based on this, the current base BL is calculated, and the current base BL of the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is overwritten and updated (step S1804) (see FIG. 29 (A)). The current base BL (%) is calculated as 100 × (the number of balls paid out from the general winning opening + the number of balls paid out from the first winning opening) / the number of out balls.

<Steps S1805 to S1808>
When the number of out balls reaches 60,000 balls (step S1802: Yes), the MPU 41 updates the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 (steps S1805 to S1807). Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 29 (A) and 29 (B), the MPU 41 shifts the previous 60,000 ball base B1 to the previous 60,000 ball base (step S1805) in the base information, and is based on the current situation. The BL is shifted to the 60,000 ball base B1 last time (step S1806), and the current base BL is cleared to 0 (step S1807). Then, the MPU 41 clears the number of general winning slot payout balls, the number of first winning slot payout balls, and the number of out balls stored as base information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 to 0 balls (step S1808). ).

<Step S1809>
When the process of step S1804 or S1808 is completed, the MPU 51 reads various information in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412, calculates other specific performance, and updates the other specific performance information to the calculated value (step S1809). ), The specific performance information update process is terminated. The specific performance in this case is, for example, the number of unit jackpot lottery, the continuous bonus ratio, the bonus ratio, and the like.

[Performance display monitor display control processing]
Here, FIGS. 30 to 33 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 executed in step S1309 of the main process of FIG. 23. Hereinafter, the display control process of the performance display monitor 43 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33.

<Step S1901>
As shown in FIG. 30, in step S1901, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the BL display flag is set to ON. Here, the BL display flag is a flag indicating that the current base BL is displayed on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1906 or step S1930 of FIG. 33, which will be described later. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1908 of FIG. 31 when the BL display flag is set to on (step S1901: Yes), and when the BL display flag is set to off (step S1901: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1902.

<Step S1902>
When the BL display flag is set to off (step S1901: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the B1 display flag is set to on (step S1902). Here, the B1 display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B1 was displayed last time on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1912 of FIG. 31 described later. The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1917 of FIG. 32 when the B1 display flag is set to on (step S1902: Yes), and when the B1 display flag is set to off (step S1902: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1903.

<Step S1903>
When the B1 display flag is set to off (step S1902: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the B2 display flag is set to on (step S1903). Here, the B2 display flag is a flag indicating that the 60,000 ball base B2 is displayed two times before on the performance display monitor 43, and is set to ON in step S1921 of FIG. 32, which will be described later. When the B2 display flag is set to on (step S1903: Yes), the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1926 of FIG. 33, and when the B2 display flag is set to off (step S1903: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1904.

<Step S1904>
When the B2 display flag is set to off (step S1903: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from off to on (step S1904). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the process shifts to step S1905, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from off to on (step S1904: No), the corresponding End the display control process.

<Steps S1905 to S1907>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from off to on (step S1904: Yes), the MPU 41 causes the performance display monitor 43 to display the current base BL included in the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. (Step S1905). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29 (A), "8.", "L", and "8" indicating that the current base BL is 29%. 2 ”and“ 9 ”are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is an example shown in FIG. 29 (B), the current base BL is 0%. “8.”, “L”, “0”, and “0” indicating the presence are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to on (step S1906), sets the BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1907), and performs the display control process. To finish.

<Steps S1908 and S1909>
When the BL display flag is set to ON (step S1901: Yes), as shown in FIG. 31, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the BL display time counter set in step S1907 of FIG. 30 (step). S1908), it is determined whether or not the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1910 when the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), and when the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1913.

<Steps S191 to S1913>
When the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1909: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to off (step S1910), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The previous 60,000 ball base B1 included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1911). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29 (A), "8." and "1" indicating that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 is 33%. , "3", "3" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is the example shown in FIG. 29 (B), the previous 60,000 balls "8.", "1", "2", and "9" indicating that the base B1 is 29% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to on (step S1912), sets the B1 display time counter for displaying the 60,000 ball base B1 on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1913), and sets the B1 display time counter. End the display control process.

<Step S1914>
When the value of the BL display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1909: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1914). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the process shifts to step S1915, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S1914: No), the corresponding The display control process is terminated. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the energization of the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, thereby indicating the current base BL. And the numbers are turned off.

<Steps S1915 and S1916>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1914: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to off (step S1915) and clears the BL display time counter value to 0 (step S1915). S1916), the display control process is terminated.

<Steps S1917 and S1918>
When the B1 display flag is set to on (step S1902: Yes), as shown in FIG. 32, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B1 display time counter set in step S1913 of FIG. 31 (step). S1917), it is determined whether or not the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1919 when the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), and when the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1923.

<Steps S1919 to S1922>
When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1918: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to off (step S1919), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The performance display monitor 43 displays the 60,000-ball base B2 included in the information two times before (step S1920). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29 (A), "8." and "2" indicating that the 60,000-ball base B2 two times before is 32%. , "3", and "2" are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is an example shown in FIG. 29 (B), 60,000 balls are used two times before. "8.", "2", "3", and "3" indicating that the base B2 is 33% are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to on (step S1921), and sets the B2 display time counter corresponding to a fixed time for displaying the 60,000 ball base B2 on the performance display monitor 43 two times before (step S1922). , The display control process is terminated.

<Step S1923>
When the value of the B1 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1918: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1923). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the process shifts to step S1924, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S1923: No), the corresponding End the display control process. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the energization of the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, so that the previous 60,000 ball base B1 The alphabet and numbers indicating are turned off.

<Steps S1924 and S1925>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1923: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B1 display flag to off (step S1924) and clears the value of the B1 display time counter to 0 (step). S1925), the display control process is terminated.

<Steps S1926 and S1927>
When the B2 display flag is set to on (step S1903: Yes), as shown in FIG. 33, the MPU 41 subtracts 1 from the value of the B2 display time counter set in step S1922 of FIG. 32 (step). S1926), it is determined whether or not the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927). The MPU 41 shifts the process to step S1928 when the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), and when the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No). ), The process proceeds to step S1932.

<Steps S1928 to S1931>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S1927: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to off (step S1928), and the base stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412. The current base BL included in the information is displayed on the performance display monitor 43 (step S1929). For example, when the base information stored in the game information storage area 412d of the RAM 412 is the example shown in FIG. 29 (A), "8.", "L", and "8" indicating that the current base BL is 29%. 2 ”and“ 9 ”are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43, and when the base information is an example shown in FIG. 29 (B), the current base BL is 0%. “8.”, “L”, “0”, and “0” indicating the presence are displayed on the four 7-segment displays 431 to 434 constituting the performance display monitor 43. Then, the MPU 41 sets the BL display flag to on (step S1930), sets the BL display time counter for displaying the current base BL on the performance display monitor 43 for a certain period of time (step S1931), and performs the display control process. To finish.

<Step S1932>
When the value of the B2 display time counter after subtraction is not 0 (step S1927: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the performance display switch 44 has been switched from on to off (step S1932). When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the process shifts to step S1933, and when the performance display switch 44 is not switched from on to off (step S1932: No), the corresponding End the display control process. When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the performance display monitor 43 cuts off the energization of the 7-segment displays 431 to 434, so that the 60,000-ball base B2 is used two times before. The alphabet and numbers indicating are turned off.

<Steps S1933 and S1934>
When the performance display switch 44 is switched from on to off (step S1932: Yes), the MPU 41 sets the B2 display flag to off (step S1933) and clears the value of the B2 display time counter to 0 (step S1933). S1934), the display control process is terminated.

[Processing of voice lamp control device 5]
Next, the process executed by the MPU 51 in the voice lamp control device 5 will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 to 47.

As another embodiment, it is conceivable that a part or all of the processing executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5 in the present embodiment is executed by the MPU 61 of the display control device 6. Further, in the voice lamp control device 5, the MPU 51 also executes control processing of the speaker 26 and the illumination unit 27, startup processing at the time of starting up the voice lamp control device 5, NMI interruption processing at the time of a power failure, and the like. The description of these processes will be omitted.

[Secondary timer interrupt processing of voice lamp control device 5]
Here, FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 51 of the voice lamp control device 5. The MPU 51 executes, for example, the sub-timer interrupt process as a periodic process having a cycle of 1 msec.

As shown in FIG. 34, in the sub-timer interrupt process, the MPU 51 includes a display order setting process (step S2000), a counter update process (step S2001), a command determination process (step S2002), and a variable game effect process (step S2003). , The jackpot game effect processing (step S2004), and the set value suggestion processing (step S2005) are executed.

[Display order setting process]
In the display order setting process (step S2000), the MPU 51 refers to the game set value (set value) set for defining the jackpot probability in the game machine 10 and displays the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period. The order of the numbers to be displayed is determined and stored (set). In this embodiment, five numbers for specifying a plurality of (five) game set values (non-set values) other than the set value by executing the set value suggestion process in the jackpot game for a predetermined period. Are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined order. Therefore, in the display order setting process, the order in which the five numbers that specify the plurality of non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set. Here, FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the display order setting process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34, and FIG. 36 is the number display order determination table referred to in the display order setting process of FIG. 35. It is a figure which shows an example. Hereinafter, the details of the display order setting process will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36.

<Step S2011>
As shown in FIG. 35, in the display order setting process, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the display order setting flag is set to ON (step S2011). The display order setting flag is a flag indicating that the setting of the display order of the numbers that specify the non-set value in the jackpot game for a predetermined period has been completed, and is set to be turned on in step S2016 of the display order setting process. .. Further, the display order setting flag is initially set to off when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. Therefore, when the sub-timer interrupt process is executed by permitting the sub-timer interrupt process by the start-up process of the voice lamp control device, the sub-timer interrupt process is displayed by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period. The order of the numbers is set (steps S2014 to S2016 described later). That is, in the gaming machine 10, when the power is turned on, the order of the numbers to be displayed by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period is set.

By the way, the power supply of the gaming machine 10 is often turned on before the opening of the gaming hall. Therefore, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on, so that the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set for each business day. This prevents the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 from being fixed, so that the same information is repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 and the information on the 7-segment display unit 39. It is possible to prevent the display of from becoming monotonous.

Here, when the display order setting flag is on (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2012, and when the display order setting flag is off (step S2011: No), the process is performed in step S2014. Move to.

<Steps S2012 and S2013>
When the display order setting flag is on (step S2011: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the set value change flag is set to on (step S2012). The set value change flag is a flag indicating that the game set value (set value) set to specify the jackpot probability in the game machine 10 has been changed, and is a flag in the command determination process of FIG. 37, which will be described later. It is set to on in step S2121. When the set value change flag is on (step S2012: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2014 after setting the set value change flag to off (step S2013). That is, in the gaming machine 10, when the set value is changed, the order of the numbers to be displayed by the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the predetermined period is set. When the set value is changed in this way, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set, so that the display order of the numbers can be determined according to the set value. It is possible to prevent the presentation of information on the display unit 39 from becoming monotonous.

On the other hand, when the set value change flag is off (step S2012: NO), the MPU 51 ends the display order setting process.

<Steps S2014 to S2016>
In step S2014, the MPU 51 acquires the set value from the RAM 512, and further sets the order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 with reference to the set value and the number display order determination table (see FIG. 36) (see FIG. 36). Step S2015). Here, FIG. 36 (A) is a diagram showing an example of the number display order determination table, and FIG. 36 (B) shows the display order and the 7-segment display unit 39 described in the number display order determination table shown in FIG. 36 (A). It is a figure which shows the correspondence | correspondence with the display order of a number in.

As shown in FIG. 36 (A), in the number display order determination table, lottery is performed for each game set value 1 to 6 (set values 1 to 6) set to define the jackpot probability in the game machine 10. The display order of numbers is defined by the random value. The lottery random number values are 120 from 0 to 119, and one display order is associated with each lottery random number value, and the selection probability of each display order is the same. The display order is the display order A1 to A120 selected when the setting value is 1, the display order B1 to B120 selected when the setting value is 2, the display order C1 to C120 selected when the setting value is 3, and the setting. The set value 1 includes the display orders D1 to D120 selected when the value is 4, the display orders E1 to E120 selected when the set value is 5, and the display orders F1 to F120 selected when the set value is 6. Every ~ 6, 120 display orders corresponding to all combinations of numbers indicating non-set values are set.

The display order A1 to A120 selected when the set value 1 is set is the five numbers "2" that specify the game set values (non-set values) 2 to 6 other than the number "1" that specifies the set value 1. The order in which "6" is displayed is specified (see FIG. 36 (B)). That is, when the set value is 1, and any of the display orders A1 to A120 is selected according to the lottery random number value, the number "1" that specifies that the set value is 1 is 7 segments. It is not displayed on the display unit 39.

The display order B1 to B120 selected when the set value 2 is selected specifies the set values "1" and "3" to "6" set values 2 to 6 other than the number "2" that specifies the set value 2. The order in which the five numbers "2" to "6" are displayed is specified (see FIG. 36 (B)). That is, when the set value is 2, and any of the display orders B1 to B120 is selected according to the lottery random number value, the number "2" that specifies that the set value is 2 is 7 segments. It is not displayed on the display unit 39.

The display order C1 to C120 selected when the setting value 3 is selected is the five numbers "1" and "1" that specify the setting values 1, 2, 4 to 6 other than the number "3" that specifies the setting value 1. The order in which "2" and "4" to "6" are displayed is specified (see FIG. 36 (B)). That is, when any of the display orders C1 to C120 is selected because the set value is 3, the number "3" that specifies that the set value is 3 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. There is no such thing.

The display order D1 to D120 selected when the setting value 4 is selected is the five numbers "1" to "1" to specify the setting values 1, 3, 5, and 6 other than the number "4" that specifies the setting value 4. The order in which "3", "5", and "6" are displayed is specified (see FIG. 36 (B)). That is, when any of the display orders D1 to D120 is selected because the set value is 4, the number "4" that identifies the set value 4 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. There is no such thing.

The display order E1 to E120 selected when the set value 5 is set is the five numbers "1" to "4" that specify the set values 1 to 4 and 6 other than the number "5" that specifies the set value 5. , The order in which "6" is displayed is specified (see FIG. 36 (B)). That is, when any of the display orders E1 to E120 is selected because the set value is 5, the number "5" that specifies that the set value is 5 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. There is no such thing.

The display order F1 to F120 selected when the set value 6 is selected displays five numbers "1" to "5" that specify the set values 1 to 5 other than the number "6" that specifies the set value 6. The order is specified (see FIG. 36 (B)). That is, when any of the display orders F1 to F120 is selected because the set value is 6, the number "6" that specifies that the set value is 6 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. There is no such thing.

Then, when the order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set (step S2015), the MPU 51 sets the display order setting flag to off (step S2016), and ends the display order setting process. That is, the MPU 51 is set to specify the jackpot probability in the gaming machine 10 when the power is turned on (step S2011: No) and when the set value is changed (step S2013: Yes). The order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set according to the game set values 1 to 6 (set values 1 to 6).

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the number display order on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined based on the number display order determination table when the power is turned on, and after the power is turned on, the number display order determination table is changed by changing the set value. The display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined based on. As a result, when a predetermined condition (for example, turning on the power or changing the setting) is satisfied, the numbers (non-set values) can be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined order in the specified period. Since the power of the gaming machine 10 is often turned on before the opening of the game hall, the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on. The display order of numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set for each business day. This prevents the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 from being fixed, so that the same information is repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 and the information on the 7-segment display unit 39. It is possible to prevent the display of from becoming monotonous.

In the display order setting process of the present embodiment, the display order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on and when the set value is changed. , The display order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 may be set when other conditions (predetermined conditions) are satisfied. The predetermined conditions in this case will be described in the third embodiment described later, but the predetermined conditions include, for example, the start of a predetermined period, the start of the jackpot game, and the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game. Is started. Even when the display order of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is set by satisfying these predetermined conditions, it is possible to prevent the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39 from being fixed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the same information from being repeatedly presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 and the information display on the 7-segment display unit 39 from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the number display order determination table shown in FIG. 36 (A), the probability that all the number display orders are selected is the same for the same set value, but the probability that the number display order is selected is not necessarily the same. It doesn't have to be. For example, it is conceivable that the number display order determination table is set so that the probability that at least a part of the number display order is selected for the same set value is different from that of other number display orders. That is, it is conceivable that a specific display order is easily selected, and conversely, it is difficult to select a specific display order. By setting the probability that at least a part of the number display order is selected according to the set value to be different from the other number display order in this way, it is easy to select a specific number display order according to the set value. However, it is also possible to make it difficult to select a specific number display order. That is, unlike the case where the probability that the display order of all numbers is selected is the same, it is easy to identify a specific non-setting value, and conversely, it is difficult to specify a specific non-setting value. It will also be possible to do. As a result, it is possible to adjust the high / low possibility of having a high setting value and the high / low possibility of having a low setting value. Specifically, for example, when the set value is a low set value (for example, set value 2 or less), the display order of the numbers indicating the non-set value corresponding to the high set value (for example, set value 5 or more) is delayed. You may do it. In this case, by leaving the possibility of the high setting value to the end when the setting value is low, the player can expect the high setting value and the low setting value. It is prevented from being identified early by the player. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game, prevent the game on the game machine 10 from being terminated early, and suppress a decrease in the operating rate on the game machine 10. On the contrary, when the set value is a high set value (for example, a set value of 5 or more), the display order of the numbers indicating the non-set values corresponding to the low set value (for example, the set value of 2 or less) is delayed. You may. In this case, the number corresponding to the high setting value and the number corresponding to the low setting value are not displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 until immediately before the setting value is specified to be the high setting value, and the player Until just before it is understood that is a high set value, the possibility that it is a low set value remains. As a result, it is possible to pay attention to which of the high setting value is advantageous for the player and the low setting value which is disadvantageous to the player, and enjoy the feeling of excitement until just before the high setting value is grasped. .. Further, regardless of the set value, it is conceivable that the display order of the numbers corresponding to the lowest game set value among the non-set values is not slow, and for example, the slowest display order can be easily selected. In this case, the number indicating the most unfavorable non-setting value for the player is displayed at the end, so until the last number is displayed, the most unfavorable non-setting value for the player and the player are displayed. There is still the possibility of a non-set value that is favorable to. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that the game setting value (big hit probability) is the most disadvantageous for the player, so that it is possible to prevent the game on the game machine 10 from being terminated early, and the game can be played. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the machine.

Further, it is conceivable to set so that the number display order in which the number indicating the non-set value corresponding to the high set value and the number indicating the non-set value corresponding to the low set value are delayed can be easily selected. For example, a number display order in which the display order of at least one of "1" and "2" corresponding to the low setting value and at least one of "5" and "6" corresponding to the high setting value is slow is selected. It is also possible to make it easier to do. In this case as well, the set value includes the possibility that the high setting value is advantageous for the player and the possibility that the low setting value is disadvantageous for the player until just before the player grasps the set value. Until just before grasping, you can enjoy the feeling of excitement as to whether the setting value is high or low.

Also, except when the set value is the highest set value (set value is 6), the display order of numbers corresponding to non-set values higher than the set value is delayed. Set so that the number display order can be easily selected. Is possible. For example, the priority of the number indicating the non-set value having a higher advantage judgment probability than the set value is set higher than the selection rate of the display order lower than the number indicating the non-set value having a lower advantage judgment probability than the set value. Can be considered. By delaying the display order of the numbers indicating the non-set values higher than the set values in this way, the player is expected to have the possibility that the set values are higher than the actual set values until just before grasping the set values. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to guess and enjoy the non-set value (set value) while expecting the possibility that the set value is high until just before grasping the set value. On the contrary, except when the set value is the lowest set value (set value is 1), the display order of the numbers corresponding to the non-set values lower than the set value is delayed. It is easy to select the number display order. It is conceivable to set as. For example, the priority of the number indicating the non-set value having a lower advantage judgment probability than the set value is set higher than the selection rate of the display order lower than the number indicating the non-set value having a higher advantage judgment probability than the set value. Can be considered. By delaying the display order of the numbers indicating the non-set values lower than the set values in this way, the numbers indicating the non-set values corresponding to the game set values lower than the set values are not set immediately before the set values are grasped. It is left as a display number. As a result, the final candidate for the set value becomes the actual set value and the game set value (non-set value) lower than the set value. As a result, in the end, the player's advantageous game set value is grasped as the set value, so that the joy when the set value is grasped is improved.

Further, regardless of the set value, it is conceivable to set the number display order so that the number display order in which the display order of the numbers corresponding to the high set value (for example, the set value 5 or more) is delayed can be easily selected. On the contrary, it is conceivable to set the number display order so that the number display order in which the display order of the numbers corresponding to the low set value (for example, the set value 2 or less) is earlier can be easily selected. In this way, the display order of the numbers corresponding to the low setting value is early, and the display order of the numbers corresponding to the high setting value is delayed, so that the higher setting value is displayed later. As a result, the player can expect the player to have a high setting value that is advantageous to the player until just before the player grasps the set value. Therefore, the non-set value is expected to be high. You can guess (set value) and enjoy it.

[Counter update process]
In the counter update process (step S2001), the MPU 51 updates the first stop symbol type counter, the effect pattern type counter, the fluctuation display counter, and the like. Specifically, the MPU 51 adds 1 to the counter values of the first stop symbol type counter and the effect type counter, and clears the counter value to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. The first stop symbol type counter updated here is used to determine the type of the decorative symbol to be stopped first based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the first stop symbol type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 99. Further, the effect pattern type counter is used to determine the effect type (effect pattern) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. For example, the effect type counter is a loop counter that loops between 0 and 109. On the other hand, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation display counter. This fluctuation display counter is for measuring the fluctuation display time of the symbol display unit 341, and the counter value in the fluctuation display counter is set to be 0 when the remaining fluctuation display time becomes 0. Therefore, based on the counter value of the fluctuation display counter, it is possible to grasp the remaining fluctuation display time, that the fluctuation is in progress, that the fluctuation display of the symbol display unit 341 is completed, and the like.

[Command judgment processing]
In the command determination process (step S2002), a command received from the main control device 4 is determined, and a process corresponding to the command is executed. Here, FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the command determination process executed in step S2002 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34.

<Step S2101>
As shown in FIG. 37, in step S2101, the MPU 51 determines whether or not a command has been received from the main control device 4. Here, when the MPU 51 receives the command (step S2101: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2102. On the other hand, when the MPU 51 has not received the command (step S2101: No), the MPU 51 ends the command determination process. The command received from the main control device 4 is stored in the unprocessed command storage area of the RAM 512, and the MPU 51 determines whether or not the command has been received by referring to the unprocessed command storage area. The command stored in the unprocessed command storage area is determined to have received the command in step S2101, and when it is targeted for processing, it is deleted from the unprocessed command storage area, for example, in the processing work storage area. It will be remembered.

<Step S2102>
In step S2102, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a variation pattern command. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2103 when it is a variable pattern command (step S2102: Yes), and shifts the process to step S2106 when the command is not a variable pattern command (step S2102: No).

<Step S2103>
In step S2103, the MPU 51 determines a variation pattern (a combination of stop symbols of decorative symbols and an effect type (effect pattern)) based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 4. Specifically, the MPU 51 includes a variation pattern command, a first stop symbol selection table (see FIG. 38 (A)), a variation type table (see FIG. 38 (B)), and an effect type table (see FIG. 38 (B)) stored in ROM 511 in advance. The fluctuation pattern is determined based on (see FIGS. 39 (A) to 39 (C)) and the value of the effect type counter stored in the RAM 512. Further, when the variation pattern command includes information on the jackpot type, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot flag according to the jackpot type to on. Specifically, the MPU 51 sets the 5R normal jackpot flag on when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot, and sets the 5R probability variable jackpot flag on when the jackpot type is a 5R probability variable jackpot, and sets the jackpot type to on. Set the 16R probability variation jackpot flag to on when is a 16R probability variation jackpot.

The stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol includes a first stop symbol, a second stop symbol, and a final stop symbol. The first stop symbol is a decorative symbol that is first stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341, the second stop symbol is a decorative symbol that is second stopped and displayed, and the final stop symbol is finally stopped and displayed. It is a design. The effect type table includes a normal reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to normal reach (see FIG. 39 (A)), a super reach effect pattern type selection table corresponding to super reach (see FIG. 39 (B)), and a special reach. A special reach effect pattern type selection table (see FIG. 39C) is included.

Here, FIG. 38A is a diagram showing an example of a first stop symbol selection table. As shown in FIG. 38 (A), in the first stop symbol selection table, a decorative symbol (first stop symbol) to be first stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341 is defined. Note that FIG. 38 (A) shows a combination of symbols, "777", indicating that the decorative symbols are "1" to "9" and "333" is a probability variation jackpot (either 5R probability variation jackpot or 16R probability variation jackpot). Is a symbol combination indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot, and that the doublet other than "333" and "777" is a symbol combination indicating that it is either a 5R normal jackpot, a 5R probability variation jackpot, or a 16R probability variation jackpot. It is assumed.

If the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", there is no distribution of "3" and "7" as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol has a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols other than "3" and "7". It is determined. That is, when the lottery result is "5R normal jackpot", the symbol combination of "333" or "777" indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot or a 16R probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot) is not stopped and displayed.

Further, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", "7" is not sorted as the first stop symbol, and the first stop symbol is determined from the decorative symbols other than "7" with a predetermined probability. That is, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the symbol combination of "777" indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot is not stopped and displayed. On the other hand, even when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", doublet symbol combinations other than the symbol combination of "333" indicating that it is a 5R probability variation jackpot may be stopped and displayed. That is, even when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot", the doublet symbol combination other than the symbol combination of "333" whose stop display result of the decorative symbol suggests the 5R normal jackpot can be stopped and displayed. Then, when the lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" and a decorative symbol other than "3" excluding "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 is a 5R probability variation jackpot in the jackpot game. Execute the 5R probability change promotion effect to be specified.

Furthermore, if the lottery result is "16 probability variation jackpot", there is a distribution for all the decorative symbols "1" to "9", and the first stop is made with a predetermined probability from the decorative symbols "1" to "9". The design is decided. That is, even when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", doublet symbol combinations other than the symbol combination of "777" indicating that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot can be stopped and displayed. That is, even when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot", the doublet symbol combination other than the symbol combination of "777" which indicates the 5R probability variation jackpot or the 5R normal jackpot is stopped and displayed. Can be. Then, when the lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot" and "7" is determined as the first stop symbol, the MPU 51 executes a 16R promotion effect that clearly indicates that it is a 16R probability variation jackpot in the jackpot game.

Then, when the first stop symbol is determined when the lottery result is a big hit, the MPU 51 determines the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol to be the same symbols as the previously determined first stop symbol. As a result, the stop symbol combination that is stopped and displayed on the effective line of the symbol display unit 341 is determined in the game round.

On the other hand, if the lottery result is "missing", there is a distribution for all the decorative symbols "1" to "9", and the first stop symbol is determined from the decorative symbols "1" to "9" with a predetermined probability. Will be done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines the first stop symbol when the lottery result is "out", the out-of-order type selected based on the out-of-type table (FIG. 14 (D)) and the previously determined first stop symbol are used. The second stop symbol is determined based on the symbol. For example, when the deviation type is front-back deviation reach, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined to be the symbols before and after the first stop symbol. Further, when the detachment type is reach other than the front-rear deviation, the second stop symbol is determined to be the same symbol as the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is different from the symbols before and after the first stop symbol and the first stop symbol. It is decided by the design. When the deviation type is completely out, the second stop symbol is determined to be a symbol different from the first stop symbol, and the final stop symbol is determined regardless of the first stop symbol and the second stop symbol. The stop symbol combination of the decorative symbols may be determined by the display control device 6, only the first stop symbol is determined by the voice lamp control device 5, and the second stop symbol and the final stop symbol are determined by the display control device 6. You may decide.

Further, FIG. 38B is a diagram showing an example of a variation type table. As shown in FIG. 38 (B), in the variation type table, the contents of the variation display time and the variation type (effect pattern) corresponding to the variation pattern command are defined. For example, the variation pattern command "A01" in which the lottery result is "normal jackpot" and the variation pattern is "01" is associated with the variation display time "30s" and the variation type "normal reach effect pattern". Further, the fluctuation pattern command "B02" whose lottery result is "5R probability variation jackpot" and whose variation pattern is "02" is associated with the variation display time "60s" and the variation type "super reach effect pattern". , The fluctuation pattern command "C03" whose lottery result is "16R probability variation jackpot" and whose variation pattern is "03" is associated with the variation display time "90s" and the variation type "special reach effect pattern". Further, the fluctuation pattern command "D04" in which the lottery result is "off" and the fluctuation pattern is "04" is associated with the fluctuation display time "7s" and the fluctuation type "non-reach effect pattern", and the lottery is performed. The variation pattern command "D05" whose result is "off" and the variation pattern is "05" is associated with the variation display time "10s" and the variation type "non-reach effect pattern".

Further, FIGS. 39 (A) to 39 (C) are diagrams showing an example of the effect pattern type selection table. The effect pattern type selection table is set for each variation type (effect pattern). Specifically, FIG. 39 (A) is a normal reach effect pattern type selection table referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is the normal reach effect, and FIG. 39 (B) is the final individual effect type in the variable game effect. It is a super reach effect pattern type selection table referred to when the individual effect type is a super reach effect, and FIG. 39 (C) is referred to when the final individual effect type in the variable game effect is a special reach effect. This is a special reach production pattern type selection table.

In the present embodiment, the case where there are five types of effects corresponding to each of the variable types will be described as an example, but the types of effects may be six or more. Further, in FIG. 39, the effect type table when the variation type is no reach is omitted.

In the normal reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39 (A), the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result (5R normal jackpot, 5R probability variation jackpot, 16R probability variation jackpot, and deviation). "Production pattern X1" to "Production pattern X5" are defined as. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the normal reach effect pattern, the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter is selected from the normal reach effect pattern type selection table according to the lottery result. select. Here, the effect patterns X1 to the effect pattern X3 included in the normal reach effect pattern type selection table are, for example, an effect in which the normal reach effect in which the decorative symbol is in the reach state is executed after the high-speed fluctuation effect in which the decorative symbol fluctuates at high speed is completed. , The final individual production type is a normal reach production.

Further, in the super reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39 (B), "effect pattern Y1" to "effect pattern Y5" are defined as the effect pattern types corresponding to the counter values of the effect pattern type counters according to the lottery result. Has been done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the super reach effect pattern, the MPU 51 selects the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Select from the table. Here, in the effect patterns Y1 to the effect pattern Y3 included in the super reach effect pattern type selection table, for example, the normal reach effect is executed after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect, and the final individual effect type is higher than the normal reach effect. It is a production that develops into a super reach production that is high and has a longer production execution time than the normal reach production. The super reach effect pattern type selection table may include a super reach effect pattern effect that develops into a super reach effect after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect without going through the normal reach effect.

Further, in the special reach effect pattern type selection table shown in FIG. 39 (C), "effect pattern Z1" to "effect pattern Z5" are defined as the effect pattern types corresponding to the counter values of the effect pattern type counters according to the lottery result. Has been done. Then, when the MPU 51 determines that the variation type (effect pattern) is the special reach effect pattern, the MPU 51 selects the effect pattern type corresponding to the counter value of the effect pattern type counter according to the lottery result. Select from the table. Here, for the effect patterns Z1 to Z3 included in the special reach effect pattern type selection table, for example, the normal reach effect and the super reach effect are executed after the high-speed fluctuation effect is completed, and the normal reach effect and the super are as the final individual effect types. It is a production that develops into a special reach production that has a higher expectation of big hits than the reach production and has a longer production execution time than the normal reach production. The special reach effect pattern type selection table includes a special reach effect pattern that develops into a special reach effect after the end of the high-speed fluctuation effect or the normal reach effect without going through at least one of the normal reach effect and the super reach effect. You may.

Then, the MPU 51 sends a variation pattern command, a variation type table, an effect type table, a stop symbol combination of decorative symbols determined based on the effect type counter, and a display variation pattern command indicating the variation type (effect pattern type) to the RAM 512. Set.

<Step S2104>
Returning to the description of FIG. 37, in step S2104, the MPU 51 sets the fluctuation display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation display counter. The fluctuation display time is determined according to the fluctuation pattern information included in the fluctuation pattern command. Then, the fluctuation display counter is decremented one by one in the counter update processing of step S2001 in the sub-timer interrupt processing of FIG. It is possible to determine the remaining time of the display time. For example, the MPU 51 can determine that the symbol variation display has ended when the variation display counter becomes 0.

<Step S2105>
In step S2105, the MPU 51 outputs a display variation pattern command for specifying the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol in the symbol display unit 341 and the content of the variation type (effect pattern type) to the display control device 6, and determines the command. End the process. The display variation pattern command is information for identifying the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol determined in step S2103 and the variation type (effect pattern type). On the other hand, the ROM 611 of the display control device 6 stores a variation image of a decorative pattern and an effect image corresponding to each display variation pattern command. As a result, in the display control device 6, the MPU 61 executes the variation display and the effect display on the symbol display unit 341 according to the stop symbol combination of the decorative symbol corresponding to the display variation pattern command, the variation type, and the effect type.

Specifically, in the symbol display unit 341, the MPU 61 of the display control device 6 executes variable display of a plurality of decorative symbols (for example, three) before the preset variable display time elapses, and a plurality of decorative symbols (for example, three) are displayed. The fluctuation of the decorative pattern of is stopped and displayed in order. During the variation display of the decorative symbol, various effects corresponding to the contents of the variation type (effect pattern type) specified by the display variation pattern command are executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like. ..

Further, when the MPU 51 outputs the display variation pattern command to the display control device 6, the variable game effect in-progress flag is set to ON. This variable game effect in progress flag is a flag indicating that the variable game effect is being executed.

<Step S2106>
In step S2106, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game start command. The jackpot game start command is a command indicating to start the jackpot game, and is set when the jackpot game execution flag is set to on at the start of the jackpot game by the MPU 41 of the main control device 4 as described above. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2107 when the received command is the jackpot game start command (step S2106: Yes), and processes when the received command is not the jackpot game start command (step S2106: No). To step S2109.

<Step S2107>
When the jackpot game start command is received (step S2106: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the jackpot game effect determination process (step S2107). The jackpot game effect determination process is a process for determining an effect to be executed on the symbol display unit 341 or the like when the game state shifts to the jackpot game state. Specifically, the MPU 51 determines the opening effect, ending effect, and opening / closing execution mode effect executed in the jackpot game.

<Step S2108>
In step S2108, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect start flag on and ends the command determination process. The jackpot game effect start flag is a flag for starting the jackpot game effect (opening effect), and determines whether or not to execute the opening effect start process in the jackpot game effect process of step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34. It is referred to when judging.

<Step S2109>
In step S2109, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a round game start command. The round game start command is a command indicating to start the round game in the open / close execution mode, and is set when the round game is started in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 23. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2110 when the received command is a round game start command (step S2109: Yes), and processes when the received command is not a round game start command (step S2109: No). To step S2111.

<Step S2310>
When the round game start command is received (step S2108: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect start flag to on (step S2310), and ends the command determination process. The round game start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the round game effect in the jackpot game effect of step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34.

<Step S2111>
In step S2111, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a round game end command. The round game end command is a command indicating that the round game in the open / close execution mode is ended, and is set when the round game is ended in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 23. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2112 when the received command is a round game end command (step S211: Yes), and processes when the received command is not a round game end command (step S211: No). To step S2113.

<Step S2312>
When the round game end command is received (step S211: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the round game effect end flag to on (step S2312), and ends the command determination process. The round game end flag is referred to when determining whether or not to end the round game effect in the jackpot game effect of step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34.

<Step S2113>
In step S2113, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a special out-ball detection command. The special out ball detection command is a command indicating that the game ball detected by the special out ball sensor 384 is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37, and is a command indicating that the game ball is a special out ball that has entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37. It is set in the sensor detection process of step S1001 in the interrupt process. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2114 when the received command is a special out-ball detection command (step S2113: Yes), and when the received command is not a special out-ball detection command (step S2113: No). , The process proceeds to step S2115.

<Step S2114>
In step S2114, the MPU 51 sets the special out-ball detection flag on and ends the command determination process. The special out-ball detection flag is referred to when determining whether or not to add the value of the special out-ball counter in step S2208 in the set value suggestion process of FIG. 40, which will be described later.

<Step S2115>
In step S2115, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is the ending start command. The ending start command is a command indicating to start the ending in the jackpot game, and is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 23. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2116 when the received command is the ending start command (step S2115: Yes), and steps the process when the received command is not the ending start command (step S2115: No). Move to S2117.

<Step S2116>
In step S2116, the MPU 51 sets the ending start effect flag to on, and ends the command determination process. The ending effect start flag is referred to when determining whether or not to start the ending effect process in the jackpot game effect process of step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34. Further, the ending effect start flag is referred to when it is determined in step S2201 in the set value suggestion process of FIG. 40 whether or not to move the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 from the upper limit position to the lower limit position. NS.

<Step S2117>
In step S2117, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a jackpot game end command. The jackpot game end command is a command indicating that the jackpot game is terminated, and is set in the jackpot game control process of step S1305 in the main process of FIG. 23. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2118 when the received command is the jackpot game end command (step S2117: Yes), and processes when the received command is not the jackpot game end command (step S2117: No). To step S2119.

<Step S2118>
In step S2118, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to on and ends the command determination process. The jackpot game effect end flag is a flag for ending the jackpot game effect (ending effect), and whether or not to execute the ending effect end process in the jackpot game effect process of step S2004 in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34. It is referred to when judging. Further, the jackpot game effect end flag is referred to when it is determined in step S2301 in the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. 41 whether or not to turn off the lit segment on the 7-segment display unit 39.

<Step S2119>
In step S2119, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the received command is a set value change command. The set value change command is a command for notifying the voice lamp control device 5 that the game set value has been changed and the changed game set value, and is set in step S1710 in the set value change process of FIG. 27. .. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2120 when the received command is a set value change command (step S2119: Yes), and processes when the received command is not a set value change command (step S2119: No). To step S2121.

<Step S2120>
In step S2120, the MPU 51 changes the set value stored in the RAM 512 to the changed set value included in the set value change command and stores the set value, and ends the command determination process. The set value stored in the RAM 512 is read out in step S2014 in the display order setting process of FIG. 35, and is referred to in order to determine the display order of the numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39.

<Step S2121>
In step S2121, the MPU 51 terminates the command determination process after executing the process based on the other commands received from the main control device 4.

[Variable game production processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 34, in the variable game effect processing (step S2003) of the sub-timer interrupt process, in the variable game for notifying the lottery result in the jackpot lottery, when the variable pattern command is received, the command determination process of FIG. 37 is performed. The variable game effect according to the effect pattern determined in step S2103 is executed by the symbol display unit 341, the speaker 26, the illumination unit 27, and the like.

[Big hit game production processing]
In the jackpot game effect processing (step S2004) of the sub-timer interrupt process, the opening effect, ending effect, and opening / closing execution mode effect determined in the jackpot game effect determination process of step S2107 of the command determination process of FIG. 37 are executed. In the present embodiment, in the ending effect, the ending additional image showing the display result on the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 (see FIG. 47).

[Set value suggestion processing]
In the set value suggestion process (step S2005) of the sub-timer interrupt process, the vertical movement of the stopper unit 383 of the game ball retention unit 38 is controlled, and the lighting and extinguishing of each segment A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled. Will be done. Further, in the set value suggestion process, as an ending effect of the jackpot game, a process of displaying an ending additional image showing the display result on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the jackpot game on the symbol display unit 341 is executed. Here, FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the set value suggestion process executed in the command determination process of FIG. 37.

<Step S2201>
As shown in FIG. 40, in step S2201, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending effect start flag is set to ON. The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect, and is set to be turned on in step S2116 in the command determination process of FIG. 37. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing when the ending effect is started by the ending effect start flag. Here, when the ending effect start flag is on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2202, and when the ending effect start flag is off (step S2201: No), the process is performed in step S2206. Move to.

<Step S2202>
When the ending effect start flag is on (step S2201: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202). That is, the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 from the upper limit position to the lower limit position at the ending effect start timing. As a result, when the game ball 99 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention unit 38, the game ball 99 is moved to the discharge lane 382. At this time, the game ball 99 moved from the retention lane 381 to the discharge lane 382 is detected by the special out ball sensor 384.

<Steps S2203 to S2205>
When the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is moved downward from the upper limit position to the lower limit position (step S2202), the MPU 51 sets the stopper portion lowering moving flag indicating that the stopper portion 383 is moving downward to on. (Step S2203). The flag for moving down the stopper portion is referred to in step S2206 to determine whether or not the game ball (special out ball) retained in the retention lane 381 is at a timing that can be detected by the special out ball sensor 384. Then, the MPU 51 sets a downward movement time counter corresponding to the time until the stopper portion 383 returns to the upper limit position (step S2204), and further sets the ending effect start flag to off (step S2205). The setting value suggestion processing ends.

<Step S2206>
When the ending effect start flag is off (step S2201: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the stopper portion lowering moving flag set to be on in step S2203 is set to on (step S2206). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the game ball (special out ball) stayed in the stay lane 381 is at the timing that can be detected by the special out ball sensor 384. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2207 when the stopper portion lowering moving flag is on (step S2206: Yes), and performs the processing when the stopper portion lowering moving flag is off (step S2206: No). The process proceeds to step S2216.

<Step S2207>
When the flag for moving down the stopper is on (step S2206: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the special out-ball detection flag is set to on (step S2207). The special out-ball detection flag is a flag indicating that the game ball has been detected by the special out-ball sensor 384, and is set to on in step S2114 in the command determination process of FIG. 37. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2208 when the special out-ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), and performs the process when the special out-ball detection flag is off (step S2207: No). The process proceeds to step S2210.

<Steps S2208 and S2209>
When the special out-ball detection flag is on (step S2207: Yes), the MPU 51 adds 1 to the value of the special out-ball counter set in the RAM 512 (step S2208) and sets the special out-ball detection flag to off. (Step S2209). That is, the MPU 51 counts the number of special out balls when the special out balls that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 are retained in the game ball retention portion 38 in the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game. The number of special out balls counted in this way is referred to in order to control lighting or extinguishing of segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. 41, which will be described later.

<Steps S2210 and S2211>
In step S2210, the MPU 51 subtracts 1 from the value of the down movement time counter set in step S2204. Then, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the downward movement time counter after subtraction is 0 (step S2211). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing to return the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 at the lower limit position to the upper limit position.

Whether or not it is the timing to return the stopper portion 383 to the upper limit position is whether or not the special out-ball is not detected for a certain period of time, that is, whether or not the special out-ball detection flag is continuously turned off for a predetermined number of times or more. You may judge by. If the condition is that the stopper portion 383 is returned to the upper limit position that the special out balls are not detected for a certain period of time, even if there are many special out balls, those special out balls can be accurately counted. ..

Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2212 when the value of the down movement time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), and when the value of the down movement time counter is not 0 (step S2211: No), the said The setting value suggestion processing ends.

<Steps S2212 and S2213>
When the value of the lower movement time counter is 0 (step S2211: Yes), the MPU 51 moves the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 upward from the lower limit position to the upper limit position (step S2212), and turns it on in step S2203. The set stopper moving down flag is set to off (step S2213). As a result, the game ball retention unit 38 is returned to a state in which the game ball 99 can be retained in the retention lane 381.

<Step S2214>
In step S2214, the MPU 51 executes a 7-segment display unit control process for controlling the on / off state of the 7-segment display unit 39. That is, for each jackpot game, in the ending of the jackpot game after a lapse of a specific period, the MPU 51 corresponds to the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device during the opening / closing execution mode of the jackpot game. Then, the 7-segment display unit control process for controlling the turning on and off of the 7-segment display unit 39 is executed. The details of the 7-segment display unit control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 41 to 45.

<Step S2215>
In step S2215, the MPU 51 executes an ending additional image control process for displaying the additional image corresponding to the point-off state of the 7-segment display unit 39 on the symbol display unit 341 at the ending of the jackpot game. By this ending additional image control processing, it becomes possible to confirm the on-off state of the 7-segment display unit 39 also on the symbol display unit 341. The details of the 7-segment display unit control process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 46 and 47.

<Step S2216>
When the flag for moving down the stopper portion is off (step S2206: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect end flag is set to on (step S2216). The jackpot game effect end flag is a flag for ending the jackpot game effect, and is set to be turned on in step S2118 in the command determination process of FIG. 37. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing when the jackpot game effect (ending effect) is ended by the jackpot game effect end flag. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2217 when the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), and when the jackpot game effect end flag is off (step S2216: No), the setting is made. The value suggestion processing ends.

<Step S2217>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S2216: Yes), the MPU 51 turns off the lit segments A to G on the 7-segment display unit 39 (step S2217). That is, the MPU 51 puts all the segments A to G off in the 7-segment display unit 39 when the jackpot game effect is completed. In other words, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 can be turned on only during the ending of the jackpot game.

Here, in the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39, a game set value (non-set value) other than the game set value (set value) that defines the probability that the lottery result in the big hit lottery on the game machine 10 will be a big hit. All or part of the numbers corresponding to the set value) are displayed. Therefore, each time the jackpot game is executed, the player can obtain information for specifying or estimating a non-set value in the ending of the jackpot game. As a result, the player can specify or estimate the non-set value each time the jackpot game is executed, so that the player can enjoy the identification or estimation of the non-set value in the jackpot game. In addition, by obtaining information that can specify or estimate non-set values for each jackpot game, if the number of jackpot games increases, for example, if the number of jackpot consecutive villas increases, all (5) non-set values can be grasped. In that case, it is possible to grasp the set value. That is, since the player can grasp the set value based on the specified non-set value, the set value can be estimated in the jackpot game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

<Steps S2218 and S2219>
In step S2218, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot game effect end flag to off (step S2218). Further, the MPU 51 sets the jackpot type flag (5R probability variation jackpot flag, 16R probability variation jackpot flag, or 5R normal jackpot flag) to off (step S2219), and ends the set value suggestion effect.

[7-segment display control process]
Here, FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment display unit control process executed in step S2214 of the set value suggestion process of FIG. 40.

<Step S2301 and Step S2302>
As shown in FIG. 41, in the 7-segment display unit control process, the MPU 51 first acquires the value of the special out-ball counter stored in the RAM 512 by being added in step S2208 in the set value suggestion process of FIG. 40. (Step S2301), it is determined whether or not the value of this special out-ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302). The value of the special out ball counter is the number of special out balls that have won the variable winning opening 316 and entered the special out ball opening 373 of the crune device 37 in the jackpot opening / closing execution mode. Then, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2303 when the value of the special out-ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302: Yes), and when the value of the special out-ball counter is not 1 or more, that is, 0 (step S2302: Yes). Step S2302: No), since it is not necessary to turn on any of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39, the 7-segment display unit control process is terminated.

<Steps S2303 to S2307>
In step S2303, the MPU 51 reads the segment display unit control information from the 7-segment display unit control information storage area (see FIG. 42 (A)) set in the RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5 (step S2303). The segment display unit control information is information necessary for controlling the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period (a period in which the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 is accumulated). .. Then, the MPU 51 controls the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the value of the special out-ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display unit control information read from the 7-segment display unit control information storage area in step S2303. Is determined (step S2304), and the control of the 7-segment display unit 39 is executed based on this control content (step S2305). The details of the determination and control of the control contents for the 7-segment display unit 39 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 42 to 45. Further, the MPU 51 updates the already displayed information storage area (see FIG. 42 (A)) of the 7-segment display unit control information stored in the RAM 512 (step S2306), and clears the value of the special out-ball counter. (Step S2307), the 7-segment display unit control process is terminated.

Here, FIG. 42 is a diagram for explaining a 7-segment display unit control information storage area set in the RAM 512 of the voice lamp control device 5. Specifically, FIG. 42 (A) is a diagram showing an example of a 7-segment display unit control information storage area, and FIG. 42 (B) shows an example of a control order storage area of the 7-segment display unit control information storage area. FIG. 42 (C) is a diagram showing an example (not updated) of the initial state of the already displayed information storage area of the 7-segment display unit control information storage area.

As shown in FIG. 42 (A), the 7-segment display unit control information storage area includes the control sequence storage area shown in FIG. 42 (B) and the already displayed information storage area shown in FIG. 42 (C).

As shown in FIG. 42 (B), the control sequence storage area is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 during a predetermined period (a period during which the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 is accumulated). This area stores the order of the numbers to be displayed and the control target order of the segments A to G when displaying each number. This control sequence storage area includes a number display sequence storage area and a segment control sequence storage area.

The number display order storage area is the 7-segment display unit 39 during the period from the end of the predetermined period (for example, from the start of the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the open / close execution mode of the jackpot game for the normal jackpot). The order of the numbers to be displayed (number display order) is memorized. The number display order is based on the number display order determination table (see FIG. 36) set for a set value that defines the probability that the lottery result in the jackpot lottery will be a jackpot, and the display order setting process of FIG. 35 described above. Determined in. In the number display order storage area of the example shown in FIG. 42 (B), the display order A1 is set based on the number display order determination table in the case of the set value 1 in the above-mentioned number display order setting process, and 7 in a predetermined period. "2"-> "3"-> "4"-> "5"-> "6" is stored as the display order of the numbers on the segment display unit 39. That is, unless the setting is changed during the opening of the game hall, the number display order is fixed for each business day, and the number display order for the predetermined period during the same business day is fixed. .. In this way, by fixing the number display order in the predetermined period on the business day, the numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the same order each time the predetermined period is started. Numbers with an early number display order are easy to display, and numbers with a late number display order are difficult to display. For example, when the number display order is "2"-> "3"-> "4"-> "5"-> "6", the numbers are displayed in this order, so that "2" and "3" are easily displayed. On the other hand, it is difficult to display "5" and "6". This makes it possible to guess and specify the set value, prevent the set value from being easily specified, and enjoy guessing and specifying the set value. In addition, since the number display order is fixed during the business day, numbers with an early number display order are easily displayed, and numbers with a late number display order are difficult to be displayed. For example, when the set value is set low. (When the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is low), it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing the low setting with a small number of first hits. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from terminating the game on the gaming machine 10 during the game at an early stage, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10.

Further, it is expected that the 7-segment display unit 39 displays more numbers as the number of times of the specific period in the predetermined period increases (the number of jackpot consecutive villas increases). Therefore, as the number of jackpot consecutive villas increases, the number of non-set values that can identify a plurality of non-set values other than the set values also increases. As a result, as the number of jackpot consecutive villas increases, a lot of information for specifying the non-set value can be obtained, so that the candidates for the set value can be narrowed down. Then, the player can identify all the non-set values by inserting 35 or more game balls 99 into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 in a predetermined period, and as a result, recognizes the set values. Will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game while aiming to identify all the non-set values, that is, to recognize the set values, and whether the jackpot consecutive villa will continue (the jackpot type is a probable change jackpot). You can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to (whether it is a big hit or a normal jackpot), and the interest of the game is improved.

The number display order is not limited to the case where the number is fixed to the one set when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on or the setting is changed, and when the jackpot game for the jackpot (first hit) in the low probability mode is started, etc. It may be decided to. In this way, the number display order is determined when the big hit game such as the first hit is started, so that the number display order is determined, for example, at predetermined period intervals. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to guess the number display order, so that the variation in the order of the numbers corresponding to the non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is reduced. Therefore, it is possible to specify all the non-set values with a small number of initial hits, and it is possible to recognize the set values at an early stage. As a result, the player is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past for the purpose of identifying all the non-set values and recognizing the set values. You can enjoy the progress of the game while expecting that no numbers will be displayed.

On the other hand, the segment control order storage area stores the control order (segment control order) of the segments A to G when displaying numbers on the 7-segment display unit 39. The segment control order is fixed as segment A → segment B → segment C → segment D → segment E → segment F → segment G. That is, the segment control order is not determined when the power is turned on to the gaming machine 10, the setting is changed, the jackpot is won, or the like, but is fixed as an order unique to the gaming machine 10. In this way, by fixing the segment control order as an order peculiar to the gaming machine 10, the player controls the segments A to G when the numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. It becomes possible to grasp the order. As a result, the player can grasp the number to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 even before the number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, the player can guess and enjoy the numbers that have never been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 based on the control order of the segments A to G, so that the interest of the game is improved.

As with the number display order, the segment control order is fixed during the same business day by determining when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on or when the set value is changed, while it is determined for each business day. It is also possible to do so. In this case, it becomes more difficult to grasp the numbers that have never been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, as compared with the case where the segment control order is fixed as the order peculiar to the gaming machine 10. This increases the difficulty of identifying all non-set values and recognizing the set values. For example, when the set values are set low (when the jackpot probability in the low probability mode is low). , It is possible to prevent the player from early recognition of the low setting. This prevents the player from prematurely ending the game on the gaming machine 10 during the game.

Further, the segment control order is determined when a jackpot game for a jackpot in the low probability mode is started (when a predetermined period is started), as will be described in the third embodiment described later. May be good.

As shown in FIG. 42 (C), the displayed information storage area stores the numbers already displayed by the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period, the numbers being displayed, and the information related to the segments A to G already controlled. The area. This displayed information storage area stores the displayed number flag information, the displayed number flag information, and the displayed segment flag information.

The displayed number flag information is information related to a flag indicating whether or not the number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period. The displayed number flag information includes the number 1 already displayed flag, the number 2 already displayed flag, the number 3 already displayed flag, the number 4 already displayed flag, the number 5 already displayed flag, and the number 6 already displayed flag. The number 1 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 1 corresponding to the game set value 1 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. This number 1 already displayed flag indicates that the number 1 has been displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period when it is set to on, and when it is set to off, it displays 7 segments in a predetermined period. It is shown that the number 1 is not displayed in the part 39. The number 2 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 2 corresponding to the game set value 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. This number 2 already displayed flag indicates that the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period when it is set to on, and 7-segment display in a predetermined period when it is set to off. It is shown that the number 2 is not displayed in the part 39. The number 3 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 3 corresponding to the game set value 3 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. This number 3 already displayed flag indicates that the number 3 was displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the predetermined period when it was set to on, and when it was set to off, the 7-segment display was displayed in the predetermined period. It is shown that the number 3 is not displayed in the part 39. The number 4 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 4 corresponding to the game set value 4 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. This number 4 already displayed flag indicates that the number 4 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period when it is set to on, and 7-segment display in a predetermined period when it is set to off. It is shown that the number 4 is not displayed in the part 39. The number 5 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 5 corresponding to the game set value 5 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. This number 5 already displayed flag indicates that the number 5 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period when it is set to on, and 7-segment display in a predetermined period when it is set to off. It is shown that the number 5 is not displayed in the part 39. The number 6 already displayed flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 6 corresponding to the game set value 6 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. This number 6 already displayed flag indicates that the number 6 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period when it is set to on, and 7-segment display in a predetermined period when it is set to off. It is shown that the number 6 is not displayed in the part 39.

The display target number flag information is a flag indicating whether or not the display target number is a number to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period. The display target number flag information includes a number 1 display target flag, a number 2 display target flag, a number 3 display target flag, a number 4 display target flag, a number 5 display target flag, and a number 6 display target flag. The number 1 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 1 corresponding to the game set value 1 is to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. This number 1 display target flag indicates that the number 1 is the display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 when it is set to on, and the number 1 displays 7 segments when it is set to off. Indicates that the display target is not displayed in the unit 39. The number 2 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 2 corresponding to the game set value 2 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. This number 2 display target flag indicates that the number 2 is the display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 when it is set to on, and the number 2 displays 7 segments when it is set to off. Indicates that the display target is not displayed in the unit 39. The number 3 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 3 corresponding to the game set value 3 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. This number 3 display target flag indicates that the number 3 is the display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 when it is set to on, and the number 3 displays 7 segments when it is set to off. Indicates that the display target is not displayed in the unit 39. The number 4 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 4 corresponding to the game set value 4 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. This number 4 display target flag indicates that the number 4 is the display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 when it is set to on, and the number 4 displays 7 segments when it is set to off. Indicates that the display target is not displayed in the unit 39. The number 5 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 5 corresponding to the game set value 5 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. This number 5 display target flag indicates that the number 5 is the display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 when it is set to on, and the number 5 is a 7-segment display when it is set to off. Indicates that the display target is not displayed in the unit 39. The number 6 display target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the number 6 corresponding to the game set value 6 is a target to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as a non-set value in a predetermined period. This number 6 display target flag indicates that the number 6 is the display target on the 7-segment display unit 39 when it is set to on, and the number 6 displays 7 segments when it is set to off. Indicates that the display target is not displayed in the unit 39.

The existing target segment flag information is a flag indicating whether or not each of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 is the control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in the predetermined period. The existing target segment flag information includes segment A already targeted flag, segment B already targeted flag, segment C already targeted flag, segment D already targeted flag, segment E already targeted flag, segment F already targeted flag, and segment G already targeted flag. including. The segment A existing target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment A of the 7-segment display unit 39 is the control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. This segment A existing target flag indicates that segment A has become a control target in the display control of the number to be displayed in a predetermined period when it is set to on, and segment A when it is set to off. Indicates that is not the control target. The segment B existing target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment B of the 7-segment display unit 39 is the control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in the predetermined period. This segment B existing target flag indicates that segment B has become a control target in the display control of the number to be displayed in a predetermined period when it is set to on, and segment B when it is set to off. Indicates that is not the control target. The segment C existing target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment C of the 7-segment display unit 39 is the control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in the predetermined period. This segment C existing target flag indicates that the segment C has become the control target in the display control of the number to be displayed in the predetermined period when it is set to on, and the segment C when it is set to off. Indicates that is not the control target. The segment D existing target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment D of the 7-segment display unit 39 is the control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in the predetermined period. This segment D existing target flag indicates that the segment D has become the control target in the display control of the number to be displayed in the predetermined period when it is set to on, and the segment D when it is set to off. Indicates that is not the control target. The segment E existing target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment E of the 7-segment display unit 39 is the control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in the predetermined period. This segment E target flag indicates that the segment E has become the control target in the display control of the number to be displayed in the predetermined period when it is set to on, and the segment E when it is set to off. Indicates that is not the control target. The segment F existing target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment F of the 7-segment display unit 39 is the control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. This segment F existing target flag indicates that the segment F has become the control target in the display control of the number to be displayed in the predetermined period when it is set to on, and the segment F when it is set to off. Indicates that is not the control target. The segment G existing target flag is a flag indicating whether or not the segment G of the 7-segment display unit 39 is the control target for turning on and off in the display control of the numbers to be displayed in a predetermined period. This segment G existing target flag indicates that the segment G has become the control target in the display control of the number to be displayed in the predetermined period when it is set to on, and when it is set to off, the segment G Indicates that is not the control target.

In the initial state of the already displayed information storage area, all the flags included in the already displayed number flag information, the display target number flag information, and the already displayed segment flag information are set to off. Here, the initial state is the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 at the start of the jackpot game for the state outside the predetermined period, that is, the jackpot (first jackpot) in the low probability mode. Indicates the state at the beginning of a predetermined period in which is accumulated. In the present embodiment, all the flags included in the already displayed information storage area are set when the jackpot type is 5R normal jackpot in step S2405 in the ending additional image control process of FIG. 46 described later (step S2404: Yes). That is, it is set off (cleared) when it is a normal jackpot with the end of a predetermined period set.

Here, FIGS. 43 to 45 are diagrams showing a control example (display example) of the 7-segment display unit 39 of the 7-segment display unit control information storage area and an update example of the already displayed information storage area. Hereinafter, an example of updating the already displayed information storage area of the 7-segment display unit control information storage area will be described together with a control example (display example) of the 7-segment display unit 39 with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45.

As described above, in the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. 41, the control content of the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined (step S2304), and the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled in the ending of the jackpot game according to the control content. (Step S2305). After that, each flag information stored in the displayed information storage area is updated (step S2306).

The control content of the 7-segment display unit 39 is the value of the special out-ball counter acquired in step S2301 of the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. It is determined according to the number of game balls 99 that have entered 373). For example, when the displayed information storage area is in the initial state (see FIG. 42C) and the value of the special out-ball counter is less than 7, the seven segments A to G of the seven-segment display unit 39 Some of these segments are subject to on / off control. Specifically, for example, assuming that the value of the special out ball counter is 5 (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 during a specific period is 5), the control order storage area When the content is in the state shown in FIG. 42 (B) and the displayed information storage area is in the initial state shown in FIG. 42 (C) (when all flags are set to off), the 7-segment display unit 39 The five segments A to E are controlled to be turned on and off. When the content of the control order storage area is in the state shown in FIG. 42 (B), since the number 2 is displayed first, the segment A is set to the lit state and the segment B is set to the lit state. The segment C is turned off, the segment D is turned on, and the segment E is turned on. Therefore, in the 7-segment display unit 39, the segments A, B, and segments shown in FIG. 43 (B) are changed from the all-off state (non-control state) in which all the segments A to G shown in FIG. 43 (A) are turned off. D and segment E are changed to the lit partial control state.

The change from the non-control state shown in FIG. 43 (A) to the partial control state shown in FIG. 43 (B) may be performed at once, or the segments A to E are sequentially controlled and the segments A to E are controlled. May be carried out step by step by turning on or off. Further, when the segments A to E are sequentially turned on or off as control targets, the segments A to E to be controlled may be blinked to clearly indicate that they are control targets. Of course, the segment to be controlled does not necessarily have to be specified.

On the other hand, when the control of the 7-segment display unit 39 is finished, the already displayed information storage area is updated. For example, when the 7-segment display unit 39 is changed from the non-control state shown in FIG. 43 (A) to the partial control state shown in FIG. 43 (B), the displayed information storage area is shown in FIG. 42 (C). The initial state in which all the flags are set to off is updated to the content shown in FIG. 43 (C). Specifically, in the display state shown in FIG. 43B, five segments A to E of the segments A to G are controlled with respect to the number 2 first displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. The segments F and G are not controlled. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 43 (C), since none of the numbers 1 to 6 is displayed in the displayed number flag information, the number 1 already displayed flag, the number 2 already displayed flag, and the number 3 already displayed flag are not displayed. , Number 4 already displayed flag, number 5 already displayed flag, and number 6 already displayed flag are all kept off. Further, in the displayed number flag information, the displayed number 2 flag for the number 2 whose five segments A to E are controlled is set to on. Further, in the already displayed segment flag information, since the segments A to E are the control targets, the segment A already targeted flag, the segment B already targeted flag, the segment C already targeted flag, and the segment D already targeted flag for the segments A to E are controlled. , And the segment E already targeted flag is set to on.

Further, when the already displayed information storage area is in the initial state (see FIG. 42C), the value of the special out-ball counter acquired in step S2301 of the 7-segment display unit control process of FIG. 41 (set to the jackpot game). When the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 during the specific period) exceeds 7, at least one number (for example, 2) is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Specifically, for example, assuming that the value of the special out ball counter is 10 (the number of game balls 99 that entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 during a specific period is 10), the 7-segment display unit 39 In, a total of 10 segments A to G are controlled targets. That is, in the 7-segment display unit 39, the 7 (all) segments A to G are controlled to be turned on and off, so that the numbers in the first display order are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and the second display is further displayed. With respect to the numbers in order, the three segments A to C are subject to control for the second turn-off. Specifically, when the content of the control sequence storage area is in the state shown in FIG. 42 (B) and the displayed information storage area is in the initial state shown in FIG. 42 (C) (all flags are set to off). ), Since the number in the first display order is 2, the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and then the number 3 is displayed. Therefore, in the 7-segment display unit 39, from the uncontrolled state in which all the segments A to G shown in FIG. 44 (A) are turned off, the segments A, B, D, E and G are shown in FIG. 44 (B). Is turned on and segments C and F are turned off, so that the 7-segment display 39 is changed to the all-segment control state in which the number 2 is displayed. Further, in the segment display 39, FIG. 44 (B) The all-segment control state in which the number 2 shown in () is displayed is changed to the partial segment control state in which the segments A to C shown in FIG. 44 (C) are controlled. In the example shown in FIG. 44 (C), since the number displayed second is 3, the segments A to C are lit.

The change from the non-control state shown in FIG. 44 (A) to the all-segment control state shown in FIG. 44 (B), and the part of the all-segment control state shown in FIG. 44 (B) shown in FIG. 44 (C). The change to the segment control state may be performed at once, or may be performed stepwise by turning on or off the segments A to G or the segments A to C in order. Further, when the segments A to G or the segments A to C are turned on or off in order, the segment to be controlled may be blinked to clearly indicate that the control is being performed. Of course, the segment to be controlled does not necessarily have to be specified.

Further, when the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled, the already displayed information storage area is updated. For example, the 7-segment display unit 39 is changed from the non-control state shown in FIG. 44 (A) to the partial segment control state shown in FIG. 44 (C) through the all-segment control state shown in FIG. 44 (B). In the case, the displayed information storage area is finally shown in the figure from the initial state in which all the flags shown in FIG. 42 (C) are set to off, through the contents shown in FIGS. 45 (A) and 45 (B). The content is updated as shown in 45 (C). Specifically, in the state shown in FIG. 44 (B), all the segments A to E of the segments A to G are controlled with respect to the number 2 first displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45 (A), in the already displayed segment flag information, all the already targeted flags for the segments A to G are set to on. Then, when all the existing target flags for the segments A to G are set to on, the control for displaying the number 2 has ended. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 45 (B), the displayed number flag information is a number. 2 The already displayed flag is set to on, and in the displayed number flag information, the displayed number 2 flag is set to off, while the displayed number 3 flag is set to on. After that, in the already displayed segment flag information, all the already targeted flags for the segments A to G are set to off. Further, as shown in FIG. 45 (C), in the displayed segment flag information, the segment A already-targeted flag, the segment B already-targeted flag, and the segment C already-targeted flag for the segments A to C are set to be on. That is, every time all the already-targeted flags of the already-displayed segment flag information are set to on (every time the seven segments A to G are controlled), the displayed number flag information is displayed. The displayed flag for the number is set to on, the display target flag for the number to be displayed in the displayed number flag information is set to off, while the display target flag for the next number to be displayed is turned on. Set.

As described above, the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled according to the value of the special out-ball counter acquired in step S2301 and the 7-segment display unit control information, so that the jackpot lottery on the gaming machine 10 can be performed. All or part of the numbers corresponding to the game set value (non-set value) other than the game set value (set value) that defines the probability that the lottery result will be a big hit are displayed. As a result, the player can specify or estimate the non-set value based on the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39, and as a result, can recognize the set value.

By the way, as the gaming machine, there is a gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, which has a plurality of set values having different jackpot winning probabilities in the jackpot lottery, and the gaming hall side can select the set value. In this case, the game hall wants to set a low set value in order to lower the expected ball output value. When the set value is set low, the set value is not known to the player because the player wants to avoid stopping the game because the player recognizes that the set value is low. There is a tendency to want to be a gaming machine.

On the other hand, the player can guess (narrow down to a plurality of set values) or recognize the set value for the gaming machine having the set value in order to play the game on the gaming machine 10 having a higher expected value of the ball output. I hope for a good playability. As described above, the game hall and the player tend to desire to conflict with each other with respect to the game machine that suggests or clearly indicates the game set value.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, among the game balls 99 that have won the variable winning opening 316 in a specific period from the start of the jackpot game of the first hit to the end of the open / close execution mode of the normal jackpot, the special croon device 37 The game ball (special out ball) that has entered the out ball mouth 373 is retained in the retention lane 381 of the game ball retention portion 38. Then, the number of game balls 99 (special out balls) stayed in the staying lane 381 after the elapse of a specific period is counted, and the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are controlled by the number corresponding to the count number. do. That is, unless at least the lottery result in the jackpot lottery becomes a jackpot and shifts to the jackpot game, the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are neither controlled nor turned on. Therefore, the set value is not guessed or recognized unless the game is shifted to the jackpot game.

Further, it is difficult for the game ball 99 to enter the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37, for example, one or two balls for one 16R jackpot game (about one ball for 10R of the round game). It is expected that the game ball 99 will enter. Therefore, it is difficult to specify or estimate the non-set value by the 7-segment display unit 39 in one big hit. On the other hand, the 7-segment display unit 39 starts the jackpot game (opening) executed when the lottery result in the low probability mode becomes a jackpot, and then ends the opening / closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game (ending). It is controlled according to the cumulative total of the game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 in a predetermined period until the start). In other words, if the first hit is a probabilistic jackpot, the predetermined period will not end as long as the jackpot consecutive villa in the high probability mode continues, and the opening and closing of the normal jackpot game when the normal jackpot is won will be executed. It continues until the mode ends. That is, in the present embodiment, while the non-set value and thus the set value are not easy to recognize, the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 keeps the jackpot consecutive villa in the high probability mode. When many game balls 99 are expected to enter, the non-set value (set value) can be estimated more accurately, and 35 or more game balls 99 are entered into the special out ball mouth 373 in a predetermined period. The non-set value (set value) can be reliably specified. Therefore, in the game machine 10, the information that can estimate the set value according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period, that is, the number of game balls that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 in the predetermined period is available. It is displayed, and since the expected value of the number of balls 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 373 is low in the single-shot jackpot, it has a game property in which it is difficult to guess or recognize the non-set value (set value). On the other hand, in the case of a big hit consecutive villa, it is difficult to guess or recognize the non-set value (set value) when the number of consecutive villas is small, but as the number of consecutive villas increases, a game ball to the special out ball mouth 373. Since the expected value of the number of balls entered in 99 is high, the game has a playability in which the difficulty of estimating the non-set value (set value) is reduced. That is, in the present embodiment, the set value can be estimated by specifying or estimating a part or all of the plurality of non-set values by stacking all or a part of the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. be. In this way, in the gaming machine 10, the set value is suppressed from being easily specified or guessed (narrowed down), so that the non-set value (set value) is more accurate by the jackpot villa while meeting the store's wishes. By making it possible to guess, it is possible to meet the wishes of the player. As a result, the gaming machine 10 that meets the wishes of both the store side and the player side is provided.

By the way, in a conventional slot machine, an image suggesting or clearly indicating a set value may be displayed on a display device such as a liquid crystal display device on which a game effect is executed. Images that suggest or clearly indicate the set value are displayed on, for example, the jackpot confirmation screen, jackpot start screen, jackpot end screen, start screen such as ART and AT, continuation screen, and end screen, and the content of the displayed image is determined by lottery. Will be done. Specifically, in an image display unit such as a liquid crystal display device, as a jackpot game end screen or the like, in addition to a default screen that does not suggest or specify a set value, there is a certain probability that the value is equal to or higher than a specific set value (for example, an intermediate setting). Value (set value 4 to 6 or more), high set value (for example, set value 5 or 6), odd set value (for example, set value 1, 3 or 5), even set value (for example, set value 1, 3 or 5) For example, a screen is presented that suggests or clearly indicates that the set value is 2, 4 or 6), that it is not a specific set value (for example, the negation of the set value 1), or that it is the highest set value (for example, the set value 6). ..

However, in the suggestion or explicit setting value in the conventional slot machine, the probability that the default screen that suggests or does not specify the setting value is presented is set so that the setting value is not easily specified or guessed, and the setting value is set. The probability that a suggestion or explicit screen will be presented is set low. In particular, the probability that the suggestion or clarification of the set value for the set value that is advantageous to the player or the clarification that the set value is a specific set value is executed is set low. Further, the suggestion that the set value is an odd number or an even number tends to have a low reliability, and for example, the reliability is often set to about 60%. Furthermore, in slot machines, although it may suggest or specify a high setting value, no suggestion or specification denying that it is a high setting value (for example, setting value 5 or 6) is executed, and it is particularly the highest. No suggestion or clarification to deny that it is a set value (for example, set value 6) is executed. That is, in the slot machine, the presentation of information disadvantageous to the player that denies the high setting value is not executed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is set according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period as described above, that is, the number of game balls that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 in the predetermined period. Information (non-set value) whose value can be estimated is displayed as a number on the 7-segment display unit 39. That is, by displaying the numbers of the non-set values one by one on the 7-segment display unit 39, the set values can be estimated because a part of the non-set values can be specified or estimated, and all the non-set values can be estimated. Since all the non-set values can be recognized by displaying the numbers, it is possible to specify the set values.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the number displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is fundamentally different from the suggestion or clarification of the set value at a fixed ratio as used in a gaming machine such as a slot machine. The set value can be recognized by specifying a plurality of non-set values based on. Further, in the present embodiment, a non-set value (set value) is clearly specified depending on the number of specific conditions (entering the game ball 99 into the special out ball mouth 373) satisfied during the jackpot game in a predetermined period. Or, it is suggested, and in this respect as well, it is different from the conventional gaming machine in which the suggestion or clarification of the set value is executed at a constant rate. Further, in the present embodiment, as the number of jackpot consecutive villas increases, the difficulty of identifying or guessing a part or all of a plurality of non-set values decreases, and in that game machine such as a conventional slot machine It is different from the suggestion or explicit setting value of.

Then, in the present embodiment, numerical information indicating a plurality of non-set values depending on the number of specific conditions (entering the game ball 99 into the special out ball mouth 373) satisfied during the jackpot game in a predetermined period. Is presented, unlike conventional gaming machines, the frequency with which information for specifying the set value is presented does not decrease, and as long as the predetermined period continues (the jackpot consecutive villa continues). (As long as), since the presentation of information for identifying the non-set value (set value) is continued, it is possible to further enjoy guessing the set value, and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the specific conditions are satisfied by the number of non-set values in a predetermined period, all the non-set values can be specified. In other words, regardless of whether the non-set value is high or low, all the non-set values are presented to the player, including information that is disadvantageous to the player. As described above, in the present embodiment, unlike the case where the set value is suggested or specified in the conventional slot machine, even the information disadvantageous to the player is presented so as to deny the maximum set value or the like. As a result, the player can obtain not only advantageous information but also disadvantageous information as information for specifying or estimating the set value, and therefore, the player continues the game on the gaming machine 10 based on the disadvantageous information. It is possible to judge whether or not. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is conceivable to set the number display order so that the number display order in which the display order of the numbers corresponding to the high set value (for example, the set value 5 or more) is delayed can be easily selected. On the contrary, it is conceivable to set the number display order so that the number display order in which the display order of the numbers corresponding to the low set value (for example, the set value 2 or less) is earlier can be easily selected. In this way, the display order of the numbers corresponding to the low setting value is early, and the display order of the numbers corresponding to the high setting value is delayed, so that the higher setting value is displayed later. As a result, the player can expect the player to have a high setting value that is advantageous to the player until just before the player grasps the set value. Therefore, the non-set value is expected to be high. You can guess (set value) and enjoy it.

[Ending additional image control processing]
Here, FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the ending addition image control process executed in step S2215 in the set value suggestion process of FIG. 40.

<Steps S2401 to S2403>
As shown in FIG. 46, in the ending additional image control process, the MPU 51 is updated in step S2401 with various information of the already displayed information storage area updated in step S2306 of FIG. 41, that is, with the lapse of the current specific period. The displayed number flag information, the displayed number flag information, and the displayed segment flag information are read out, and an additional image to be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 at the ending of the jackpot game is determined based on these information (step S2402). Here, the additional image is an image showing the display content of the 7-segment display unit 39, and is an image in which a non-set value can be specified or inferred (FIGS. 47 (B1), 47 (B2), and 47 (C). )reference). Then, the MPU 51 transmits an additional image display command for displaying the additional image determined in step S2402 on the symbol display unit 341 in the ending effect to the display control device 6. As a result, the symbol display unit 341 displays an additional image on the symbol display unit 341 as an ending effect.

Here, FIG. 47 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition in the ending effect of the jackpot game. Specifically, FIG. 47 (A1) is a screen example of the symbol display unit 341 in the first half of the ending in the probabilistic jackpot game, and FIG. 47 (A2) is the screen of the symbol display unit 341 in the first half of the ending in the normal jackpot game. This is an example. Further, FIGS. 47 (B1), 47 (B2), and 47 (C) are screen examples (set value suggestion screen examples) of the symbol display unit 341 in the latter half of the ending.

As shown in FIG. 47 (A1), in the ending in the probabilistic jackpot game, it is clearly shown on the symbol display unit 341 that the symbol display unit 341 shifts to the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode after the end of the probabilistic jackpot game as the first half part of the ending effect. The image to be displayed is displayed. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 47 (B1), in the ending in the normal jackpot game, the symbol display unit 341 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as the first half part of the ending effect in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode (time saving mode) after the end of the normal jackpot game. An image is displayed that clearly indicates the transition to. In the first half of the ending effect, in addition to the image that clearly shows the game mode that shifts after the end of the jackpot game, an image that clearly shows the number of jackpot consecutive villas and the number of balls to be played is displayed.

On the other hand, in the latter half of the ending effect of the jackpot game, the image including the additional image determined in step S2402 of the ending additional image control process of FIG. 46 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as a result of the crune game using the crune device 37. Is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 47 (B1), 47 (B2), and 47 (C), the additional image shows the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one predetermined period. Includes five set value suggestion images that imitate the seven-segment display unit 39 on which numbers corresponding to non-set values can be displayed. Specifically, when the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in FIG. 43 (A) to the display state shown in FIG. 43 (B), the 7-segment display unit 39 is shown in FIG. 47 (B1). An additional image including an image imitating the display state in is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as the latter half part of the ending effect. Further, when the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled from the initial state shown in FIG. 43 (A) to the display state shown in FIG. 44 (C) via FIG. 44 (B), as shown in FIG. 47 (B2), FIG. An additional image including the set value suggestion image imitating the display state shown in 44 (B) and the set value suggestion image imitating the display state shown in FIG. 44 (C) is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as the latter half part of the ending effect. Is displayed. Further, when all five numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by the end of the predetermined period, each number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as shown in FIG. 47 (C). An additional image including a set value suggestion image imitating the displayed state is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as the latter half part of the ending effect. In the example shown in FIG. 47 (C), an image showing that the numbers "2" to "6" other than the number "1" are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is displayed. In this case, it is possible to identify that the non-set value is "2" to "6", and as a result, it is possible to recognize that the set value is "1".

In this way, in the ending effect of the jackpot game, as the latter half part, the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one predetermined period includes five setting value suggestion images that imitate the 7-segment display unit 39. It is displayed as an image. Therefore, the player can confirm the information regarding the non-set value displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by the jackpot game at the ending of each jackpot game. As a result, when it is not possible to know that the information related to the non-set value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, when the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 is overlooked, or when the past 7-segment display unit in the predetermined period is displayed. Even if the display content on the 39 is forgotten, the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be recognized again. Therefore, the player can specify or estimate the non-set value in the ending and recognize or estimate the set value based on the additional image showing the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 for each jackpot game.

As the ending effect of the jackpot game, it is a design matter whether or not to display the additional image showing the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one predetermined period on the symbol display unit 341, and the ending effect. It is also conceivable that the additional image is not displayed on the symbol display unit 341. When the additional image is not displayed in the ending effect in this way, if there is a number displayed in the past in a predetermined period and the number is not stored or recorded, it is first displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. It becomes difficult to identify or estimate the non-set value based on the set number, and eventually to estimate or recognize the set value. That is, by not displaying the additional image in the ending effect, the difficulty of specifying or estimating the non-set value (set value) is increased, so that the set value of the gaming machine 10 is recognized at an early stage, and at least the set value is not high. Can be prevented from being recognized. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game of the gaming machine 10 from being terminated early, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine 10.

<Step S2404>
Returning to the description of FIG. 46, in step S2404, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot type that triggered the execution of the jackpot game is a 5R normal jackpot. Whether or not the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot can be determined based on whether or not the 5R normal jackpot flag, which can be set to be on in step S2103 of FIG. 37, is on. Then, when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2305, and when the jackpot type is not a 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: No), the ending additional image control process. To finish.

<Step S2405>
When the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S2404: Yes), the MPU 51 initializes the already displayed information storage area (sets all flags to off) and ends the ending additional image control process. That is, when the jackpot is a 5R normal jackpot for which the end of a predetermined period is set, the MPU 51 initializes the displayed information storage area.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the non-set value (set value) can be specified or estimated, but the non-set value (set value) can be specified or the accuracy of estimation can be improved in a predetermined period. It is necessary to insert more game balls 99 into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37, and the hurdle until the non-set value (set value) is specified is high. Therefore, the game hall has an advantage that the set value is not easily known to the player. On the other hand, the player has an advantage that the set value can be specified or estimated. In addition, it is possible to specify or estimate the set value by winning the jackpot lottery, and the accuracy of estimating the set value will be improved by the continuation of the probabilistic jackpot (big hit consecutive villa), and in some cases, the set value will be increased. It is possible to give the gaming machine 10 the game property of being recognizable. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game while meeting the wishes of both the game hall and the player.

Further, when the jackpot game is started, the game is not ended in the middle of the jackpot game unless there are special circumstances, and the game is not ended in the high probability mode in the high probability mode. Therefore, since the predetermined period is the period from the start of the jackpot game of the first hit to the end of the open / close execution mode of the normal jackpot, it is possible to prevent the player from ending the game before the predetermined period ends. As a result, even when a player who does not know the timing (end of a predetermined period) at which the non-set value (set value) can be specified or can be estimated proceeds with the game, the non-set value (set value) is specified or It is prevented from ending the game just before it becomes possible to guess. Therefore, even a player who cannot know the timing at which the non-set value (set value) can be specified or can be guessed can guess or recognize the non-set value (set value). In addition, it is possible to eliminate the so-called hyena act of another player who plays the game aiming at the timing when the non-set value (set value) can be specified or guessed.

In addition, since the start of the predetermined period is the start time of the jackpot game triggered by the jackpot winning in the low probability mode of the first hit, the non-set value (set value) is specified or guessed at least once. Not only is the jackpot winning condition a condition, but even if a predetermined period is started, the hurdle to identify the non-set value (set value) is high as described above, so the non-set value (set value) A considerable number of game balls 99 will be fired at the game board 31 until a considerable number of game balls 99 are guessed or specified, and a considerable number of jackpot lottery will be received. Therefore, at the stage where the set value can be estimated or specified with high accuracy, it is highly possible that the number of unit jackpot lottery (easiness of receiving the jackpot lottery) has reached a stage where it can be sufficiently determined. As a result, when the player can infer or specify the non-set value (set value) with high accuracy, the gaming machine 10 during the game includes not only the non-set value (set value) but also the number of unit jackpot lottery. Since it is possible to determine the ball ejection performance of the ball, it is possible to determine whether to continue the game. For example, even if the set value is low, if the number of unit jackpot lottery is large, it is possible to determine that the game will be continued in consideration of the overall situation. On the other hand, even when the set value is high, if the number of unit jackpot lottery is small, it is possible to judge that the continuation of the game is abandoned in consideration of the whole.

Further, in the gaming machine 10, information for specifying or estimating a non-set value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, and the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 in a predetermined period is a symbol in the ending of the jackpot game. It is displayed on the display unit 341. Therefore, the player can confirm the information regarding the non-set value displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by the jackpot game at the ending of each jackpot game. As a result, when it is not possible to know that the information related to the non-set value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, when the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 is overlooked, or when the past 7-segment display unit in the predetermined period is displayed. Even if the display content on the 39 is forgotten, the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be recognized again. Therefore, for each jackpot game, the player specifies or estimates the non-set value in the ending based on the additional image showing the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39, and recognizes or estimates the set value to proceed with the game. You can enjoy it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the predetermined period is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 at the ending of the jackpot game, but the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the predetermined period is the same. It may be displayed on a display unit such as a symbol display unit 341 after the end of the jackpot game in which the end of a predetermined period is set. That is, the display history in a predetermined period may be displayable in a special period other than the specified period. For example, in the standby state in which neither the variable game nor the jackpot game is executed, the player performs a predetermined operation on the game machine 10 to display the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 for a predetermined period on the display unit such as the symbol display unit 341. It is conceivable to display. In this way, by displaying the display history in the predetermined period on the 7-segment display unit 39 on the symbol display unit 341 or the like after the end of the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, the past 7-segment display is displayed. It becomes possible to confirm when the display contents in the part 39 are forgotten. This makes it possible to specify or estimate the non-set value based on the display content on the past 7-segment display unit 39. The display of the display history on the symbol display unit 341 or the like in the standby state or the like will be described in detail in the fourth embodiment described later.

In this way, when the display history can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 or the like in the standby state or the like, it is possible to check the display contents on the past 7-segment display unit 39 when the display contents are forgotten. There are advantages. On the other hand, if the display history can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 or the like in the standby state or the like, anyone can check the display history by performing a predetermined operation on the vacant gaming machine 10. Can be done. That is, it becomes possible to specify or infer a non-set value (set value) by taking advantage of the privilege obtained by another person, and so-called hyena act is allowed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is not allowed to confirm the display history of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the predetermined period after the end of the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. That is, the display of the specific information indicating the non-set value including the display history in the predetermined period is restricted to the period other than the specified period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to eliminate the hyena act of specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value) by piggybacking on the privilege obtained by another person.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the first hit is a probabilistic jackpot, a predetermined period is set from the start of the first hit jackpot game to the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot in the high probability mode. The predetermined period may be set one by one for each jackpot regardless of the jackpot type. That is, a predetermined period may be set for each big hit game regardless of the first hit or the consecutive villa hit. In this case, the start time of the jackpot game or the open / close execution mode is started, and the end time of the jackpot game or the open / close execution mode is the end of the predetermined period.

Further, in the present embodiment, the corresponding number of the non-set value is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, instead of or in addition to displaying the number corresponding to the non-set value, the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit. In the case of, the number or alphabet corresponding to the non-set value is displayed on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, and the non-set value is clearly indicated on the symbol display unit 341. The reach effect may be performed. As a non-set value explicit reach effect, when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, for example, it is conceivable to stop and display the decorative symbol with the number of the solo eye corresponding to the non-set value. In this way, when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit, the number corresponding to the non-set value is displayed on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, and the symbol display unit 341 does not. By executing the non-set value explicit reach effect that clearly indicates the set value, not only whether or not the lottery result in the big hit lottery in the variable game is a big hit, but also the player can see the first special symbol display unit 362 in the variable game. Alternatively, the variable game can be enjoyed by paying attention to the numbers stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display unit 363 and paying attention to the combination of the decorative symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit 341. In addition, when the non-set value explicit reach effect is executed as one of the reach effects, the numbers are not aligned with doublet in the reach of the decorative pattern of the number corresponding to the set value, and are stopped and displayed as doublet. It is also possible. For example, when the set value is 1, the decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed at "222", "333", "444", "555", and "666", but is not stopped and displayed at "111", and the decorative symbol is not displayed. If is 1, the reach will always be off. In this way, it is usually desirable that the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed with the numbers of the solo eyes because the doublets of the numbers corresponding to the set values are not stopped and displayed. Since it is desirable that the numbers are not stopped and displayed as solo eyes, it is possible to enjoy the reach effect from a different point of view than before.

Further, the display of numbers and the like corresponding to the non-set values on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363, or the non-set value explicit reach effect can be executed only at a specific timing. Is also possible. In this way, by displaying numbers and the like corresponding to the non-set values on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 only at a specific timing, or by executing the non-set value explicit reach effect. You can enjoy the game by focusing on the variable game that is executed at a specific timing.

As a specific timing, for example, in a variable game executed in a probabilistic game state or a time-saving game state, a lottery result in a jackpot lottery is performed on the first special symbol display unit 362 or the second special symbol display unit 363 and the symbol display unit 341. The timing to notify that is a big hit can be considered. By clearly indicating or suggesting a non-set value in the variable game in the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state in this way, the hold is exhausted at high speed by the high-frequency support mode, and the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state that tends to be monotonous. You can enjoy the variable game at. It is also conceivable to set the specific timing when the number of variable games executed after the transition to the probabilistic game state or the time-saving game state is within the predetermined number of times range. For example, the predetermined number of times range is when the number of variable games executed after the transition to the probabilistic game state is small (for example, 1 to 10 times) or when the number of times is large (for example, 100 times or more, 150 times or more, 200 times or more, etc. ) Can be set. That is, the non-set value may be specified or suggested when the jackpot is reached early after the transition to the probabilistic gaming state, or when the variable game count is large until the jackpot is reached. In this case, the non-set value is specified or suggested as a privilege for the early jackpot from the end of the jackpot game or as a relief for the hamari. In addition, the predetermined number of times range is when the number of variable games executed after the transition to the time-saving game state is small (for example, 1 to 10 times), or when the time-saving game state is about to end (for example, 90 to 100 times). It is possible to set it. In this case, the non-set value is specified or suggested as a privilege for the jackpot early from the end of the jackpot game or the jackpot just before the end of the time saving game.

[Other Embodiments]
Hereinafter, other embodiments of the gaming machine 10 according to the present invention will be described. Further, in the following other embodiments, the description of the same configuration as that of the gaming machine 10 described in the first embodiment described above and the same steps as the processing procedure will be omitted. It is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function of the above-mentioned first embodiment and the following other embodiments.

[Second Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, for each jackpot game executed in a predetermined period (the period from the start of the jackpot game for the first jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening / closing execution mode in the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot). A specific period (the period from the start of the jackpot game to the end of the open / close execution mode) is set, and the number of balls that satisfy the specific conditions (the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 within the specific period). In the ending of the jackpot game in which the specific period is set based on (number of), all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to each of the plurality of non-set values (set values) is the 7-segment display unit 39. The case presented in was explained.

By the way, when a specific period is set for each jackpot game executed in a predetermined period as in the first embodiment described above, in the jackpot consecutive villa, a plurality of specific periods corresponding to the number of consecutive villas are predetermined. Set within the period. Therefore, in the jackpot Renso, all or part of the specific information corresponding to the non-set value (set value) is presented to the 7-segment display unit 39 for each ending of the jackpot game. That is, at the jackpot Renso, all or part of the specific information is presented in a plurality of times. However, when all or part of the specific information is presented to the 7-segment display unit 39 for each ending of the jackpot game, that is, when all or part of the specific information is presented in a plurality of times, it is executed first. If the specific information presented at the ending of the jackpot game is not stored or recorded, it is possible to specify the non-set value (set value) based on the specific information presented at the ending of the jackpot game executed earlier. It becomes difficult. That is, when the 7-segment display unit 39 does not accurately store or record the specific information presented in the past, it is difficult to effectively identify or estimate the non-set value (set value). Therefore, in order to effectively identify or estimate the non-set value (set value), it is troublesome to accurately store or record the specific information presented in the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past, and as a result, It is also assumed that the player gives up specifying or guessing the non-set value (set value). In this case, the meaning of improving the fun of the game is buried by being able to specify or guess the non-set value (set value).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, unlike the first embodiment described above, a specific period is not set in the predetermined period, and one for one predetermined period based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Only once, specific information for identifying or inferring a non-set value (set value) is presented. As described above, in the present embodiment, specific information for specifying or estimating a non-set value (set value) only once for each predetermined period based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. Is presented. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the inconvenience when the specific information is presented in a plurality of times in a predetermined period as in the first embodiment described above is eliminated. That is, in the present embodiment, since the specific information is presented only once after the end of the predetermined period for one predetermined period, there is no specific information presented in the past in the predetermined period, and the player There is no specific information to remember or record. As a result, the player can specify or infer the non-set value (set value) by paying attention to the specific information presented only once for one predetermined period. You will be freed from the hassle of accurately storing or recording specific information. Therefore, the player can easily and effectively identify or estimate the non-set value (set value), so that the player can enjoy the game while specifying or estimating the non-set value (set value). The interest is improved.

In one example of the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, the predetermined period is the period from the start of the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode to the end of the opening / closing execution mode of the normal jackpot game for the normal jackpot. , A specific condition is that the game ball is inserted into the special out ball mouth of the crune device. Further, in an example of the present embodiment, the specific information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 as in the first embodiment described above, but the display timing (specified period) of the specific information is set to one predetermined period. On the other hand, it is only the ending (after the end of the predetermined period) in the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. That is, the specific information is presented to the 7-segment display unit 39 only once after the end of the predetermined period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, some steps of the set value suggestion process, the 7-segment display unit control process, and the ending additional image control process are different from those of the first embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the set value suggestion process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 49 is executed by the set value suggestion process of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of 7-segment display part control processing, and FIG. 50 is the flowchart which shows an example of the procedure of the ending addition image control processing executed in the setting value suggestion processing of FIG. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 50, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above.

[Set value suggestion processing]
As shown in FIG. 48, in the set value suggestion process in the present embodiment, when the ending of the jackpot game is started (step S2201: Yes), the set value suggestion process in the first embodiment described above (FIG. 40). (See), on the condition that the jackpot game is a 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of a predetermined period is set (step S2501: Yes), the game ball entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37. A process of controlling the vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 that accepts 99 and counting the number of game balls 99 retained in the game ball retention portion 38 in a predetermined period is executed (steps S2202 to S2213). .. As a result, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined period ends, in the 5R normal jackpot where the end of the predetermined period is set, the game ball 99 that has entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 during the predetermined period. The number of is counted once.

Further, in the set value suggestion processing of the present embodiment, on condition that the 5R normal jackpot game is performed (step S2501: Yes), the vertical movement of the stopper portion 383 of the game ball retention portion 38 is controlled, and the game ball stays in the predetermined period. By executing the process of counting the number of game balls 99 retained in the unit 38 (steps S2202 to S2213), the 7-segment display unit control process (step S2502) and the ending additional image control process (step S2503) are also performed. , Is executed on the condition that it is a 5R normal jackpot game (step S2203) based on the stopper part lowering moving flag set on the condition that it is a 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of a predetermined period is set (step S2203). S2501: Yes).

[7-segment display control process]
The 7-segment display unit control process in the present embodiment is executed when the ending is started in the 5R normal jackpot game as described above (when the opening / closing execution mode (predetermined period) ends). Further, as shown in FIG. 49, the 7-segment display unit control process in the present embodiment is basically the same as the 7-segment display unit control process (see FIG. 41) in the first embodiment described above. When the value of the special out-ball counter is 1 or more (step S2302: Yes), instead of reading the control order of the 7-segment display unit control information and the already displayed information (see FIG. 42), the 7-segment display unit control Reading only the control order of information is executed (step S2504). That is, in the 7-segment display unit control process of the present embodiment, the 7-segment display unit is displayed only at the ending of the 5R normal jackpot (after the end of the predetermined period) in which the end of the predetermined period is set for one predetermined period. Since 39 is controlled (presentation of specific information), it is not necessary to read the already displayed information and control the 7-segment display unit 39.

[Ending additional image control processing]
As shown in FIG. 50, the ending additional image control process in the present embodiment is basically the same as the ending additional image control process (see FIG. 46) of the first embodiment described above, but the first one described above. Step S2404 for the ending additional image control process in the embodiment is omitted. That is, since the ending additional image control process of the present embodiment is executed when the 5R normal jackpot is executed (Yes in step S2501 of the set value suggestion process in FIG. 48), until it is determined that the 5R normal jackpot is achieved. In step S2405, the display information storage area is initialized.

As described above, in the present embodiment, based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period, the specific information (number) corresponding to the non-set value (set value) is used only once for each predetermined period. ) Are presented in whole or in part. Therefore, there is no specific information presented in the past during the predetermined period, and there is no specific information that the player should memorize or record. As a result, the player can specify or infer the non-set value (set value) by paying attention to the specific information presented only once for one predetermined period. You will be freed from the hassle of accurately storing or recording specific information. Therefore, the player can easily and effectively identify or estimate the non-set value (set value), so that the player can enjoy the game while specifying or estimating the non-set value (set value). The interest is improved.

In this embodiment, the same design changes as those in the above-mentioned first embodiment can be made to the extent applicable.

[Third Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, a plurality of non-set values (set values) are specified or estimated after the elapse of the specific period (ending of the jackpot game) based on the number of times the specific conditions are satisfied in the specific period. The case where all or a part of the specific information (numbers) for the purpose is presented on the 7-segment display unit 39 has been described. Further, in the first embodiment described above, in the 7-segment display unit 39, the numbers corresponding to the non-set values as specific information are determined in the number display order when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on or when the set values are changed. The case where the display is performed according to (see FIG. 36) has been described. Further, in the above-described first embodiment, the case where the number display order when the numbers are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is fixed has been described.

By the way, in the first embodiment described above, a plurality of numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values as specific information are displayed in a number display order (FIG. 36) determined when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on or when the set value is changed. When displayed in (see), the numbers are displayed in the same order unless the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned off or the set value is changed, and each number is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39. The control order of segments A to G is fixed. Therefore, when the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined period is less than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding predetermined period, less information can be obtained than the specific information already presented. No new specific information can be obtained. As a result, when it is expected that the number of specific conditions to be satisfied in a predetermined number of times is small, for example, a jackpot game for a single jackpot, whether or not the specific conditions are satisfied in a specific period, or the specific conditions to be satisfied. There is concern that the number of people and the interest in the specific information presented after the lapse of a specific period will decrease.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the order of presenting specific information (number display order and segment display order) is determined (changed). In this way, by determining the order in which specific information is presented when a predetermined condition is satisfied, the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period is larger than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding predetermined period. There is a possibility that new specific information can be obtained even when there are few. Therefore, even when it is expected that the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined number of times is small, such as a jackpot game for a single jackpot, whether or not the specific conditions are satisfied in a specific period is satisfied. It is possible to be interested in a number of specific conditions, and also to be interested in specific information presented after a specific period of time has passed. As a result, it is possible to more effectively improve the interest of the game by presenting specific information that can specify or guess the non-set value (set value) according to the number of satisfied specific conditions. Become.

The predetermined conditions for determining (changing) the order in which the specific information is presented include, for example, winning a jackpot, opening a jackpot game, opening / closing execution mode, or starting the ending of a jackpot game. Can be considered. By setting the predetermined conditions in this way, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) each time the jackpot game is executed. Therefore, since the presentation order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly presented and the presentation of the specific information from being monotonous. As a result, it is expected that new information will be obtained as specific information each time the jackpot game is executed. As a result, for example, it is possible to make an interest in the presentation order of specific information in the jackpot game, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the jackpot game.

In addition, as predetermined conditions, winning a specific jackpot (for example, a probability variation jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a jackpot in a low probability mode), a specific jackpot game (for example, a probability variation jackpot, a normal jackpot, or a jackpot in a low probability mode) It is conceivable that the opening of the jackpot game), the opening / closing execution mode, or the ending of the jackpot game will be started. By setting the predetermined conditions in this way, the number of times that the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) is reduced as compared with the case where the predetermined conditions are not limited to the specific jackpot or jackpot game. Therefore, by reducing the possibility that new information is presented with respect to the specific information presented in advance, the difficulty of identifying all non-set values (identifying set values) is increased. , It is possible to prevent all non-set values from being specified at an early stage (set values are specified). Thereby, for example, when the set value is low, it is possible to prevent the player from terminating the game on the gaming machine 10 during the game at an early stage.

Further, as a predetermined condition, it is conceivable that a predetermined period or a specific period starts or ends. By setting the predetermined conditions in this way, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) for each predetermined period or for each specific period. Therefore, it is expected that new information will be obtained as specific information every predetermined period or every specific period. As a result, it is possible to make people interested in the order in which specific information is presented, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, as a predetermined condition, it is conceivable that a specific effect is determined or executed as a variable game effect. The specific effect in this case may be set to, for example, either a non-reach effect or a reach effect. Typically, the specific effect includes a premier effect in which a jackpot or a probabilistic jackpot is determined among the variable game effects. Further, as a specific effect, it is conceivable that the decorative symbols are stopped or temporarily stopped (intermediate stop display) in a specific combination on the symbol display unit 341. For example, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "777" on the symbol display unit 341, when it is stopped and displayed at a specific reach deviation such as "767", it is stopped and displayed at a specific non-reach deviation such as "367". Temporary stop display (intermediate stop) that clearly indicates that the development effect will be executed when the development effect such as super reach effect or special reach effect is executed as the reach effect, in addition to the case where the stop display is displayed at (separate eyes). Display) is possible. As a temporary stop display (intermediate stop display) that clearly indicates that the development effect is executed, the left and right decorative symbols are temporarily stopped in the reach state (intermediate stop display), for example, "7 development 7". It is conceivable that a symbol that clearly indicates that a development effect such as "development" will be executed is temporarily stopped and displayed as a symbol. Even when the predetermined conditions are set in this way, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) for each predetermined period or for each specific period. Therefore, it is expected that new information will be obtained as specific information every predetermined period or every specific period. As a result, it is possible to make people interested in the order in which specific information is presented, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

Further, as a predetermined condition, it is conceivable that the single-shot jackpot is consecutive a plurality of times, the presentation order of the same specific information is continuous a plurality of times, and the like. By setting the predetermined conditions in this way, the presentation order of the specific information is determined (changed) when it is difficult to obtain new information as the specific information. Therefore, since new information can be easily obtained as specific information, it is possible to reduce the feeling of boredom when new specific information cannot be obtained, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

If the predetermined conditions are satisfied by the start of the predetermined period, for example, the presentation order of the specific information determined (changed) with respect to the predetermined conditions to be satisfied first may be prioritized, and finally. The presentation order of specific information determined (changed) for a predetermined condition to be satisfied may be prioritized.

In one example of the present embodiment, a plurality of non-settings as specific information are performed on the condition that the jackpot game for the jackpot in the low probability mode is started (the predetermined period is started, the first jackpot game is started). The display order of the numbers corresponding to each of the values and the segment display order when displaying each number are determined, and the end of the predetermined period is set according to these display orders. After the lapse of time), all or part of the numbers for specifying a plurality of non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39.

Here, FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the display order setting process executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 52 is the procedure of the display order setting process of FIG. 51. It is a figure which shows an example of the table referred to in. Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 51 and 52, focusing on the display order setting process, which is a difference from the first embodiment described above.

[Display order setting process]
<Step S2601>
As shown in FIG. 51, in the display order setting process in the present embodiment, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot game effect start flag is set to ON (step S2601). The jackpot game effect start flag is a flag indicating that the jackpot game effect is started, and is set to ON in step S2108 of the command determination process of FIG. 37. Then, when the jackpot game effect start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2602, and when the jackpot game effect start flag is off (step S2601: No), the display order is concerned. End the setting process.

<Step S2602>
When the jackpot game effect start flag is on (step S2601: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot that triggered the start of the jackpot game effect is a jackpot in the low probability mode (step S2602). ). That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot is the first hit and the predetermined period is started. Whether or not the jackpot is in the low-probability mode is determined by, for example, whether the jackpot that triggered the start of the jackpot game when the jackpot game is started is in the low-probability mode or in the high-probability mode. When the jackpot game start command is included in the jackpot game start command and the jackpot game start command is transmitted from the main control device 4 to the voice lamp control device 5, the command determination process of FIG. 37 is based on the probability mode information. It can be determined by setting a flag indicating that it is a big hit in the low probability mode to on or off and confirming the flag with the MPU 51. The probability mode information may be set as a command different from the jackpot game start command.

Then, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S2603 when the jackpot is in the low probability mode (step S2602: Yes), that is, when the jackpot is the first hit (the jackpot which is the start of a predetermined period). On the other hand, the MPU 51 ends the display order setting process when it is not a big hit in the low probability mode (step S2602: No), that is, when it is a big hit in the high probability mode (step S2602: No).

<Steps S2603 to S2605>
In the case of a big hit in the low probability mode (step S2602: Yes), the MPU 51 acquires the set value from the RAM 512 (step S2603), and further, the display order of the numbers corresponding to the plurality of non-set values on the 7-segment display unit 39. (Step S2604), the control order of the segments A to G for each number is set (step S2605), and the display order setting process is completed.

Here, the display order of the numbers corresponding to the plurality of non-set values on the 7-segment display unit 39 is the same as in step S2015 (see FIG. 35) of the display order setting process in the first embodiment described above. It is determined based on the number display order determination table shown in. Further, the display order of the determined numbers is stored in the RAM 512.

Further, the control order of the segments A to G for each number is determined based on the control order determination table of the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 shown in FIG. 52. In this control order determination table, a plurality of control orders of segments A to G are defined by the values of the control order type counters updated in step S2001 of the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 35, and each control order is determined. The probabilities are set the same. Then, the control order of the segments A to G is determined from a plurality of control orders in the same order for each number by the value of the control order type counter when the control order of the segments A to G for each number is set. NS. Further, the determined control order of the segments A to G is stored in the RAM 512.

In the present embodiment, when the numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, the segments A to G are all controlled in the same order as the numbers, but the control order of each number. May be different. That is, the control order of the segments A to G may be individually determined for each of a plurality of numbers corresponding to the non-set values.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the order in which the numbers corresponding to the non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 is determined for each predetermined period. As a result, the order in which specific information is presented when a predetermined condition is satisfied is determined, so that the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period is larger than the number of specific conditions satisfied in the preceding predetermined period. There is a possibility that new specific information can be obtained even if the amount is small. Therefore, even when it is expected that the number of specific conditions satisfied in a predetermined number of times is small, such as a jackpot game for a single jackpot, whether or not the specific conditions are satisfied in a specific period is satisfied. It is possible to be interested in a number of specific conditions, and also to be interested in specific information presented after a specific period of time has passed. As a result, it becomes possible to more effectively improve the interest of the game by presenting specific information according to the number of non-set values (set values) that can be specified or inferred and specific conditions are satisfied. ..

In the present embodiment, the same design changes as those in the above-mentioned first and second embodiments can be made within the applicable range.

[Fourth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, based on the number of times the specific conditions are satisfied in the specific period, after the lapse of the specific period (ending of the jackpot game), the specific information (numbers) corresponding to the plurality of non-set values The case where all or a part of the characters are presented to the 7-segment display unit 39 and the presentation of the specific information on the 7-segment display unit 39 ends with the end of the jackpot game has been described. That is, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, all or a part of the specific information is displayed in a predetermined predetermined period (after the lapse of the specific period).

By the way, when the player misses or forgets to present the specific information in the specified period, the player specifies or guesses a plurality of non-set values in consideration of the specific information displayed in the past. It is assumed that you would like to reconfirm the information. Further, when a player is replaced, it is assumed that the player after the replacement wishes to confirm the specific information displayed in the past. However, when the specific information is presented in the specified period, the specific information cannot be reconfirmed because the specific information is not presented outside the specified period.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, it is possible to present all or part of the specific information presented in the past in a special period other than the specified period. In this way, by being able to present the specific information presented in the past in a special period other than the specified period, the player can confirm the specific information presented in the past in the special period. That is, the player can reconfirm the specific information displayed in the past when he / she misses or forgets to present the specific information in the specified period, and the game after the change when the player is changed. The person can confirm the specific information presented to the player in the past. As a result, the player can specify or infer a plurality of non-set values (set values) in consideration of the specific information presented to the past player, so that the non-set values (set values) can be set. Convenience for identifying or guessing is improved.

Here, as the special period, for example, a period of a waiting state (customer waiting state) in which neither the variable game nor the jackpot game is executed can be mentioned. By setting the special period to the standby state in this way, it is possible to confirm the specific information presented in the past in the state where the game is not executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent various effects executed by the symbol display unit 341 and the like as the game progresses, for example, the visual recognition of the variable game effect and the jackpot game effect.

In addition, when it is possible to present all or part of the specific information presented in the past during the standby state, a predetermined input such as a password input operation or a command input operation is performed on the specific display screen that can be transferred in the standby state. It is also conceivable that the operation is performed. The password and the command may be made available by displaying them on the symbol display unit 341 at the ending or the like in the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set. In addition, passwords and commands are externally displayed by displaying a matrix-type two-dimensional code or the like on the symbol display unit 341 in the jackpot game and reading the matrix-type two-dimensional code or the like using a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or mobile phone. It may be possible to enter by so-called mobile interlocking, which is transmitted from the server to the mobile terminal.

In this way, it is possible to present all or part of the specific information presented in the past during the standby state on condition that a predetermined input operation such as a password input operation or a command input operation is performed. Only the player who can enter the password, command, etc., that is, only the player who is presented with all or part of the specific information, confirms all or part of the specific information presented in the past during the standby state. Becomes possible. As a result, it is possible to eliminate the so-called hyena act or free riding in which all or part of the past specific information is confirmed by another player.

In addition, by reading a matrix-type two-dimensional code or the like using a mobile terminal such as a smartphone or mobile phone on a specific display screen that can be transferred in the standby state, all or part of the specific information presented to the mobile terminal in the past. It is also conceivable to have them present.

It is also conceivable to set the special period during the jackpot game, for example, during the opening, during the opening / closing execution mode, and during the ending. By setting the special period during the jackpot game in this way, the past specific information is presented in a state where the lottery result in the jackpot lottery is not clearly or suggested. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the explicit or suggestion of the result in the jackpot lottery from being hindered by the presentation of specific information. In addition, since the jackpot game is executed after clearly indicating that the result in the jackpot lottery is a jackpot by the variable game, the player's interest tends to decrease, but it has been presented in the past in such a jackpot game. By presenting the specific information, the interest in the jackpot game is improved.

It is also conceivable to set the special period during the variable game. Here, in the total time during which the game is executed (the time obtained by subtracting the standby time from the time when the power of the gaming machine 10 is turned on), the theoretical value is that the variable game is compared with the execution time of the jackpot variable game. Execution time is longer. Therefore, since it is possible to present the past specific information during the variable game, it is possible to set many timings at which the past specific information can be presented. However, when the special period is set during the variable game, for a certain period before the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, for example, in the non-reach state where the reach effect is not executed as the variable game effect or when the variable time is short, It is preferable to limit the presentation of specific information. As a result, it is possible to prevent the visual recognition or suggestion of the lottery result in the jackpot lottery by the stop display of the decorative symbol from being hindered.

Further, the presentation of the past specific information in the special period may be performed at a timing determined by the gaming machine 10, or may be executed at the will of the player.

When the past specific information is presented at the timing determined by the gaming machine 10, it is possible to have the player present the past specific information at a timing unexpected by the player. Therefore, it is possible to impart unexpected game playability to the game machine 10. Further, since the past specific information is presented at the timing determined by the gaming machine 10 without the player performing any operation on the gaming machine 10, even a player having little knowledge about the gaming machine 10 , It becomes possible to know the specific information presented in the past. This ensures fairness among the players.

Here, as an example of the case where the past specific information is presented at the timing determined by the gaming machine 10, for example, presenting the past specific information as a demonstration screen in the standby state, a variable game, When a specific reach effect is scheduled to be executed in, a certain percentage (including 100%) of presenting specific information presented in the past before the reach effect is executed, a variable game, or For example, it is decided to present the specific information presented in the past by a lottery executed at a specific timing of the jackpot game. When the specific information presented in the past is presented as the demonstration screen in the standby state, the player considers the past specific information presented on the demonstration screen and executes the game from the empty platform. Since 10 can be selected, the degree of freedom and convenience when selecting the gaming machine 10 to execute the game is improved. In addition, when a specific reach effect is scheduled to be executed in a variable game and the specific information presented in the past is presented before the reach effect is executed, the past specific information is presented. Since it plays a role as a pre-notification effect for the execution of a specific reach effect, the interest in variable games is improved. In addition, the presentation of the past specific information in the variable game is indicated by the expectation degree suggestion effect (including the definite effect indicating that the jackpot is a big hit) that suggests the expectation degree (reliability) when the lottery result in the big hit lottery is a big hit. It is also conceivable to execute it as a chance-up effect to improve the degree of expectation (reliability). In this case as well, the interest in variable games is improved. Further, when the specific information presented in the past is presented by the lottery executed at the specific timing of the variable game or the jackpot game, the past specific information is presented at a random specific timing determined by the gaming machine 10. Therefore, it is possible to give a special surprise to the game. In addition, when the player can know the specific timing at which the specific information is presented, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether the specific information is presented at the specific timing. Is improved.

On the other hand, when the presentation of the past specific information in the special period is executed by the player's intention, the special information is not passively waited for the past specific information to be presented at the timing determined by the gaming machine 10. During the period, the player can positively confirm the specific past information at his / her favorite timing. Therefore, when a plurality of non-set values (set values) are specified or estimated in consideration of the past specific information, the player's intention is reflected without being restricted by the gaming machine 10 regarding the timing of presenting the past specific information. Therefore, convenience is improved.

Here, as an example in which the presentation of the past specific information in the special period is executed by the player's intention, the operation button 20 is operated by the player in the special period set during the standby state, the variable game, and the jackpot game. It is possible to present specific information presented in the past when a predetermined operation for the above is performed.

In one example of the present embodiment, all or part of the specific information (numbers) corresponding to the plurality of non-set values displayed by the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending (specified period) of the jackpot game is displayed, and the player is in the standby state. By performing a predetermined operation on the operation button 20 and the selection determination unit 21 during the period (special period), all or part of the specific information (numbers) displayed at the ending of the last three jackpot games can be obtained. It is displayed on the symbol display unit 341. In one example of the present embodiment, it is possible to display all or part of the specific information displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past on the symbol display unit 341 without performing an input operation such as a password or a command. Is.

Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 53 to 63, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above.

Here, FIG. 53 is a perspective view showing an example of the configuration of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 54 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the gaming machine shown in FIG. 53.

As shown in FIG. 53, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment further includes a selection determination unit 21 provided on the front frame 11.

The selection determination unit 21 is operated by the player, and is a push button that accepts the player's pressing operation in the standby state described later and shifts the display screen (see FIG. 60) on the symbol display unit 341. The selection determination unit 21 includes a plurality of selection buttons 21A and a determination button 21B.

The plurality of selection buttons 21A are operated by the player in order to temporarily select a desired item from the options (items) on various screens such as the top menu screen in the standby state screen transition process of FIGS. 61 and 62, which will be described later. (See FIG. 60), which includes an upper select button 211, a lower select button 212, a left select button 213 and a right select button 214. Here, the provisional selection means that the contents of the provisional selection are confirmed (stored in the RAM 512) by operating the enter button 21B. As shown in FIG. 54, each of these selection buttons 211 to 214 has an upper selection operation switch 211a, a lower selection operation switch 211b, a left selection operation switch 211c, and a right selection operation switch for switching an input signal to the voice lamp control device 5. It includes 211d. These switches 211a to 211d are connected to the input / output I / F of the voice lamp control device 5. Therefore, in the voice lamp control device 5, it is possible to determine whether or not the operation for each of the selection buttons 211 to 214 has been performed based on the input signals of the switches 211a to 211d.

Further, in the present embodiment, when it is detected that the operation for each selection button 211-214 has been started, it is determined that the operation for each selection button 211-214 has been performed. Of course, when it is detected that the operation for each selection button 211-214 is continued or the operation is completed, it may be determined that the operation for each selection button 211-214 has been performed. ..

On the other hand, the decision button 21B is operated by the player to determine the tentatively selected item. Further, the decision button 21B includes a decision operation switch 21Ba for switching an input signal to the voice lamp control device 5 described later. The determination operation switch 21Ba is connected to the input / output I / F of the voice lamp control device 5. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not the operation for the determination operation switch 21Ba has been performed based on the input signal of the determination operation switch 21Ba.

Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (121 to 214) and the decision button 21B, it is conceivable that a touch panel that displays a touch key and accepts a player's operation on the touch key is provided as an operation means. Further, instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (121 to 214) and the decision button 21B, it is conceivable to provide a translucent touch panel on the front side of the symbol display unit 341 to receive the operation of the player. It is also conceivable to provide a jog dial instead of the plurality of selection buttons 21A (211-214). Further, the selection switches 211a to 211d and the determination operation switch 21Ba are contact type switches and the like, but may be, for example, a piezoelectric element or the like as long as they can be used to detect the presence or absence of operation by the player. ..

Here, FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the sub-timer interrupt processing executed by the voice lamp control device 5 of the gaming machine 10 shown in FIG. 53.

As shown in FIG. 55, in the sub-timer interrupt processing of the present embodiment, in addition to the same processing (steps S2000 to S2005) as the sub-timer interrupt processing in the first embodiment described above, the operation detection processing (steps S2000 to S2005) Step S2701) and the standby state screen transition process (step S2702) are executed.

[Operation detection process]
The operation detection process is a process for detecting whether or not an operation has been performed on the various buttons 20, 21A, and 21B. Here, FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 55.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the operation detection process, the MPU 41 performs an operation button operation detection process (step S2801), an operation detection pattern determination process (step S2802), a selection button operation detection process (step S2803), and a selection operation detection pattern determination. The process (step S2804), the decision button operation detection process (step S2805), and the decision operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806) are executed.

[Operation button operation detection process]
In the operation button operation detection process (step S2201 of the operation detection process), the operation state of the operation button 20 is detected, and a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times is executed. In the gaming machine 10, the operation button operation detection process is executed by the MPU 41, so that the operation button 20 is operated at a predetermined interval (1 msec interval in the present embodiment) corresponding to the interrupt cycle of the sub-timer interrupt process. It will be judged whether or not there is. Here, FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation button operation detection process. Hereinafter, the operation button operation detection process will be described with reference to FIG. 57.

<Steps S2901 to S2903>
As shown in FIG. 57, in step S2901, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the second detection flag to the first detection flag. Further, in step S2902, the MPU 41 shifts (overwrites) the setting of the third detection flag to the second detection flag. After that, in step S2903, the MPU 41 sets (overwrites) the operation state of the operation button 20 detected by the operation switch 20a in the third detection flag, and the operation detection process ends.

As described above, in the operation button operation detection process, by executing the processes of steps S2901 to S2903, the operation history of the operation button 20 includes the operation states of the most recent three times at 1 msec intervals from the first detection flag to the third detection. It is stored in the RAM 512 as a flag. Specifically, the latest operation state is stored as the third detection flag, the previous operation state is stored as the second detection flag, and the previous operation state is stored as the first detection flag.

[Operation detection pattern judgment processing]
Returning to the description of FIG. 57, in the operation detection pattern determination process of step S2802 in the operation detection process, the operation of the operation button 20 determined based on the first operation detection flag, the second operation detection flag, and the third operation detection flag. An operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for the operation button 20 from the history is set. The operation pattern flag includes the first to third operation pattern flags, and the operation state of the operation button 20 can be determined by the combination of turning on and off the first to third operation pattern flags. For example, when only the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation for the operation button 20 is continued (see FIG. 38 (A)). Further, when only the second operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation for the operation button 20 has started (see FIG. 38 (A)). Further, when only the third operation pattern flag is set to ON, it can be determined that the operation for the operation button 20 is completed (see FIG. 38 (A)). Then, when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are set to off, it can be determined that the operation button 20 has not been operated (see FIG. 38 (A)). Here, FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the operation detection pattern determination process. Further, FIG. 59 (A) is a table showing the relationship between the detection pattern for the operation button 20 and the operation status. Hereinafter, the operation button operation detection process will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 and 59 (A).

<Step S3001>
As shown in FIG. 58, in step S3001, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the first operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 three times before is set to ON. Here, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3002 when the first operation detection flag is on (step S3001: Yes), and performs the process when the first operation detection flag is off (step S3001: No). The process proceeds to step S3005.

<Step S3002>
In step S3002, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is set to ON. Here, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3003 when the second operation detection flag is on (step S3002: Yes), and performs the process when the second operation detection flag is off (step S3002: No). The process proceeds to step S3008.

<Step S3003>
In step S3003, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the latest operation button 20 is set to ON. Here, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3004 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S3003: Yes), and performs the process when the third operation detection flag is off (step S3003: No). The process proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3004>
In step S3004, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag on, the second operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of "ON", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states for the operation buttons 20 three times, and the second operation pattern. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 59 (A)). Then, the first operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the operation button 20 is continuing. For example, when the first operation pattern flag is set to ON, the MPU 41 may set the operation button operation continuation command in the RAM 412 and transmit the operation button operation continuation command to the voice lamp control device 5. .. As a result, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine that the operation on the operation button 20 is continuing, so that the operation button 20 is continuously operated based on the number of times the operation button operation continuation command is continuously transmitted. I can grasp the time. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 5 can determine whether or not the operation button 20 has been long-pressed based on the time during which the operation button 20 is continuously operated. Therefore, the operation button effect based on the long-press operation is produced. Can be executed.

<Step S3005>
When the MPU 41 determines in step S3001 that the first operation detection flag is not on (step S3001: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the second operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the operation button 20 two times before is on. Determine (step S3005). Here, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3006 when the second operation detection flag is on (step S3005: Yes), and performs the process when the second operation detection flag is off (step S3005: No). The process proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3006>
In step S3006, the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the latest operation button 20 is on. Here, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3007 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S3006: Yes), and performs the process when the third operation detection flag is off (step S3006: No). The process proceeds to step S3010.

<Step S3007>
In step S3007, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag on and the first operation pattern flag and the third operation pattern flag off. That is, the MPU 41 sets the second operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states for the operation buttons 20 three times, and the first operation pattern. The flag and the third operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 59 (A)), and the operation detection pattern determination process ends. Then, the second operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been started). In this way, if it is determined whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state by using the second operation pattern flag, the operation state for three times of the operation button 20 is reflected. Alternatively, erroneous detection of the operation start of the operation button 20 due to noise such as static electricity is prevented, and the operation start of the operation button 20 is prevented from being reflected in the effect display at a timing not intended by the player.

<Step S3008>
When the MPU 41 determines in step S3002 that the second operation detection flag is not on (step S3002: No), the MPU 41 determines whether or not the third operation detection flag indicating the operation state of the latest operation button 20 is on. (Step S3008). Here, the MPU 41 shifts the process to step S3010 when the third operation detection flag is on (step S3008: Yes), and performs the process when the second operation detection flag is off (step S3008: No). The process proceeds to step S3009.

<Step S3009>
In step S3009, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag on, the first operation pattern flag and the second operation pattern flag off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 41 sets the third operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" are generated as the operation states for the operation buttons 20 three times, and the first operation pattern. The flag and the second operation pattern flag are set to off (see FIG. 59 (A)). Then, the third operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation button 20 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the operation button 20 has been completed). can.

<Step S3010>
In step S3010, the MPU 41 sets the first operation pattern flag, the second operation pattern flag, and the third operation pattern flag to off, and ends the operation detection pattern determination process. That is, the MPU 41 turns off all of the first to third operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state for the operation button 20 three times. (See FIG. 59 (A)). The MPU 41 determines that the operation button 20 is in a non-operation state when all of the first to third operation pattern flags are off.

[Select button operation detection process]
Returning to the description of FIG. 56, in the selection button operation detection process (step S2803), the MPU 41 executes the upper selection button operation process, the lower selection button operation process, the left selection button operation process, and the right selection button operation process.

<Upper selection button operation processing>
In the upper selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the upper selection button 211 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the upper selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 57, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the upper selection button operation processing, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "upper selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 57.

<Down selection button operation processing>
In the lower selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the lower selection button 212 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the lower selection button operation processing is the same as the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 57, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the lower selection button operation processing, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "lower selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 57.

<Left selection button operation processing>
In the left selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the left selection button 213 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the left selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 57, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the left selection button operation processing, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "left selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 57.

<Right selection button operation processing>
In the right selection button operation process, the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the right selection button 214 and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the right selection button operation process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 57, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the right selection button operation processing, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "right selection operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection processing of FIG. 57.

[Selection operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the selection operation detection pattern determination process (step S2804), the MPU 41 executes the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, and the right selection operation detection pattern determination process.

<Top selection operation detection pattern judgment processing>
In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 is above the operation history of the upper selection button 211 determined based on the first upper selection operation detection flag, the second upper selection operation detection flag, and the third upper selection operation detection flag. The upper operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for the selection button 211 is set. Here, since the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, the "operation detection flag" is set to the "upper selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" is set to the "upper selection operation pattern". It should be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 59 (B), in the upper selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 has an operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" as the operation state for three times of the upper selection button 211. When it occurs, the first upper selection operation pattern flag is set to on, and the second upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag are set to off. Then, the first upper selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the upper selection button 211 continues.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", or "ON" occurs as the operation state for three times of the upper selection button 211, and sets the second upper selection operation pattern flag to ON. 1 Set the upper selection operation pattern flag and the third upper selection operation pattern flag to off. Then, the second upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has been started). It will be used.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the operation state for three times of the upper selection button 211, and sets the third upper selection operation pattern flag to ON. 1 Set the upper selection operation pattern flag and the second upper selection operation pattern flag to off. Then, the third upper selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the upper selection button 211 has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state (whether or not the operation of the upper selection button 211 has been completed). It will be used.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the upper selection button 211 three times. Set all to off. The MPU 41 determines that the upper selection button 211 is in the non-operation state when all of the first to third upper selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Down selection operation detection pattern judgment processing>
In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines from the operation history of the lower selection button 212, which is determined based on the first lower selection operation detection flag, the second lower selection operation detection flag, and the lower selection operation detection flag. A lower operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 212 is set. Here, since the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, the "operation detection flag" is set to the "lower selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" is set to the "lower selection operation pattern". It should be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), in the lower selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 has an operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" as the operation state for three times of the lower selection button 212. When it occurs, the first lower selection operation pattern flag is set to on, and the second lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag are set to off. Then, the first lower selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the lower selection button 212 continues.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", or "ON" occurs as the operation state for three times of the lower selection button 212, and sets the second lower selection operation pattern flag to ON. 1 Set the lower selection operation pattern flag and the third lower selection operation pattern flag to off. Then, the second lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has been started). It will be used.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation pattern of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state for three times of the lower selection button 212, and sets the third lower selection operation pattern flag to ON. 1 Set the lower selection operation pattern flag and the second lower selection operation pattern flag to off. Then, the third lower selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the lower selection button 212 has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state (whether or not the operation of the lower selection button 212 has been completed). It will be used.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the first to third lower selection operation detection flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the lower selection button 212 three times. Set all to off. The MPU 41 determines that the lower selection button 212 is in the non-operation state when all of the first to third lower selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Left selection operation detection pattern judgment processing>
In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines from the operation history of the left selection button 213 based on the first left selection operation detection flag, the second left selection operation detection flag, and the left selection operation detection flag. A left operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for 213 is set. Here, since the left selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, the "operation detection flag" is set to the "left selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" is set to the "left selection operation pattern". It should be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 59 (D), in the left selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 has an operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" as the operation state for three times of the left selection button 213. When it occurs, the first left selection operation pattern flag is set to on, and the second left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag are set to off. Then, the first left selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the left selection button 213 is continued.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", or "ON" occurs as the operation state for three times of the left selection button 213, and sets the second left selection operation pattern flag to ON. 1 Set the left selection operation pattern flag and the third left selection operation pattern flag to off. The second left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has been started). It will be used.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the operation state for three times of the left selection button 213, and sets the third left selection operation pattern flag to ON. 1 Set the left selection operation pattern flag and the second left selection operation pattern flag to off. The third left selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the left selection button 213 has changed from the operating state to the non-operating state (whether or not the operation of the left selection button 213 has been completed). It will be used.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the first to third left selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the left selection button 213 three times. Set all to off. The MPU 41 determines that the left selection button 213 is in the non-operation state when all of the first to third left selection operation pattern flags are off.

<Right selection operation detection pattern judgment processing>
In the right-selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 determines from the operation history of the right-selection button 214, which is determined based on the first right-selection operation detection flag, the second right-selection operation detection flag, and the right-selection operation detection flag. Set the right operation pattern flag to determine the operation status for 214. Here, since the right selection operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, the "operation detection flag" is set to the "right selection operation detection flag" and the "operation pattern flag" is set to the "right selection operation pattern". It should be read as "flag".

Here, as shown in FIG. 59 (E), in the right selection operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 has an operation pattern of "ON", "ON", and "ON" as the operation state for three times of the right selection button 214. When it occurs, the first right selection operation pattern flag is set to on, and the second right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag are set to off. Then, the first right selection operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the right selection button 214 is continued.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON when an operation pattern of "OFF", "ON", or "ON" occurs as the operation state for three times of the right selection button 214, and sets the second right selection operation pattern flag to ON. 1 Set the right selection operation pattern flag and the third right selection operation pattern flag to off. Then, the second right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has been started). It will be used.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the operation state for three times of the right selection button 214, and sets the third right selection operation pattern flag to ON. 1 Set the right selection operation pattern flag and the second right selection operation pattern flag to off. Then, the third right selection operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the right selection button 214 has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the right selection button 214 has been completed). It will be used.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the first to third right selection operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state of the right selection button 214 three times. Set all to off. The MPU 41 determines that the right selection button 214 is in the non-operation state when all of the first to third right selection operation pattern flags are off.

[Enter button operation detection process]
In the decision button operation detection process (step S2805 of FIG. 56), the MPU 41 detects the operation state of the decision button 21B and executes a process for sequentially updating the operation history for the past three times. Here, since the decision button operation detection process is the same as the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 57, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the decision button operation detection process, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "decision button operation detection flag" in each step of the operation button operation detection process of FIG. 57.

[Decision operation detection pattern judgment processing]
In the determination operation detection pattern determination process (step S2806 in FIG. 56), the MPU 41 has an operation history of the determination button 21B determined based on the first determination operation detection flag, the second determination operation detection flag, and the third determination operation detection flag. To set the operation pattern flag for determining the operation state for the decision button 21B. Here, since the determination operation detection pattern determination process is the same as the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58, detailed description thereof will be omitted. In the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the "operation detection flag" may be read as the "determination operation detection flag" in each step of the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58.

Here, as shown in FIG. 59 (F), in the determination operation detection pattern determination process, the MPU 41 generated "ON", "ON", and "ON" operation patterns as the operation states for the determination button 21B three times. In this case, the first determination operation pattern flag is set to on, and the second determination operation pattern flag and the third determination operation pattern flag are set to off. Then, the first determination operation pattern flag can be used as an index for determining whether or not the operation state of the determination button 21B is continuing.

Further, the MPU 41 sets the second decision operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of "OFF", "ON", and "ON" occur as the operation states for the decision button 21B three times, and makes the first decision. Set the operation pattern flag and the third decision operation pattern flag to off. Then, the second decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the decision button 21B has changed from the non-operation state to the operation state (whether or not the operation of the decision button 21B has been started). ..

Further, the MPU 41 sets the third determination operation pattern flag to ON when the operation patterns of "ON", "OFF", and "OFF" occur as the operation state for three times of the determination button 21B, and makes the first determination. Set the operation pattern flag and the second decision operation pattern flag to off. Then, the third decision operation pattern flag is used as an index for determining whether or not the decision button 21B has changed from the operation state to the non-operation state (whether or not the operation of the decision button 21B is completed). ..

In addition, the MPU 41 has all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags when an operation pattern other than the above such as "OFF", "OFF", and "OFF" occurs as the operation state for three times of the decision button 21B. Is set to off. The MPU 41 determines that the decision button 21B is in the non-operation state when all of the first to third decision operation pattern flags are off.

[Standby screen transition process]
Returning to the description of FIG. 55, in the standby state screen transition process executed in 2702 of the sub-timer interrupt process, the operation button 20, the selection button 21A, or the determination button 20 is executed in the standby state in which neither the variable game nor the jackpot game is executed. In response to the operation of the button 21B, a process of shifting the screen of the symbol display unit 341 and enabling the player to make various selections and settings is executed. Here, FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition in the symbol display unit 341 in the standby state.

As shown in FIG. 60, when the change display of the decorative symbol is stopped, the change of the decorative symbol is stopped when the number of holds N and the number of holds M are "0" and the game does not shift to the jackpot game state. The state fluctuation stop screen is maintained. Then, when the operation button 20 is operated by the player after the variable stop screen is displayed, the display screen is changed from the variable stop screen to the top menu screen. This top menu screen includes a plurality of screen transition images and cursor images.

The plurality of screen transition images are images for selecting the display screen of the migration destination, and include a plurality of selectable items (display screen of the migration destination). Multiple screen transition images are displayed as "7-segment display unit history". 7-segment display unit history selection screen transition image for transitioning to the 7-segment display unit history selection screen, character selection displayed as "character selection". Character selection screen transition image for transitioning to the screen, character customization screen transition image for transitioning to the character customization screen displayed as "Character customization", and variable stop screen for transitioning to the variable stop screen displayed as "Back" Includes a variable stop screen transition image.

The cursor image is an image showing which of the plurality of selectable items is currently temporarily selected, and the item corresponding to the screen transition image on the right side of the cursor image among the plurality of screen transition images is This is a tentatively selected item. In the example shown in FIG. 60, it is shown that the "7-segment display section history" is tentatively selected. Further, the screen transition image corresponding to the temporarily selected item among the plurality of screen transition images is displayed in a manner distinguishable from other screen transition images in order to emphasize that the screen transition image is temporarily selected. .. The temporary selection item can be changed by operating the upper selection button 211 or the lower selection button 212.

On the top menu screen, the temporarily selected item (transition destination display screen) is determined by operating the enter button 21B, and the screen is shifted to the display screen corresponding to the item. For example, when the enter button 21B is operated when the 7-segment display section history selection screen transition image of "7-segment display section history" is selected by the player, the display screen changes from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display section history selection screen. Will be migrated to.

The 7-segment display unit history selection screen is a screen capable of shifting to a history screen in which the contents of the specific information displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 are displayed for a predetermined period. This history screen shows the display contents on the 7-segment display unit 39 for any of the latest three predetermined periods, and the one-time previous history screen in which the contents of specific information for the previous predetermined period are displayed. Includes a two-time previous history screen in which the content of specific information for a predetermined period two times before is displayed, and a three-time previous history screen in which the content of specific information for a predetermined period three times before is displayed. Each history screen is a history image having the same form as the additional image (see FIGS. 47 (B1), 47 (B2), and 47 (C)) displayed on the symbol display unit 341 in the latter half part of the ending of the jackpot game. including. The history image shows the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 until the end of one predetermined period, and five settings imitating the 7-segment display unit 39 in which numbers corresponding to non-set values can be displayed. Includes value suggestion images. In the example shown in FIG. 60, the number 2 is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 due to the entry of the game ball 99 into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 in the predetermined period one time before, and then the segments A to A to It shows that C has a history of being lit.

In addition, the 7-segment display section history selection screen is a one-time previous history screen for shifting to a cursor image indicating that it is temporarily selected and a one-time previous history screen displaying "History 1 (one time ago)". Transition image, "History 2 (2 times before)" is displayed 2 times before History screen for transition to the history screen 2 times before History screen Transition image, "History 3 (3 times before)" is displayed 3 times before Includes a history screen transition image three times before to transition to the history screen, and a fluctuation stop screen transition image for transitioning to the fluctuation stop screen displayed as "finished". Then, on the 7-segment display unit history selection screen, the temporarily selected item (transition destination display screen) is determined by operating the decision button 21B, and the screen is shifted to the display screen corresponding to the item. For example, if the enter button 21B is operated when the previous history screen transition image of "History 1 (1 time ago)" is temporarily selected by the player, the display screen is changed from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to 1. Moves to the previous history screen. Further, when "History 2 (2 times before)" is selected, the 7-segment display section history selection screen is shifted to the 2 times previous history screen, and when "History 3 (3 times before)" is selected. Is transferred from the 7-segment display history selection screen to the previous history screen three times. When "End" is selected, the 7-segment display section history selection screen is displayed on the top menu screen.

In this way, it is possible to shift from the 7-segment display unit history selection screen to any of the one-time previous history screen, the two-time previous history screen, and the three-time previous history screen by the player's selection. That is, the player can confirm the history information desired by himself / herself by shifting to the history screen desired by himself / herself. As a result, the history can be effectively confirmed while avoiding the confirmation of the history information such as the previously confirmed information and the information with a small amount of information, so that the history can be confirmed efficiently.

Further, in the present embodiment, the information for specifying the non-set value in the ending of the jackpot game is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, which is different from the symbol display unit 341 in which the decorative symbol is variably displayed. Therefore, even when the information for specifying the non-set value is displayed, the visual recognition of the image effect executed by the symbol display unit 341 is not hindered. On the other hand, in the standby state, the history information having the same contents as the information displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 different from the 7-segment display unit 39. Here, in general, since the symbol display unit 341 has a large display area, the visibility of the history information is improved by displaying the history information on the symbol display unit 341. In addition, the symbol display unit 341 may be used to perform various settings such as effects and characters executed in the gaming machine 10. Therefore, if the display content on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending is displayed on the symbol display unit 341, the history information can be confirmed by the same operation as the operation for making various settings. Therefore, the convenience of the work of confirming the history information is improved.

In the present embodiment, it is possible to shift from a plurality of history screens to a history screen selected by the player, but it is also conceivable to display a plurality of history information on one screen at the same time. In this case, since many histories can be confirmed at one time, the presented contents can be efficiently confirmed in this case as well.

In addition, on the top menu screen, when the character screen transition image of "Character selection" is selected, the display screen is shifted to the character selection screen, and when the character customization screen transition image of "Character customization" is selected, it is displayed. The screen shifts to the character customization screen. That is, in the present embodiment, it is possible to select a character that appears in a variable game effect or the like, and it is possible to customize the costume, accessories, hairstyle, and the like of the character.

When the "return" variable stop screen transition image is selected on the top menu screen, the display screen is shifted to the variable stop screen.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the display history on the 7-segment display unit 39 for the most recent three predetermined periods is confirmed by operating the selection determination unit 21 (selection button 21A and determination button 21B) in the standby state. Can be done. Therefore, the player can reconfirm the past display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 when he / she misses or forgets the display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending of the jackpot game. When the player is replaced, the player after the replacement can check the display contents of the past 7-segment display unit 39. As a result, the player can specify or estimate a plurality of non-set values (set values) in consideration of the display contents of the past 7-segment display unit 39, so that the non-set values (set values) can be set. The convenience for identifying or guessing is improved.

Here, FIGS. 61 and 62 are flowcharts showing an example of the procedure of the standby state screen transition process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 55. Hereinafter, the procedure of the standby state screen transition process executed in step S2702 of the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 55 will be described with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62.

<Steps S3101 and S3102>
As shown in FIG. 61, in the standby state screen transition process, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not it is in the standby state (steps S3101 and S3102). Specifically, in the MPU 51, the variable game effect in-progress flag set to on in step S2105 in the command determination process of FIG. 37 is set to off (step S3101: No), and the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34 is performed. When the jackpot game effect in progress flag set to on when the display variation pattern command is transmitted to the display control device 6 in the jackpot game effect process in step S2004 is set to off (step S3102: No), in the standby state. Judge that there is. On the other hand, the MPU 51 is not in the standby state when the variable game effect in-progress flag is set to on (step S3101: Yes) or when the jackpot game effect in-progress flag is set to on (step S3102: Yes). Judge.

Then, when the MPU 51 is in the standby state (both steps S3101 and S3102 are No), the process shifts to step S3103, and when it is not in the standby state (Yes in step S3101 or S3102), the standby state screen transition process ends. ..

<Step S3103>
In the standby state (both steps S3101 and S3102 are No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the fluctuation stop screen flag is set to ON (step S3103). The variable stop screen flag is a flag indicating that the display screen on the symbol display unit 341 is a variable stop screen. The variable stop screen flag is set in FIG. 62, which will be described later, when the variable game state or the jackpot game state is shifted to the standby state, that is, when all the screen flags other than the variable stop screen flag are set to off in the standby state. It is set to on in step S3120 of. The variable stop screen flag is also set to ON when the screen is changed from a display screen other than the variable stop screen to the variable stop screen. Specifically, when the display screen is changed from the top menu screen to the variable stop screen in the top menu screen processing in step S3109 of FIG. 62, which will be described later, the variable stop screen flag is displayed in the one-time previous history screen processing in step S3113. Is transferred from the one-time previous history screen processing to the variable stop screen, when the display screen is changed from the two-time previous history screen processing to the variable stop screen in the two-time previous history screen processing in step S3115, and in step S3117. It is also set to ON when the display screen shifts from the 3 times previous history screen processing to the variable stop screen in the 3 times previous history screen processing. The variable stop screen flag is set to off in step S3107 when the display screen shifts from the variable stop screen to the top menu screen, and is set to off when the variable display of the decorative symbol is started.

Then, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3104 when the variable stop screen flag is set to on (step S3103: Yes), and when the variable stop screen flag is set to off (step S3103: No). , The process proceeds to step S3108 of FIG.

<Step S3104>
When the variable stop screen flag is set to on (step S3103: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second operation pattern flag is set to on (step S3104). The second operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that the operation for the operation button 20 has been started, and is set to ON in step S3007 in the operation detection pattern determination process of FIG. 58. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the operation button 20 has been operated when the display screen is the variable stop screen. Then, when the second operation pattern flag is set to on (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3105, and when the second operation pattern flag is set to off (step S3104: Yes). No), the standby state screen transition process is terminated.

<Steps S3105-S3107>
When the second operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3104: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the variable stop screen to the top menu screen for making various selections and settings (step S3105) (FIG. 60). reference). That is, the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the variable stop screen to the top menu screen when the operation button 20 is operated when the display screen is the variable display screen.

Then, the MPU 51 sets the top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen on (step S3106), and sets the variable stop screen flag indicating that the display screen is the variable stop screen to off (step S3106). S3107), the standby state screen transition process is terminated.

<Step S3108>
When the variable stop screen flag is set to off (step S3103: No), as shown in FIG. 62, whether or not the top menu screen flag indicating that the display screen is the top menu screen is set to on in the MPU 51. (Step S3108). The top menu screen flag is set to be on when the display screen is changed from various screens such as the variable stop screen to the top menu screen in the standby state (for example, step S3106 in FIG. 61). The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3109 when the top menu screen flag is set to on (step S3108: Yes), and steps the process when the top menu screen flag is set to off (step S3108: No). Move to S3110.

<Step S3109>
When the top menu screen flag is set to on (step S3108: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the top menu screen process (step S3109). In the top menu screen processing, the item temporarily selected is changed according to the operation for the selection button 21A. Further, in the top menu screen processing, the screen corresponding to the item temporarily selected when the operation for the enter button 21B is performed, specifically, the fluctuation stop screen, the 7-segment display section history selection screen, the character selection screen, or the character. Move the display screen to the customize screen. Further, when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to another screen, the MPU 51 sets the screen flag for the transition destination screen to on, while setting the top menu screen flag to off.

<Step S3110>
When the top menu screen flag is set to off (step S3108: No), the MPU 51 indicates whether or not the 7-segment history selection screen flag indicating that the display screen is the 7-segment display section history selection screen is set to on. (Step S3110). The 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to on when the display screen is shifted from the top menu screen to the 7-segment display unit history selection screen in the top menu screen processing in step S3109. When the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to on (step S3110: Yes), the process shifts to step S3111, and when the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to off (step S3110: No). The process proceeds to step S3112.

<Step S3111>
When the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to on (step S3110: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the 7-segment history selection screen process. The 7-segment history selection screen process is a process executed when the 7-segment display unit history selection screen is displayed. Details of the 7-segment history selection screen processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

<Step S3112>
When the 7-segment history selection screen flag is set to off (step S3110: No), is the MPU51 set to turn on the one-time previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the one-time previous history screen? It is determined whether or not (step S3112). The one-time previous history screen flag is set to on when the display screen is transferred from the seven-segment display unit history selection screen to the one-time previous history screen in step S3212 of the 7-segment history selection screen processing of FIG. 63, which will be described later. NS. Then, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3113 when the one-time previous history screen flag is set to on (step S3112: Yes), and when the one-time previous history screen flag is set to off (step S3112: Yes). S3112: No), the process proceeds to step S3114.

<Step S3113>
When the one-time previous history screen flag is set to on (step S3112: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the one-time previous history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the one-time previous history screen processing, when "return" is selected, the display screen is shifted from the one-time previous history screen to the 7-segment display section history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the 7-segment history selection screen flag to on while setting the previous history screen flag to off.

<Step S3114>
When the one-time previous history screen flag is set to off (step S3112: No), is the MPU 51 set to the two-time previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the two-time previous history screen? It is determined whether or not (step S3114). The 2nd previous history screen flag is set to on when the display screen is transferred from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the 2nd previous history screen in step S3215 of the 7-segment history selection screen processing of FIG. 63, which will be described later. NS. Then, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3115 when the two-time previous history screen flag is set to on (step S3114: Yes), and when the two-time previous history screen flag is set to off (step S3114: Yes). S3114: No), the process proceeds to step S3116.

<Step S3115>
When the two-time previous history screen flag is set to on (step S3114: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the two-time previous history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the 2nd previous history screen processing, when "Back" is selected, the display screen is shifted from the 2nd previous history screen to the 7-segment display section history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the 7-segment history selection screen flag to on while setting the previous history screen flag to off twice.

<Step S3116>
When the 2 times previous history screen flag is set to off (step S3114: No), is the MPU 51 set to turn on the 3 times previous history screen flag indicating that the display screen is the 3 times previous history screen? It is determined whether or not (step S3116). The 6-time previous history screen flag is set to on when the display screen is transferred from the 7-segment display unit history selection screen to the 3 times previous history screen in step S3217 of the 7-segment history selection screen processing of FIG. 63, which will be described later. NS. Then, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3117 when the 3 times previous history screen flag is set to on (step S3116: Yes), and when the 3 times previous history screen flag is set to off (step S3116: Yes). S3116: No), the process proceeds to step S3118.

<Step S3117>
When the 3 times previous history screen flag is set to on (step S3116: Yes), the MPU 51 executes the 3 times previous history screen process and ends the standby state screen transition process. In the 3 times previous history screen processing, when "return" is selected, the display screen is shifted from the 3 times previous history screen to the 7-segment display section history selection screen. At this time, the MPU 51 sets the 7-segment history selection screen flag on while setting the 3 times previous history screen flag off.

<Steps S3118 and S3119>
When the history screen flag three times ago is set to off (step S3116: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not another screen flag (character selection screen flag or character customization screen flag) is set to on. (Step S3118). The other screen flags are set to on when the display screen is transferred from the top menu screen to another screen in the top menu screen processing in step S3109. When the other screen flag is set to on (step S3118: Yes), the corresponding other screen process of the other screen is executed (step S3119), and the standby state screen transition process is terminated. On the other hand, when the other screen flag is set to off (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3120.

<Step S3120>
When the other screen flags are set to off (step S3118: No), the MPU 51 sets the variable stop screen flag to on (step S3120) and ends the standby state screen transition process. That is, when the MPU 51 is in the standby state, if all the screen flags are also off, the MPU 51 is shifted from the variable game state or the jackpot game state to the standby state, and it can be determined that the display screen is the variable stop screen. Set the stop screen flag on.

[7-segment history selection screen processing]
In the 7-segment history selection screen process executed in step S3111 of the standby state screen transition process, the display screen is displayed on the 7-segment display unit history in response to the operation of the player on the selection determination unit 21 (selection button 21A and determination button 21B). A process of shifting from the selection screen to the fluctuation stop screen, the 1-time previous history screen, the 2-time previous history screen, or the 3 times previous history screen is executed (see FIG. 60). Here, FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the 7-segment history selection screen processing executed in the standby state screen transition processing of FIG. 62.

<Step S3201>
As shown in FIG. 63, in the 7-segment history selection screen processing, the MPU 51 first determines whether or not the second upper selection pattern flag is set to ON (step S3201). The second upper selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that the operation for the upper selection button 211 has started, and the upper selection operation detection executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination process in step S2804 in the operation detection process of FIG. 56. It is set to on in the pattern judgment process. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3202 when the second upper selection pattern flag is set to on (step S3201: Yes), and when the second upper selection pattern flag is set to off (step S3201:). No), the process proceeds to step S3203.

<Step S3202>
When the second upper selection pattern flag is set to on (step S3201: Yes), the MPU 51 performs a process of changing the temporarily selected item (temporary selection display) on the 7-segment display unit history selection screen to the upper side. Run. For example, if "History 2 (2 times before)" is temporarily selected before the 2nd upper selection pattern flag is set to ON, the temporary selection display is changed to "History 1 (1 time ago)". (See FIG. 60). If "History 1 (1 time ago)" displayed on the uppermost side of the option images is temporarily selected and an operation is performed on the upper selection button 211, the temporary selection display should not be changed. Alternatively, the temporary selection display may be changed to "end" displayed at the bottom of the option images (see FIG. 60).

<Step S3203>
When the second upper selection pattern flag is set to off (step S3201: No), that is, when the operation for the upper selection button 211 has not been started, the MPU 51 has the second lower selection pattern flag set to on. Whether or not it is determined (step S3203). The second lower selection pattern flag is a flag indicating that the operation for the lower selection button 212 has started, and the lower selection operation detection executed in the selection operation detection pattern determination process in step S2804 in the operation detection process of FIG. 56. It is set to on in the pattern judgment process. The MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3204 when the second lower selection pattern flag is set to on (step S3203: Yes), and when the second lower selection pattern flag is set to off (step S3203: Yes). No), the process proceeds to step S3205.

<Step S3204>
When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to on (step S3203: Yes), the MPU 51 is a process of changing the temporarily selected item (temporary selection display) on the 7-segment display unit history selection screen to the lower side. To execute. For example, if "History 2 (2 times before)" is temporarily selected before the 2nd upper selection pattern flag is set to ON, the temporary selection display is changed to "History 3 (3 times before)". (See FIG. 60). If the operation for the lower selection button 212 is performed when "End" displayed at the bottom of the option images is temporarily selected, the temporary selection display may not be changed, or the options may be selected. The temporary selection display may be changed to "History 1 (1 time ago)" displayed on the uppermost side of the image (see FIG. 60).

<Step S3205>
When the second lower selection pattern flag is set to off (step S3203: No), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the second determination operation pattern flag is set to on (step S3205). The second determination operation pattern flag is a flag indicating that the operation for the determination button 21B has been started, and is set to ON in the determination button operation detection pattern determination process executed in step S2806 in the operation detection process of FIG. 56. NS. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the operation for the decision button 21B has been performed when the display screen is the 7-segment display unit history selection screen. Then, when the second determination operation pattern flag is set to ON (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3206, and when the second determination operation pattern flag is set to OFF (step S3205: Yes). S3205: No), the standby state screen transition process is terminated.

<Steps S3206 and S3207>
When the second decision operation pattern flag is set to on (step S3205: Yes), the MPU 51 sets the 7-segment history screen flag to off (step S3206), and temporarily selects when the decision button 21B is operated. It is determined whether or not the item that has been set is "finished" (step S3207). The MPU 51 temporarily shifts the process to step S3208 when the item temporarily selected when the decision button 21B is operated is "end" (step S3207: Yes), and temporarily selects the item when the decision button 21B is operated. If the selected item is not "finished" (step S3207: No), the process proceeds to step S3210.

<Steps S3208 and S3209>
When the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is "end" (step S3207: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the 7-segment display unit history selection screen to the variable stop screen. (Step S3208) (see FIG. 60). Then, the MPU 51 sets the variable stop screen flag indicating that the display screen is the variable stop screen to on (step S3209), and ends the standby state screen transition process.

<Step S3210>
When the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is not "finished" (step S3207: No), the item temporarily selected in MPU 51 is "history 1 (one time ago)". Whether or not it is determined (step S3210). In the MPU 51, when the temporarily selected item is "History 1 (1 time before)" (step S3210: Yes), the process shifts to step S3211, and the temporarily selected item is "History 1 (1 time)". If it is not "previous)" (step S3210: No), the process proceeds to step S3213.

<Steps S3211 and S3212>
When the temporarily selected item is "History 1 (1 time ago)" (step S3210: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the 1 time previous history screen (step). S3211) (see FIG. 60), the previous history screen flag is set to on (step S3212), and the 7-segment history selection screen process is terminated.

<Step S3213>
When the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is not "History 1 (1 time ago)" (step S3210: No), the item temporarily selected in MPU51 is "History 2 (2)". It is determined whether or not it is (step S3213). In the MPU 51, when the tentatively selected item is "history 2 (twice before)" (step S3213: Yes), the process shifts to step S3214, and the tentatively selected item is "history 2 (twice)". If it is not "previous)" (step S3213: No), the process proceeds to step S3216.

<Steps S3214 and S3215>
When the temporarily selected item is "History 2 (2 times before)" (step S3213: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the display screen from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the 2 times previous history screen (step). S3214) (see FIG. 60), the previous history screen flag is set to on (step S3215), and the 7-segment history selection screen process is terminated.

<Steps S3216 and S3217>
When the item temporarily selected when the enter button 21B is operated is not "History 2 (two times before)" (step S3213: No), the item temporarily selected in MPU51 is "History 3 (3)". Since it can be determined that "previous times)", the display screen is shifted from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to the 3 times previous history screen (step S3216) (see FIG. 60), and the 3 times previous history screen flag is set to on. (Step S3217), the 7-segment history selection screen process is terminated.

In this way, in the 7-segment history screen executed in the standby state, the display screen is changed from the 7-segment display section history selection screen to any of the 1-time previous history screen, the 2-time previous history screen, and the 3-time previous history screen. Corresponds to each of the plurality of non-set values displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 according to the number of game balls 99 that have entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 for the predetermined period for the past three times. All or part of the specific information can be confirmed (see FIG. 60). Therefore, the player can reconfirm the past display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 when he / she misses or forgets the display contents of the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending of the jackpot game. When the player is replaced, the player after the replacement can check the display contents of the past 7-segment display unit 39. As a result, the player can specify or estimate a plurality of non-set values (set values) in consideration of the display contents of the past 7-segment display unit 39, so that the non-set values (set values) can be set. The convenience for identifying or guessing is improved.

In particular, in the standby state, the display screen is the history screen (one-time previous history screen) unless the player intentionally performs a screen transition operation unless the variable game is executed by launching the game ball 99. There is no transition to other screens such as the fluctuation stop screen from (2, 2 times previous history screen and 3 times previous history screen). Therefore, the player stops launching the game ball 99 and maintains the standby state without being subject to time restrictions such as when specific information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 at the ending of the jackpot game. By doing so, it is possible to carefully and carefully take time to check the specific information displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in the past at one's own pace. This allows the player to consider at his / her own pace when identifying or inferring a plurality of non-set values (set values) based on past specific information, and thus a plurality of non-set values (set values). Convenience for specifying or guessing the set value) is improved.

In the present embodiment, the past specific information on the 7-segment display unit 39, which can be displayed on the symbol display unit 341 by the player's operation (will) in the standby state, is the past three times for a predetermined period. However, there is no limit to the number of past specific information that can be displayed. That is, it may be possible to confirm specific information for a predetermined period of one time, two times, or four times or more in the past.

Further, the display of the past specific information is not limited to the symbol display unit 341, and may be performed by other display means as long as it has a display function. For example, the past specific information may be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, or may be separately provided for displaying a display unit different from the symbol display unit 341 or the 7-segment display unit 39, for example, past specific information. It may be a display unit. Further, if there is a display unit provided for executing a part of the effect such as the variable game effect in addition to the symbol display unit 341, the past information may be displayed on the display unit. Conceivable.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same design changes as those in the above-mentioned first to third embodiments can be made within the applicable range.

[Fifth Embodiment]
In the first embodiment described above, each of the plurality of non-set values (set values) corresponds to each of the plurality of non-set values (set values) after the elapse of the specific period (ending of the jackpot game) based on the number of times the specific conditions are satisfied in the specific period. The case where all or a part of the specific information is presented to the 7-segment display unit 39 and the presentation of the specific information on the 7-segment display unit 39 ends with the end of the jackpot game has been described. That is, in the above-mentioned first embodiment, each time the specific period set in the predetermined period elapses, the specific information is displayed in the specified period set after the elapse of the specific period.

By the way, when displaying numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values on the 7-segment display unit 39, all the segments A to G of the 7-segment display unit 39 are controlled targets, so that the numbers are displayed (non-set). (Set value) can be specified. Further, the numbers to be displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be grasped before all the segments A to G are controlled. For example, when segments A to G are controlled in the order of segment A → segment B → segment C → segment D → segment E → segment F → segment G, the first control target, segment A, is turned off. The candidates for the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 are "1" and "4". Then, when the sixth control target segment F is turned on, it can be recognized as "4", and when the segment F is turned off, it can be recognized as "1". That is, the numbers "1" or "4" can be recognized at the stage when the sixth control target, the segment F, before all the segments A to G are the control targets, is the control target. Further, when the segment A, which is the first control target, is turned on, the numerical candidates displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 are "2", "3", "5", and "6". Then, when the second control target segment B is turned on, it can be determined that it is either "2" or "3", and when the segment B is turned off, "5" and "" It can be determined that it is one of 6 ”. Further, when the third control target segment C is turned on, it can be recognized as “3”, and when the segment C is turned off, it can be recognized as “2”. That is, the number "2" or "3" can be recognized at the stage when the third control target, the segment C, before all the segments A to G are the control targets, is the control target. Further, when the fifth control target segment E is turned on, it can be recognized as “6”, and when the segment E is turned off, it can be recognized as “5”. That is, the number "5" or "6" can be recognized at the stage when the fifth control target, the segment E, before all the segments A to G are the control targets, is the control target. That is, the numbers "2" and "3" can be recognized at the stage when the third control target segment C is turned on or off, and the numbers "5" and "6" are the fifth control target segments. The numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when E is turned on or off, and the numbers "1" and "4" can be recognized when the sixth control target segment F is turned on or off.

However, in the above-described first embodiment, the segments A to G are controlled in order to display the next display target number after all the segments A to G are controlled targets. Therefore, even if the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 can be recognized before all the segments A to G are controlled, the next display must be performed after all the segments A to G are controlled. Control of segments A to G for displaying the target number is not started. Therefore, even if the player recognizes the numbers displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 before all the segments A to G are controlled, the display of the numbers to be displayed next is started. Up to, the information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 in order to identify the numbers already recognized by the player. That is, when the segments A to G are controlled to display the next number to be displayed after all the segments A to G are controlled, the information unnecessary for the player is the 7-segment display unit 39. In the period when such unnecessary information is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39, there is a concern that interest in the game may decrease.

Further, in the first embodiment described above, since the 7-segment display unit 39 is controlled at the ending of the jackpot game every time a specific period set for the jackpot game elapses, it corresponds to each of a plurality of non-set values. All or part of the numbers (specific information) to be displayed are dispensed every time a specific period elapses. Therefore, if a number corresponding to any of the non-set values is displayed in the specific period that has passed earlier, it is assumed that the number is forgotten. In this case, it becomes difficult to specify or estimate the set value from a plurality of non-set values.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in the non-set value display means (lamp display unit) having a plurality of information display units (six individual lamp units) having a number of non-set values (5) or more, each information display unit. Information (number) that identifies the non-set value is displayed. Each information display unit has two modes, a display state in which specific information is presented (lighting state) and a non-display state in which specific information is not presented (light-off state). The non-set value can be specified by the specific information displayed on the information display unit. By setting the information display unit to either of the two modes of the display state and the non-display state in this way, the non-set value can be specified by the specific information presented to the information display unit in the display state. That is, in the present embodiment, only the information that can specify the non-set value is displayed as the specific information, and the information that can guess the non-set value is not displayed. Therefore, after the specific information that can identify one non-setting value is presented, the specific information for estimating the non-setting value is not unnecessarily presented, so that the unnecessary specific information is presented. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game.

The non-set value display means is not particularly limited, but for example, a display device having a plurality of lamp groups capable of turning on and off individually, a display device having a plurality of 7-segment display units, a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, and dots. Matrix display, plasma display and the like can be mentioned. Further, as the non-set value display means, it is conceivable to use a display means in which the decorative pattern is displayed in a variable manner.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of information display units corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period is displayed, and at least a specific period is reached until the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set ends. The information display unit that was previously displayed is displayed. For example, an information display unit that has been in the display state in the previous specific period in the same predetermined period is also in the display state in the specific period after the predetermined period. In this way, the information display unit that has been in the display state in the previous specific period in the same predetermined period is also in the display state in the specific period after the predetermined period, so that at least in the specific period at any time in the predetermined period. But you can check it. Therefore, the specific information displayed in the previous specific period in the same predetermined period is not forgotten, and it is convenient when specifying a plurality of non-set values based on the specific information, and by extension, when specifying or estimating the set value. Sex is improved.

The information display unit that has been in the display state in a specific period may be maintained in the display state at all times until the end of the jackpot game in which the predetermined period and the end of the predetermined period are set, and only during the jackpot game. The display state may be maintained, or the display state may be maintained only for a specific period.

In an example of the present embodiment, in a lamp display unit having six individual lamp display units with any number from 1 to 6, a game ball enters a special out ball mouth of the crune device during a specific period. By winning the lamp lighting lottery that is executed as a trigger, it is not necessary to wait for the passage of a specific period, and when the lamp lighting lottery is won, the individual lamp display with the number corresponding to the non-set value is attached. The unit is lit. Then, in the predetermined period in which the specific period is set, the lighting state is maintained until the jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set ends.

Hereinafter, the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 64 to 71, focusing on the differences from the first embodiment described above. It should be noted that FIGS. 69 to 71 are views showing a modification of the present embodiment.

Here, FIG. 64 is a front view showing an example of the game board 31 of the game machine 10 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 65 is a block diagram showing an example of the system configuration of the game machine 10 shown in FIG. 64. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing an example of turning on and off the lamp display unit 35.

As shown in FIG. 64, the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment is provided with a special out-ball discharging portion 38A in place of the gaming ball retention portion 38 of the first embodiment described above, and the first embodiment described above is provided. A lamp display unit 35 is provided on the game board 31 instead of the 7-segment display unit 39 in the embodiment.

The special out ball discharging unit 38A discharges the game ball 99 inserted into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 to the back side of the game board 31. The special out ball discharging portion 38A has a configuration in which the stopper portion 383 is omitted in the game ball retaining portion 38 of the first embodiment described above, and the game ball retaining portion 38 is provided except that the stopper portion 383 is omitted. It has the same configuration as. In such a special out ball discharging unit 38A, the game ball 99 entered in the special out ball mouth 373 is discharged to the back side of the game board 31 without staying (stopping) in the special out ball discharging unit 38A. Will be done. Therefore, the game ball 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 373 is not detected by the special out ball sensor 384 after the elapse of the specific period as in the first embodiment described above, but is during the specific period. However, every time the game ball 99 is inserted into the special out ball mouth 373, it is detected by the special out ball sensor 384.

The lamp display unit 35 presents specific information for specifying a non-set value, and a plurality of (six) individual lamp units (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356) that can be individually turned on and off. including. The first to sixth individual lamp portions 351 to 556 are arranged side by side in a row (linear) in the left-right direction. As shown in FIG. 65, the lamp display unit 35 is connected to the input / output I / F 52 of the voice lamp control device 5. As a result, as can be understood from FIG. 66, the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 556 can be individually turned on and off.

A number 1 is attached to the first individual lamp unit 351. When the first individual lamp unit 351 is turned on, one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 1, and the game set value is set as the set value. 1 is denied. The number 2 is attached to the second individual lamp unit 352, and when the second individual lamp unit 352 is turned on, one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 2, and the game set value is set as the set value. 2 is denied. The number 3 is attached to the third individual lamp unit 353, and when the third individual lamp unit 353 is turned on, one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 3, and the game set value is set as the set value. 3 is denied. The number 4 is attached to the fourth individual lamp unit 354, and when the fourth individual lamp unit 354 is turned on, one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 4, and the game set value is set as the set value. 4 is denied. The number 5 is attached to the fifth individual lamp unit 355, and when the fifth individual lamp unit 355 is turned on, one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 5, and the game set value is set as the set value. 5 is denied. The number 6 is attached to the sixth individual lamp unit 356, and when the sixth individual lamp unit 356 is turned on, one of the plurality of non-set values is the game set value 6, and the game set value is set as the set value. 6 is denied.

That is, in the lamp display unit 35, the numbers attached to the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are in the lit state correspond to a plurality of non-set values, and the game set value corresponding to the number is denied as the set value. NS. Then, when the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to all (five) non-set values are turned on, one individual lamp unit 351 to 356 corresponding to the set value is turned off and turned off. The numbers corresponding to one individual lamp unit 351 to 356 in the state correspond to the set value.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66 (A), when the second to fifth individual lamp units 352 to 356 are turned on and only the first individual lamp unit 351 is turned off, the non-set value is 2 to 2. It is 6 and it is specified that the set value is 1. As shown in FIG. 66 (B), when the first, third to sixth individual lamp units 351 and 353 to 356 are turned on and only the second individual lamp 352 is turned off, the non-set value is 1. It is specified that the value is 3 to 6 and the set value is 2. As shown in FIG. 66 (C), when the first, second, fourth to sixth individual lamp units 351 and 352, 354 to 356 are turned on and only the third individual lamp 353 is turned off, it is not. It is specified that the set value is 1, 2, 4 to 6, and the set value is 3. As shown in FIG. 66 (D), when the 1st to 3rd, 5th, and 6th individual lamp units 351 to 53, 355, 356 are turned on and only the 4th individual lamp unit 354 is turned off, it is not. It is specified that the set values are 1, 3, 5, and 6 and the set value is 4. As shown in FIG. 66 (E), when the 1st to 4th and 6th individual lamp units 351 to 354 and 356 are turned on and only the 5th individual lamp unit 355 is turned off, the non-set value is 1 to 1. It is 4 and 6, and it is specified that the set value is 5. As shown in FIG. 66 (F), when the 1st to 5th individual lamp units 351 to 355 are turned on and only the 6th individual lamp unit 356 is turned off, the non-set value is 1 to 5 and is set. A value of 6 is specified. The first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 556 of the lamp display unit 35 are controlled in the set value suggestion process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34.

[Set value suggestion processing]
In the set value suggestion processing of the present embodiment, control for turning on and off the lamp display units 35 (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356) is executed, and the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 556 The set value is suggested by specifying the non-set value according to the lighting state or the extinguishing state of. Here, FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing an example of the procedure of the set value suggestion process executed in the sub-timer interrupt process of FIG. 34. In the set value suggestion processing of the present embodiment, control for turning on and off the lamp display units 35 (first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356) is executed, and the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 556 The set value is suggested by specifying the non-set value according to the lighting state or the extinguishing state of. Hereinafter, the procedure of the set value suggestion processing will be described with reference to FIG. 67.

<Step S3301>
As shown in FIG. 67, in step S3301, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the ending effect start flag is set to ON. The ending effect start flag is a flag for starting the ending effect, and is set to be turned on in step S2116 in the command determination process of FIG. 37. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not it is the timing when the ending effect is started by the ending effect start flag. Here, when the ending effect start flag is on (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3302, and when the ending effect start flag is off (step S3301: No), the process is performed in step S3311. Move to.

<Step S3302>
When the ending effect start flag is on (step S3301: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the special out ball detection flag is set to on (step S3302). The special out-ball detection flag is a flag indicating that the game ball has been detected by the special out-ball sensor 384, and is set to on in step S2114 in the command determination process of FIG. 37. Here, the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3303 when the special out-ball detection flag is on (step S3302: Yes), and when the special out-ball detection flag is off (step S3302: No), the setting is made. The value suggestion processing ends.

<Step S3303>
When the special out ball detection flag is on (step S3302: Yes), that is, when it is detected that the game ball 99 has entered the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are set. A lottery will be held to turn on the lamp. That is, every time the game ball 99 is inserted into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37, a lamp lighting lottery is performed to determine whether or not to light the individual lamp units 351 to 356.

By the way, in the first embodiment described above, five numbers corresponding to a plurality of non-set values are displayed on the 7-segment display unit 39 by the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of a predetermined period is set. This makes the set value recognizable. Then, in the 7-segment display unit 39, in order to display the five numbers, it is necessary to control the seven segments A to G five times each, so that the specific condition is 35 times (7 × 5 times). ) It is necessary to hold the above. That is, it is necessary to insert 35 game balls 99 into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 in a predetermined period.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the information corresponding to the non-set value is displayed by the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35, and the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are in the lit state. It is controlled only in two modes, that is, the state of turning off the light and the state of turning off the light. Therefore, in order for the lamp display unit 35 to display the five non-set values in order to make the set values recognizable, it is sufficient that the specific conditions are satisfied five times or more. Further, in the present embodiment, the same crune device 37 as in the first embodiment described above is adopted. Therefore, when specific conditions for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356 are set in the same manner as in the first embodiment described above, the five individual lamp units 351 to 556 displaying non-set values It is clear that it will be turned on with a small number of jackpots.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, as a specific condition for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356, in addition to the game ball 99 being inserted into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37. , It is a condition that you win the lamp lighting lottery. In other words, by adopting the lamp lighting lottery, the difficulty of satisfying a specific condition is adjusted, and the difficulty of specifying all of the plurality of non-set values is adjusted. As a result, the difficulty level of lighting the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that display the numbers corresponding to the non-set values of the lamp display unit 35 is adjusted, and the five non-set values can be easily specified. That is, it is prevented that the set value is easily recognized.

Then, as for the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery, the difficulty level for controlling the lighting of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 is displayed by the seven-segment display unit 39 in the first embodiment described above. It is set to be the same as or substantially the same as the difficulty level for. Further, the winning probabilities in the lamp lighting lottery may be the same winning probabilities for the five individual lamp units 351 to 556 corresponding to the plurality of non-set values, or for at least one individual lamp unit 351 to 556. The winning probability may be different from other individual lamp units 351 to 356.

If the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is set to be the same for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356, the game property that the probability that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit corresponding to the non-set values is stabilized is given. NS. When the winning probabilities are set to be the same for the five individual lamp units 351 to 356, for example, the winning probabilities are set to about 100 × (1/7)% (= 14.3%) (for example, 10% or more and 20% or less). Will be done. This is because, in the first embodiment described above, one number is displayed by the 7-segment display unit 39 when seven game balls 99 are inserted into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37. Also in this embodiment, when seven game balls 99 are inserted into the special out ball mouth 373, about one individual lamp unit 351 to 356 is turned on on average. When the winning probabilities in the lamp lighting lottery are set to be the same for the five individual lamp units 351 to 556 corresponding to a plurality of non-set values, the winning probabilities are not limited to 10% or more and 20% or less, and are appropriately set. It can be changed.

Further, the lottery condition that triggers the execution of the lamp lighting lottery for lighting one individual lamp unit 351 to 356 of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to a plurality of non-set values is a special condition of the crune device 37. If it is a different lottery condition that the game ball 99 enters the out ball mouth 373, the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery may be set according to the degree of difficulty in satisfying the lottery condition. That is, when the difficulty of establishing the lottery condition is low, the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is set low, and the higher the difficulty of establishing the lottery condition, the higher the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery is considered. Be done. By setting the winning probability in the lamp lighting lottery according to the difficulty of establishing the lottery condition in this way, the difficulty of establishing the specific condition necessary for lighting one individual lamp unit 351 to 356 is specified. It can be made uniform regardless of the type of condition. This makes it possible to apply various conditions as specific conditions (to be exact, as a lottery opportunity).

On the other hand, if the winning probability for at least one individual lamp unit 351-356 is different from that for the other individual lamp units 351 to 356, the probability that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set value will be lit varies. Gender is given. When the winning probability for at least one individual lamp unit 351 to 356 is different from that for the other individual lamp units 351 to 356, for example, it is conceivable to set the winning probability to be lower for the individual lamp units 351 to 356 with a slower control order. As an example, the winning probabilities are set to 25%, 20%, 15%, 10%, and 5% in order from the individual lamp units 351 to 356, which have the earliest control order.

<Step S3304>
In step S3304, the MPU 51 determines whether or not the lamp lighting lottery has been won. When the MPU 51 has won the lamp lighting lottery (step S3304: Yes), the process proceeds to step S3305, and when the lamp lighting lottery has not been won (step S3304: No), the set value processing ends. ..

<Step S3305>
When the lamp lighting lottery is won (step S3304: Yes), the MPU 51 reads out the already lit lamp information (step S3305).

Here, the already lit lamp information is information relating to the individual lamp units 351 to 356 being lit, and includes the already lit lamp flag information as shown in FIGS. 68 (B) and 68 (C). The already lit lamp flag information includes a first already lit lamp flag indicating whether or not the first individual lamp unit 351 is lit, and a second already lit lamp flag indicating whether or not the second individual lamp unit 352 is lit. , The third already lit lamp flag indicating whether or not the third individual lamp unit 353 is lit, the fourth already lit lamp flag indicating whether or not the fourth individual lamp unit 354 is lit, and the fifth individual lamp unit. It is composed of a fifth already lit lamp flag indicating whether or not 355 is lit, and a sixth already lit lamp flag indicating whether or not the sixth individual lamp unit 356 is lit. Each already lit lamp flag is set to on when the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit, and is set to off when the individual lamps are off. In the example shown in FIG. 68 (B), all the already lit lamp flags are set to off (initial state), and all of the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 556 are turned off. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 68C, the second already lit lamp flag is set to on, the first, third to sixth already lit lamp flags are set to off, and the second individual lamp unit 352 is set. Is lit, indicating that the first, third to sixth individual lamp units 351 and 353 to 356 are off.

<Step S3306>
In step S3306, the MPU 51 determines whether or not all the already lit lamp flags are set to ON in the already lit lamp information. That is, the MPU 51 determines whether or not all the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that specify the non-set value are lit. Then, when all the already lit lamp flags are set to ON in the already lit lamp information (step S3306: Yes), the MPU 51 ends the set value suggestion process. That is, when all the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that specify the non-set value are lit, the set value suggestion process is terminated because there is no other individual lamp unit 351 to 356 to be lit. On the other hand, when there is an already lit lamp flag set to off in the already lit lamp information (step S3306: No), the process proceeds to step S3307.

<Step S3307>
When there is an already lit lamp flag set to off in the already lit lamp information (step S3306: No), the MPU 51 reads out the control order (lamp control order) of the individual lamps (step S3307).

Here, the lamp control order is set by, for example, the same procedure as the display order setting process (see FIG. 35) of the first embodiment described above. That is, the lamp control order is determined with reference to the lamp control order determination table based on the set value stored in the RAM 412 when the power is turned on or the set value is changed. This lamp control order determination table is the same as the number display order determination table (see FIG. 36) in the first embodiment described above, and if the numbers in the number display order determination table are considered as numbers attached to individual lamps, good. The number 1 in the number display order determination table in the first embodiment described above corresponds to the first individual lamp unit 351 and similarly, in the number display order determination table in the first embodiment described above. The numbers 2 to 6 correspond to the second to sixth individual lamp units 352 to 356, respectively. For example, as shown in FIG. 68 (A), when the display order A1 is determined when the set value is 1, the control order of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is changed from the second individual lamp unit 352 to the third individual lamp unit 352. Lamp unit 353 → 4th individual lamp unit 354 → 5th individual lamp unit 355 → 6th individual lamp unit 356. Further, in the number display order determination table in the first embodiment described above, the probability that each display order is selected is the same, and in the lamp control order determination table in the present embodiment, each lamp control order is also selected. The probability of being done is the same.

The lamp control order may be set when the power is turned on or when the set value is changed, but it may be set when a predetermined period is started. Also, the ramp control order does not have to have the same probability of being selected.

<Steps S3308 to S3310>
In step S3308, the MPU 51 determines the individual lamp units 351 to 356 to be controlled based on the lamp control order read in step S3305 and the already lit lamp information read in step S3307 (step S3308), and the individual lamps are determined. The lamp units 351 to 356 are turned on (step S3309). That is, a lamp lighting lottery is executed every time the game ball 99 is inserted into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37, and when the lamp lighting lottery is won, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit. Specific information indicating the non-set value is presented. Then, the MPU 51 updates the already lit lamp information (step S3310), and ends the set value suggestion process. For example, when the second individual lamp unit 352 is lit when all the already lit lamp flags are set to off (initial state) as in the example shown in FIG. 68 (B), the already lit lamp information is shown in FIG. As shown in 68 (C), the second already lit lamp flag corresponding to the second individual lamp unit 352 is set to on.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the lamp lighting lottery is executed every time the game ball 99 is inserted into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37, and when the lamp lighting lottery is won, the individual lamp units 351 to 351 The non-set value can be specified by turning on 356. That is, in the present embodiment, the non-set value can be specified by turning on the individual lamp units 351 to 356 even before the lapse of the specific period. By setting the individual lamp units 351 to 356 in either of the two modes of the lit state and the extinguished state in this way, the non-set value can be specified by the numbers attached to the individual lamp units 351 to 356 in the lit state. be. That is, in the present embodiment, only the information that can specify the non-set value by lighting the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is presented, and the information that can estimate the non-set value is not presented. Therefore, after the specific information that can identify one non-setting value is presented, the specific information for estimating the non-setting value is not unnecessarily presented, so that the unnecessary specific information is presented. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game.

<Step S3311>
When the ending effect start flag is off (step S3301: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S3311). The jackpot game effect end flag is a flag for ending the jackpot game effect (ending effect), and is set to on in step S2118 of the command determination process of FIG. 37. Then, when the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3312, and when the jackpot game effect end flag is off (step S3311: No), the set value. End the suggestion process.

<Step S3312>
When the jackpot game effect end flag is on (step S3311: Yes), the MPU 51 determines whether or not the jackpot type to be terminated is a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312). Whether or not the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot can be determined based on whether or not the 5R normal jackpot flag, which can be set to be on in step S2103 of FIG. 37, is on. Then, when the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 shifts the process to step S3313, and when the jackpot type is not a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: No), the set value suggestion process is performed. finish.

<Steps S3313 and S3314>
When the jackpot type is a 5R normal jackpot (step S3312: Yes), the MPU 51 has an individual lamp unit 351-356 that is lit among the individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35, if any. The individual lamp units 351 to 356 are turned off (step S3313), the already lit lamp information is cleared (initialized), and the set value suggestion process is completed. That is, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 are turned off when the 5R normal jackpot for which the end of a predetermined period is set is set. As a result, the lit individual lamp units 351 to 356 are maintained in a lit state until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of a predetermined period is set. Therefore, it is possible to confirm that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit at any time until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set, that is, the specific information that specifies the non-set value is specified. .. Therefore, the previously presented specific information in the same predetermined period is not forgotten, and the convenience when specifying a plurality of non-set values based on the specific information and, by extension, when specifying or guessing the set value is improved. Will be done.

In this embodiment, it corresponds to the non-set value in the lamp display unit 35 when the lamp lighting lottery executed when the game ball 99 is entered into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 is won. Although the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are turned on, it is optional to perform the lamp lighting lottery, and the special out ball mouth 373 is played without performing the lamp lighting lottery as in the first embodiment described above. When the ball 99 is inserted, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 corresponding to the non-set value may be turned on. When the lamp lighting lottery is not performed in this way, the difficulty of the game ball 99 to the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37 is increased, or the game ball 99 entered into the special out ball mouth 373 is used as the special out ball sensor 384. It is conceivable to adjust the probability that the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are turned on by allocating the route detected by the lamp and the route not detected by the special out-ball sensor 384.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 that presents the non-set value are set to one of the two modes of the lit state and the extinguished state, and the individual lamp unit 351 is in the lit state. Information that identifies the non-set value is presented by the type (number) of ~ 356. That is, in the present embodiment, only the information that can specify the non-set value by lighting the individual lamp units 351 to 356 is presented, and the information that can estimate the non-set value is not presented. Therefore, after the specific information that can identify one non-setting value is presented, the specific information for estimating the non-setting value is not unnecessarily presented, so that the unnecessary specific information is presented. This prevents a decrease in interest in the game.

Further, the lit individual lamp units 351 to 356 are immediately lit by winning the lamp lighting lottery executed when the game ball 99 is inserted into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37. The lit individual lamp units 351 to 356 are maintained in a lit state until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of a predetermined period is set. Therefore, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot game in which the end of the predetermined period is set is completed, the specific information for specifying the non-set value is confirmed at any time based on whether or not the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit. be able to. Therefore, the specific information presented in the previous specific period in the same predetermined period is not forgotten, and it is convenient when specifying a plurality of non-set values based on the specific information, and by extension, when specifying or estimating the set value. Sex is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, as a specific condition for controlling the first to sixth individual lamp units 351 to 356, in addition to the game ball 99 being inserted into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37. , It is a condition that you win the lamp lighting lottery. As a result, the difficulty of establishing a specific condition is adjusted by the winning probability of the lamp lighting lottery, and the difficulty of specifying all of the plurality of non-set values is adjusted. Therefore, the difficulty level of lighting each of the five individual lamp units 351 to 356 that display the numbers corresponding to the non-set values of the lamp display unit 35 is adjusted, and the five non-set values can be easily specified. That is, it is prevented that the set value is easily recognized.

It should be noted that the lamp lighting lottery, which is executed when the game ball 99 is inserted into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37, is immediately lit by winning the lamp lighting lottery, but the lamp lighting lottery is executed ( The game ball 99 has been inserted into the special out ball mouth 373) and the result of the lamp lighting lottery may be clearly shown to the player by a display means other than the lamp display unit 35. For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), it is clearly shown to the player that the lamp lighting lottery is executed (the game ball 99 is inserted into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37), and FIG. 69 The result of the lamp lighting lottery is clearly shown to the player as shown in (B1) or FIG. 69 (B2), and the individual lamp units 351 to 556 are further lit as shown in FIG. 69 (C1) or FIG. 69 (C2). Information about the above is clearly shown on the symbol display unit 341. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 69 (A), when the game ball 99 is inserted into the special out ball mouth 373 of the crune device 37, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the lamp display unit 35 are lit. An image for focusing on the possibility, that is, the lamp display unit 35 (roulette) is displayed. In this way, by clearly indicating that the lamp lighting lottery is executed by the symbol display unit 341 (the game ball 99 has been inserted into the special out ball mouth 373), the game ball 99 is inserted into the special out ball mouth 373. Even if it is overlooked that the ball has been inserted, the game ball 99 has been inserted into the special out ball mouth 373 according to the image displayed on the symbol display unit 341, that is, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 It is possible to grasp that there is a possibility of being turned on.

Then, when the lamp lighting lottery is won, as shown in FIG. 69 (B1), information regarding the individual lamp units 351 to 356 to be in the lighting state is clearly shown. In the illustrated example, it is clearly shown that the second individual lamp unit 352 is turned on. In this way, by clearly indicating the result of the lamp lighting lottery on the symbol display unit 341, it is possible to grasp whether or not the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are lit not only on the lamp display unit 35 but also on the symbol display unit 341. Convenience is improved because it becomes possible.

Further, as shown in FIG. 69 (C1), in the symbol display unit 341, information regarding the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are lit is continuously clearly indicated during the execution of the jackpot game (at least during the execution of the open / close execution mode). Will be done. That is, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 of the individual lamp unit 35 that is lit are displayed on the symbol display unit 341. In addition, until the end of the 5R normal jackpot, for which the end of the predetermined period is set, is completed, for example, in the jackpot game (at least the opening / closing execution mode), the information regarding the individually lit individual lamp units 351 to 356 may be displayed. ..

On the other hand, when the result of the lamp lighting lottery is non-winning, an image indicating that the result of the lamp lighting lottery is non-winning is displayed as shown in FIG. 69 (B1). In this way, during the execution of the jackpot game (at least during the execution of the open / close execution mode), the symbol display unit 341 continuously clearly indicates the information regarding the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are lit, so that the lamp display unit 35 can be displayed. Since it is not necessary to confirm, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that are lit can also be confirmed on the symbol display unit 341, which improves convenience.

Further, the specific information indicating the non-set value may be presented only on the symbol display unit 341 instead of the lamp display unit 35 provided separately from the symbol display unit 341. That is, the specific information may be presented to the player only by the effect on the symbol display unit 341 regarding the lamp lighting lottery in the jackpot game (open / close execution mode) described with reference to FIG. 69.

Further, also in the present embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment described above, in the ending effect of the jackpot game, the ending additional image for specifying the non-set value may be displayed on the symbol display unit 341. .. For example, as shown in FIG. 70, in the ending of the jackpot game, an image imitating the lamp display unit 35 is displayed on the symbol display unit 341 as an ending additional image. In the example shown in FIG. 70 (A), it is clearly shown that only the second individual lamp unit 352 is lit in the lamp display unit 35, and in the example shown in FIG. 70 (B), the second to second lamp units 35 are lit. It is clearly shown that the sixth individual lamp unit 352 to 356 is turned on and only the first individual lamp unit 351 is turned off. In this way, by displaying the on-off state of the lamp display unit 35 by the symbol display unit 341 at the ending of the jackpot game, it is possible to confirm the on-off state of the individual lamp units 351 to 356 that were lit by the jackpot game. Therefore, convenience is improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 are arranged in a row (linear) as the lamp display unit 35, but the lamp display unit 35 is an individual lamp unit 351 to 356. The lamps are not limited to those arranged in a row, and other forms can be adopted. For example, a lamp display unit 35 in which individual lamp units 351 to 356 are arranged in a ring shape as shown in FIG. 71 (A) and a lamp display unit 35 arranged in a matrix as shown in FIG. 71 (B) are adopted. You can also do it. Further, as the lamp display unit 35, the individual lamp units 351 to 356 may be arranged in a staggered pattern.

Further, instead of the lamp display unit 35, a display device in which a plurality of 7-segment display devices are arranged in a row, a ring shape, a matrix shape, a staggered shape, or the like may be adopted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the same design changes as those in the above-mentioned first to fourth embodiments can be made within the applicable range.

[Outline of Invention]
Hereinafter, the outline of the invention extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described. In addition, in order to understand the correspondence between each appendix and each embodiment, the description may be given by adding a reference numeral or the like for convenience, but the invention relating to the appendix is limited to the specific configuration to which the reference numeral is attached. It's not a thing. Further, it is also possible to select and arbitrarily combine each configuration and each processing function described below.

[Appendix A1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A storage means (41) for storing each numerical information (game set value) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous judgment probabilities (big hit probabilities) different from each other, and
Selection means (41) for selecting each numerical information, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information, and
When a specific condition is satisfied, at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information is shown in a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. Display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) on display means (35, 39, 341), and
With
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A1, when a specific condition is satisfied, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the display means in a specified period. NS. As a result, the player can specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and can recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. be. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information and guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A2]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to Appendix A1, characterized in that it is present.

[Appendix A3]
The display control means (51) may cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to Appendix A1, characterized in that it is possible.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A2 or Appendix A3, not only specific information but also special information that does not show a plurality of types of numerical information or special information that shows a part of a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the display means. As a result, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical information can be inferred and enjoyed based on the special information, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A4]
The display means (35, 39, 341) has a plurality of display areas on which the specific information is displayed.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A2 or Appendix A3, wherein the display control means (51) displays the special information by a part of the plurality of display areas.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A4, special information is displayed by a part of a plurality of display areas of the display means on which specific information is displayed. That is, the display area of special information is shared with the display area of specific information. As a result, the specific information and the special information can be displayed by the common display means, so that the control for displaying the specific information and the special information can be simplified, and the configuration of the display means can also be simplified.

[Appendix A5]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A4, wherein the display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting regions (segments A to G) as the plurality of display regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A5, the display means has a plurality of light emitting regions. Such a display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip a display means for displaying specific information and special information while suppressing the complexity of the configuration of the gaming machine and the increase in the manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A6]
The display means (341) can display an image and can display an image.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A4, wherein the display control means (51) causes the display means (341) to display the specific information or the special information as an image.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A6, specific information and special information are displayed as images on the display means. Therefore, there are many choices of image types and display modes to be displayed as specific information and special information, and the specific information and special information can be displayed in various forms. This makes it possible to improve the player's interest in specifying or guessing the specific numerical information or the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information and the special information.

[Appendix A7]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A6, wherein the image display means (341) can display a variable display image in which a symbol (decorative symbol) suggesting or clearly indicating the result of the transition determination is variablely displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A7, specific information and special information are displayed in an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of a symbol that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when a variable display image is displayed on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed by using the image display means. As a result, the specific image is displayed by using the display means necessary for the gaming machine without separately providing the display means for displaying the specific information and the special information, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A8]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A7, wherein the specified period is set to a period for suggesting or clearly indicating the result of the transition determination.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A8, when a specific condition is satisfied, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information is displayed on the display means, and the predetermined period indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means. It is set to a period during which the results are suggested or specified. Therefore, it is possible to display specific information together with the result of the transition determination. For example, when the image display means displays a variable display image of a symbol that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination, the image display means can simultaneously display specific information. This makes it possible to improve the interest in suggesting or clarifying the result of the transition determination by displaying specific information.

[Appendix A9]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A3, wherein the specific condition is satisfied when the game ball passes through the specific area (373).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A9, since a specific condition can be established when the specific condition passes through the specific area, the player can easily grasp that the specific condition is satisfied. This makes it more enjoyable as to whether or not certain conditions are met. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the display control means controls the specific information displayed on the display means. Therefore, even in a situation where the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the game playability by paying attention to whether or not the game ball passes through a specific area.

[Appendix A10]
A discharge port (373) for discharging the game ball is further provided on the back side of the game board (31) on which the game ball is launched.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A9, wherein the specific area is the discharge port (373).

[Appendix A11]
It also has multiple winning openings (313-316) where prize balls are paid out by entering a game ball.
The discharge port (373) includes a first discharge port (318) for discharging a game ball that has not been entered into the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board (31), and the first discharge port (318). Includes a second outlet (373) that is different from the first outlet (318).
The gaming machine according to Appendix A10, wherein the specific area is the second discharge port (373).

[Appendix A12]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A11, wherein the second discharge port (373) is capable of entering a ball in the special game.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices A10 to A12, when a specific condition is satisfied when the gaming ball passes through the second discharge port where the gaming ball can enter in the special game, the specific information displayed on the display means is displayed. The displayed contents are controlled. Therefore, in a special game in which the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the game playability by paying attention to whether or not the game ball is inserted into the second discharge port.

[Appendix A13]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special game.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A12, wherein the second discharge port (373) allows a game ball that has passed through the variable winning port (316) to pass through.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A13, when a specific condition is satisfied when the gaming ball passes through the second discharge port through which the gaming ball that has entered the variable winning opening in the special game can pass, the display means is used. The display content of the specific information to be displayed is controlled. Therefore, in the special game, the game ball can be passed through the second discharge port by launching the game ball into the game area and letting the game ball win the variable winning port. Therefore, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means without requiring a special skill only by advancing the game as usual in the special game. As a result, it is possible to avoid playing a game on the gaming machine because a skill difference may occur as compared with a case where a skill difference may occur due to a game ball entering the second discharge port. Be prevented.

[Appendix A14]
The third discharge port (378), which is different from the second discharge port (373), allows the game ball that has entered the variable winning port (316) to pass through.
A distribution means (37) for distributing the game ball entered into the variable winning port (316) to either the second discharge port (373) or the third discharge port (378).
The gaming machine according to Appendix A13, further comprising.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A14, since the game balls are distributed to the second discharge port and the third discharge port by the distribution means, it depends on the distribution of the game balls by the distribution means as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied. The playability is given. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the game ball in the sorting means regarding whether or not a specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix A15]
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which the start of the special game is set. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A3, which is a feature.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A15, when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which the start of the special game is set, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying the specific numerical information, and eventually guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. .. Then, by setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, the game can be enjoyed by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix A16]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified. Usually a big hit) and
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. The second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode), is included.
The beginning of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state. Pachinko machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A16, the result of the transition determination is the special game in the first gaming state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determination means is lower than that in the second gaming state. It is set as a special game to be transferred when it is to be transferred to. That is, the beginning of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first hit special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each initial hit regardless of whether it is a single shot or a consecutive villa, so specific numerical information and thus specific numerical information are estimated or specified for each initial hit. Opportunity is guaranteed at least once.

[Appendix A17]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that give the player a game value.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A15 or Appendix A16, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A17, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, is the specific condition satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started? You can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not it is.

[Appendix A18]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A15 to Supplementary A17, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A18, the end of a predetermined period is set as a special gaming. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game may be reduced. On the other hand, by setting the end of the special game in addition to the start of the predetermined period, the interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is improved.

[Appendix A19]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified. Usually a big hit) and
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. The second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode), is included.
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine according to Appendix A18.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A19, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special gaming state in which the transition to the first gaming state is performed after the end of the special gaming. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, when the first hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, it is executed in the first special gaming state. The predetermined period ends in the special game to be played. On the other hand, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state is set. When the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without ending the predetermined period in the special game to be executed, the game is executed in the first special game state. The predetermined period ends in the special game. That is, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive villa ends. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive villa, a predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive villa. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that the number of times a specific condition is satisfied per consecutive villa is higher than that per single shot, and the greater the number of consecutive villas per consecutive villa, the higher the number of times a specific condition is satisfied. Become. As a result, the player can not only increase the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive villas increases, but also obtain a large amount of specific information indicating specific numerical information, and guess or guess the specific numerical information and thus the predetermined numerical information. You can get the benefit of being easier to identify.

[Appendix A20]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that give the player a game value.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A18 or Appendix A19, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set after the end of the value-adding game.

By the way, from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game, the game value is not given and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A20, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, By utilizing the blank period for the player, it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in a special game.

[Appendix A21]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A3, wherein the specified period is set to the execution period of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A21, specific information indicating specific numerical information when a specific condition is satisfied is displayed on the display means in a specified period set as the execution period of the special game. As a result, the player can enjoy specifying the specific numerical information and, by extension, guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the execution period (specified period) of the special game. The fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix A22]
The special game includes a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that give the player a game value, and an ending executed after the end of the value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode). Have
The gaming machine according to Appendix A21, wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game, the game value is not given and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Appendix A22, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, if a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, By utilizing the blank period for the player, it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in a special game.

[Appendix A23]
The display control means (51) displays specific information (numbers) indicating at least the specific numerical information (non-set value) in the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. Displayed on 39, 341)
The gaming machine according to Appendix A21 or Appendix A22, wherein the specified period is set at least after the lapse of the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A23, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed after the lapse of the predetermined period. Therefore, the player enjoys the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, and enjoys the game by paying attention to the specific information displayed on the display means after the elapse of the predetermined period. Can be done. As a result, the interest of the game in a series of periods from the start of the predetermined period to the elapse of the predetermined period until the specific information is displayed is improved.

[Appendix A24]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that give the player a game value.
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified. Usually a big hit) and
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. The second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode), is included.
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state.
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A21 to Supplementary A23.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A24, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the special gaming state, which is shifted when the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state in the first gaming state. Will be done. That is, the beginning of the predetermined period is set to the special game which is the first hit. On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state in which the specific game is changed to the first game state after the end of the specific game in the special game state. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the last special game to be executed regardless of whether it is the first hit or the consecutive villa hit. In this way, the predetermined period is started with the first hit as an opportunity, the end is set for the special game to be executed at the end, and the specific information is displayed on the display means after the lapse of the predetermined period. As a result, it is possible to impart a game property of presenting specific information indicating specific numerical information to the player by effectively utilizing the period during which the special game is executed. Further, in the case of a consecutive villa, it is possible to collectively present a number (amount) of information corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied per consecutive villa after a lapse of a predetermined period. Therefore, the player can confirm a lot of information about the specific information in a short period of time after the elapse of the predetermined period. Therefore, the specific numerical information, and eventually the predetermined numerical information, is based on the specific information indicating the specific numerical information. Convenience when identifying or guessing is improved.

[Appendix A25]
The predetermined period includes a specific period set for the special game that starts within the predetermined period.
The specified period is set after the lapse of the specific period,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific period. The gaming machine described in.

The gaming machine according to Appendix A25 includes a specific period set for a special game started within a predetermined period. That is, when a plurality of special games are started in a predetermined period such as per consecutive villa, a plurality of special periods are set according to the number of special games started in the predetermined period. In addition, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means after the lapse of a specific period. Therefore, if there are multiple specific periods in a predetermined period, it is determined whether the specific conditions are satisfied for each specific period, and if the specific conditions are satisfied in the specific period, it is specified each time the specific period elapses. The information is displayed on the display means. As a result, it is possible to focus on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each special game, and if the specific condition is satisfied, the specific information displayed on the display means can be focused on. Can be improved.

[Appendix A26]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that give the player a game value, and an ending executed after the end of the value-adding game.
The specific period includes a period during which the value-adding game is executed.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A25, wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A26, it is determined whether or not the specific conditions are satisfied for each specific period including the value-adding game, and after the value-adding game is completed when the specific conditions are satisfied in the specific period. Specific information is displayed at the ending to be executed. Therefore, in the value-adding game, attention can be paid to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, and if the specific condition is satisfied, the content of the specific information can be focused on in the ending after the end of the value-adding game. As a result, the playability of displaying specific information can be imparted by effectively utilizing the ending of the special game, and the progress of the game can be focused on as a whole of the special game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A27]
The specific condition is that the game ball passes through the specific area (373) and wins the display lottery executed when the game ball passes through the specific area (373).
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A21 to Appendix A26, wherein the specified period is after winning the display lottery.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A27, specific information is displayed on the display means by winning a display lottery executed when the gaming ball passes through the specific area. By performing the display lottery as a condition for displaying the specific information on the display means in this way, whether or not the display lottery is won when the game ball passes through the specific area (whether or not the specific information is displayed). Because you can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to (?), The interest of the game is improved. Further, when the display lottery is performed as a condition for displaying specific information on the display means, it becomes easy to adjust the difficulty level and variation (difficulty level and variation for displaying specific information) in which the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, various playability can be imparted with respect to the display of specific information according to the winning probability in the display lottery, the lottery method, and the like.

[Appendix A28]
When a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display control means (51) provides the specific information to the display means (35, 39, 341) based on the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A3, characterized in that.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A28, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. As a result, the player can guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and can specify all the specific numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. can. It is also possible to recognize predetermined numerical information by specifying all specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying the specific numerical information, and by extension, guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, so that the interest of the game is improved. In particular, since specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period, the specific conditions to be satisfied while expecting that many specific conditions are satisfied in the predetermined period. You can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to the number of conditions.

[Appendix A29]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A28, wherein the display means is an information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A29, the display means is the information display means. Therefore, the player can visually grasp the specific information based on the display content of the display means. As a result, the player can easily grasp the specific information, so that it is easy to specify or infer the specific numerical information based on the specific information.

[Appendix A30]
The specific information includes a plurality of individual information.
The information display means has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of individual information, and has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G).
The display control means (51) is characterized in that a number of the individual information corresponding to the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period is displayed by the plurality of display areas of the information display means. The gaming machine described in A29.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A30, the specific information includes a plurality of individual information, and the information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of individual information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display a plurality of individual information necessary for specifying the specific numerical information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to provide a game property in which the difficulty of specifying or guessing the specific numerical information can be adjusted depending on which of the plurality of individual information is displayed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix A31]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A30, wherein the individual information having a corresponding relationship among the specific information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas (segments A to G).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A31, since the individual information having a corresponding relationship among the plurality of individual information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, the specific numerical information should be specified or estimated based on the corresponding relationship. Becomes possible. Thereby, the player can enjoy the identification or guessing of the specific numerical information while looking forward to which individual information among the plurality of individual information is displayed when the specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix A32]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A30 or Appendix A31, wherein the information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting regions as the plurality of display regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A32, the information display means has a plurality of light emitting regions. Such an information display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the information display means for displaying specific information while suppressing the complicated configuration of the gaming machine and the increase in the manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A33]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A30 or Appendix A31, wherein the information display means (341) can display the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A33, since the information display means can display a specific image in which specific numerical information can be specified or can be inferred, there are many options for the mode of the specific image and the process for displaying the specific image. Therefore, it is possible to specify or infer the specific numerical information in various patterns according to the mode of the specific image and the process until the specific image is displayed. As a result, the playability for specifying or guessing the specific numerical information is improved.

[Appendix A34]
The information display means (341) is described in Appendix A33, characterized in that the information display means (341) is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a symbol (decorative symbol) suggesting or clearly indicating the result of the transition determination is variablely displayed. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A34, a specific image is displayed in an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of a symbol that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when a variable display image is displayed on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed by using the image display means. As a result, the specific image is displayed by using the display means required for the gaming machine without separately providing the display means for displaying the specific image, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix A35]
The information display means (39) can display numbers or alphabets by the plurality of display areas.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A29 to Supplementary A34, wherein the specific information is a number or an alphabet.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A35, the information display means can display numbers or alphabets, and specific information is displayed corresponding to the numbers or alphabets. As a result, all or part of the specific numerical information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, so that it is easy to identify or guess the specific numerical information, and the specific numerical information can be specified without requiring advanced game knowledge. Or you can easily enjoy guessing.

[Appendix A36]
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information.
The display control means (51) is attached to the individual display unit (351-356) corresponding to the specific numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to Appendix A29, characterized in that the specific information is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A36, the specific information is displayed on the individual display unit corresponding to the specific numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information. That is, an individual display unit in which specific information is displayed for each specific numerical information is defined. Therefore, the specific information can be easily grasped by the type of the individual display unit on which the specific information is displayed, and the specific numerical information can be easily specified. This enhances convenience when specifying specific numerical information.

[Appendix A37]
The display control means (51) controls the individual display unit (351-356) in one of two modes, a display state in which the specific information is displayed and a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed. The gaming machine according to Appendix A36, characterized in that.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A37, the individual display unit is controlled in one of two modes, a display state and a non-display state. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be easily specified depending on the mode of the individual display unit. This enhances convenience when specifying specific numerical information.

[Appendix A38]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A36 or Appendix A37, wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, a ring shape, a matrix shape, or a staggered shape.

[Appendix A39]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A36 to Appendix A38, wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are lamp groups.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices A38 and A39, it is possible to form the information display means easily and inexpensively.

[Appendix A40]
A display order determining means (51) that determines a display order for displaying the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
With more
When the specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display control means (51) has the display means (51) based on the display order determined by the display order determining means (51) in the specified period. 35, 39, 341) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A3, characterized in that the specific information is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A40, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied. By determining the display order for displaying the specific information by satisfying the predetermined condition in this way, it is possible to prevent the display order of the specific information from being fixed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed, and it is possible to prevent the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A41]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A40, wherein the predetermined condition is that the power of the gaming machine (10) is turned on.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A41, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by turning on the power of the gaming machine. By the way, the power of the gaming machine is often turned on before the opening of the gaming hall. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is determined when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, so that the display order of the specific information is determined for each business day. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display order of the specific information from being fixed, so that it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed even on different business days and to prevent the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A42]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A40, wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical information (set value) is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A42, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by storing the predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of the specific information according to the predetermined numerical information, so that it is possible to prevent the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A43]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A40, wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period is started.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A43, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when the predetermined period is started. As a result, the display order of the specific information is determined for each predetermined period. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information from being monotonous.

[Appendix A44]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A40, wherein the predetermined condition is that the special gaming is started.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A44, when the special game is started, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined. As a result, the display order of the specific information is determined for each special game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information from being monotonous.

[Appendix A45]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that give the player a game value.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A40, wherein the predetermined condition is that the value-adding game is started.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A45, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when the value-adding game is started. As a result, the display order of the specific information is determined for each value-adding game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information from being monotonous.

[Appendix A46]
A display content storage means (512) for storing the display content of the specific information displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period, and a display content storage means (512).
In order for the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) in a special period (for example, a standby state) different from the specified period. The operating means (21) operated by the player and
When a player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) in the special period, the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) is stored in the second display means (35, 39). , 341) and the second display control means (51),
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A3, further comprising.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A46, the display content of the specific information displayed in the specified period can be displayed by operating the operating means in a special period different from the specified period. As a result, the player can display the display content of the specific information displayed in the specified period on the second display means by operating the operation means in the special period. Therefore, the player should check the displayed contents in a special period when he / she wants to check the displayed contents of the specific information displayed in the specified period, for example, when he / she forgets the displayed contents or when the player is replaced. Can be done. As a result, the player can specify or infer specific numerical information by confirming the displayed contents in the specified period in the special period, and whether or not to play the game in the gaming machine according to the identification or inference. It becomes possible to judge.

[Appendix A47]
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is further provided.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A46, wherein the special period is set to a period during which neither the special game nor the notified game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A47, a special period in which the display contents can be confirmed in the specified period is set to a period in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed. As a result, the player can carefully and carefully take time to check the displayed contents at his / her own pace and decide whether or not to play the game on the gaming machine without being restricted by time.

[Appendix A48]
The display content storage means (512) can store a plurality of display contents of the specific information displayed in a plurality of different specified periods.
The display content display control means (51) is stored in the display content storage means (512) when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (21) by the player during the special period. The gaming machine according to Appendix A46 or Appendix A47, wherein at least one of the display contents of the specific information of the above is displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix A49]
In the display content display control means (51), a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (21) by the player in the special period from the display contents of the plurality of specific information in the special period. The gaming machine according to Appendix A48, wherein the display content selected by the above is displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix A50]
The display content display control means (51) is stored in the display content storage means (512) when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (21) by the player during the special period. The gaming machine according to Appendix A49, wherein two or more of the display contents of the specific information of the above are displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machines according to the appendices A48 to A50, at least one of the display contents of the plurality of specific information displayed in the plurality of specified periods can be presented to the second display means. For example, the second display means can be made to present the display content selected by the player from the display contents of the plurality of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512). In this case, since the player can select the presentation content to be presented to the second display means from the display contents of the plurality of specific information, the player can confirm the display content desired by himself / herself. As a result, the displayed contents can be effectively confirmed while avoiding the confirmation of the displayed contents such as the previously confirmed information and the information having a small amount of information, so that the displayed contents can be confirmed efficiently. Further, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, many display contents can be confirmed at one time, so that the presentation contents can be efficiently confirmed also in this case.

[Appendix A51]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A46 to Appendix A50, wherein the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Appendix A52]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A51, wherein the second display means (341) is a variable display image display means in which a symbol (decorative symbol) suggesting or clearly indicating the result of the transition determination is variablely displayed.

The gaming machine according to the appendix A51 and the appendix A52 includes a first display means displayed in the specified period and a second display means displayed in the special period, and is provided with different display means in each of the specified period and the special period. Specific information is displayed. Therefore, in the specified period, when information other than the specific information is displayed by the second display means, it is possible to prevent the display from being hindered. For example, when the second display means is a variable display image display means, it is possible to prevent the visual recognition of the image (for example, image effect) displayed by the variable display image display means from being hindered. On the other hand, in the special period (for example, in the standby state), the display content of the specific information in the specified period is presented by the second display means such as the variable display image display means in which the symbol is variablely displayed. In general, since the variable display image display means has a large display area, visibility is improved when the variable display image display means is presented with the display contents of specific information in a specified period. Further, the variable display image display means may be used to perform various settings such as an effect and a character executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, if the display content of the specific information in the specified period is presented to the variable display image display means, the display content of the specific information in the specified period can be changed and displayed by the same operation as the operation for making various settings. It becomes possible to have the image display means present it. Therefore, the convenience when displaying the display content of the specific information on the variable display image display means in the special period is improved.

[Appendix A53]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information.
When a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A8.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A53, a plurality of specific information is displayed in a predetermined order in a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, conversely, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge the high or low of the advantage judgment probability, and the reverse. It can be set in an order where it is difficult to judge the level. As described above, a plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix A54]
When the number of times the specific condition is satisfied exceeds the specified number of times in the predetermined period, the display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined display order in the specified period. The gaming machine according to Appendix A53, which is characterized in that it is displayed on the machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A54, when the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order in the specified period. When a specific condition exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied in this way, the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information by displaying all of the plurality of specific information on the display means in a predetermined display order. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the predetermined number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix A54 is a conventional slot machine in which information denying a high set value such as the maximum set value is not presented in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. Is different.

[Appendix A55]
A display order selection means (51) that selects one display order from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period, and
A selective display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51) is further provided.
The display control means (51) transmits the plurality of specific information to the display means (35, 39, 341) according to the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period. The gaming machine according to Appendix A53, which is characterized in that it is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A55, a plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a specified period according to one display order selected from the plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information. Therefore, depending on the display order included in the plurality of display orders and the selection rate thereof, it is easy to display the plurality of specific information in the specific display order, and it is difficult to display the plurality of specific information in the specific display order. It is possible to prevent a plurality of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. As a result, by appropriately setting the content and selection rate of a plurality of specific information, it is possible to display a plurality of specific information in various orders, so that the display order of the plurality of specific information becomes monotonous. Can be prevented.

[Appendix A56]
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A 55, wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A56, a plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A57]
The gaming machine according to Appendix A56, wherein the plurality of display orders include display orders having different probabilities (selection rates) of being selected by the display order selection means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A57, it is possible to make it easy to select a specific display order and to make it difficult to select a specific display order. That is, unlike the case where all the display orders have the same probability of being selected, it is easy to identify a specific non-setting value, and conversely, it is difficult to specify a specific non-setting value. Will also be possible. As a result, it is possible to adjust the high / low possibility of having a high setting value and the high / low possibility of having a low setting value.

[Appendix A58]
The plurality of display orders are the first display having the lowest priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of advantageous determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information. Including order,
The first display order is set to have a higher probability (selection rate) selection rate (including 100%) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than a display order other than the first display order. The gaming machine according to Appendix A57.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A58, the first display order in which the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of advantageous judgment probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information has the lowest priority is the lowest. Is easy to select. That is, except for the advantageous determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information having the lowest advantageous determination probability and the most disadvantageous to the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, since the specific numerical value information that is most disadvantageous to the player is displayed at the end, the most disadvantageous advantageous judgment probability for the player and the advantage for the player are more advantageous until the last specific information is displayed. The possibility of an advantageous judgment probability remains. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that it is the most unfavorable advantage judgment probability for the player, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being terminated early in the game machine, and the operating rate of the game machine can be reduced. The decrease can be suppressed.

[Appendix A59]
The specific information includes the first specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of advantageous determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific numerical information, and the plurality of advantageous determination probabilities. Including the second specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage judgment probability having the highest probability among them.
The plurality of display orders include a second display order in which the first specific information and the second specific information have two lower priorities.
The second display order is set (including 100%) with a higher probability (selection rate) selection rate of being selected by the display order selection means (51) than a display order other than the second display order. The gaming machine according to Appendix A57.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A59, the second display order in which the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of advantageous judgment probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information has a low priority is Easy to choose. Therefore, as with the gaming machine according to Appendix A58, it is difficult for the player to grasp the most unfavorable advantage determination probability for the player, so that the game on the gaming machine is terminated early. It can be suppressed, and the decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed. Further, in the second display order, the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the most probable advantage determination probability among the plurality of advantage determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is low. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp not only the advantageous determination probability that is disadvantageous to the player but also the advantageous determination probability that is advantageous to the player. In this way, the advantage is contradictory to the player because the priority of the two specific information indicating the two specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability that is disadvantageous to the player and the advantageous judgment probability that is advantageous to the player is low. Since it becomes difficult to determine which of the two advantageous determination probabilities to be performed until the end, it is possible to improve the interest in the specific information displayed on the display means.

[Appendix A60]
In the plurality of display orders, the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability having a higher probability than the first advantageous determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is the first advantageous determination. Including a third display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having a lower probability than the probability.
The third display order is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than the display order other than the third display order. The gaming machine according to Appendix A57.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A60, the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage judgment probability having a higher probability than the first advantage judgment probability becomes the advantage judgment probability having a lower probability than the first advantage judgment probability. The selection rate of the third display order, which is lower than the specific information indicating the corresponding specific numerical information, is set high. Since the selection rate of the third display order is set high, the player is informed that the advantage judgment probability is higher than the actual first advantage judgment probability until immediately before the first advantage judgment probability is grasped. You can expect it. As a result, the specific information (predetermined information) can be inferred and enjoyed while expecting the possibility that the advantage determination probability is high until immediately before the first advantage determination probability is grasped.

[Appendix A61]
In the plurality of display orders, the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability having a lower probability than the first advantageous determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is the first advantageous determination. Including a fourth display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having a higher probability than the probability.
The fourth display order is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than the display order other than the fourth display order. The gaming machine according to Appendix A57.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A61, the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage judgment probability lower than the first advantage judgment probability becomes the advantage judgment probability having a higher probability than the first advantage judgment probability. The selection rate of the fourth display order, which is lower than the specific information indicating the corresponding specific numerical information, is set high. Since the selection rate of the fourth display order is set high, the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability having a lower probability than the first advantageous judgment probability is obtained immediately before the first advantageous judgment probability is grasped. The indicated specific information is left as hidden specific information. As a result, the final candidate for the first advantageous determination probability becomes specific information indicating the actual first advantageous determination probability and the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability whose probability is lower than the first advantageous determination probability. As a result, in the end, the predetermined numerical information corresponding to the player's advantageous first advantage determination probability is grasped as the first advantage determination probability (predetermined numerical information), so that the set value is grasped. The joy of is improved.

[Appendix A62]
A1 to A3, wherein the display limiting means (51) for limiting the display of the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) is further provided in a period other than the specified period. The gaming machine described in either.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A62, it is restricted that specific information is displayed on the display means during a period other than the specified period. Therefore, the display of the specific information is executed as a privilege for the player who has played the game that satisfies the specific condition for displaying the specific information. As a result, it is possible to prevent another player from piggybacking on the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for specifying or guessing specific numerical information.

[Appendix A63]
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is further provided.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A62, wherein a period other than the specified period is a period in a standby state in which neither the special game nor the notified game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A63, it is restricted that the specific information is displayed on the display means during the standby state in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed. Here, the change of players is generally performed during the standby period. Therefore, by limiting the display of the specific information on the display means during the standby state, another player piggybacks on the privilege obtained by the previous player and identifies or infers the specific numerical information. It is possible to more reliably prevent the acquisition of specific information for the purpose.

[Appendix A64]
The display limiting means (51) is characterized in that, in a period other than the specified period, the display of the specific information previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) is restricted in the specified period. The gaming machine according to Appendix A62 or Appendix A63.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A64, the display of the specific information previously displayed on the display means in the specified period is restricted in the period other than the specified period. That is, the specific information is displayed only during the specified period, and the display history of the past specific information is also restricted outside the specified period. As a result, it is not possible to confirm the specific information displayed in the past based on the display history, so another player piggybacks on the privilege obtained by the previous player based on the display history and identifies the specific numerical information. Alternatively, it is possible to more reliably prevent obtaining specific information for guessing.

[Appendix A65]
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numbers) in the first display order when the first specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period. When a second specific condition different from the first specific condition is satisfied, the plurality of specific information (numbers) are displayed in the first display order different from the first display order (35, 39, 341) The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A3, which is characterized in that it is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A65, a plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in the first display order when the first specific condition is satisfied, and a plurality of specific information is displayed when the second specific condition is satisfied. Information (numbers) is displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of a plurality of specific information is set according to the type of the specific condition that is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the display order of the plurality of specific information, and it is possible to prevent the plurality of specific numerical information from being easily specified or recognized based on the specific information. This prevents the player from early grasping that the advantage determination probability is low when the advantage determination probability is low. As a result, even if the advantage determination probability is low, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from ending the game at an early stage, and to prevent the operating rate of the gaming machine from decreasing.

[Appendix A66]
The first specific condition includes that the first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).
In the second specific condition, the second predetermined numerical information (set value) different from the first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is the numerical information storage means (41). The gaming machine according to Appendix A65, which comprises being stored in.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A66, the first specific condition includes that the first predetermined numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means, and the second specific condition is the second predetermined numerical value in the numerical information storage means. Including that the information is stored. That is, the type of a specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the display order is defined based on the predetermined numerical information, and a plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in the specified period according to the display order. That is, since the display order can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A67]
When the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied, one display order is selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period. Display order selection means (51) and
A selective display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51) is further provided.
The display control means (51) transmits the plurality of specific information to the display means (35, 39, 341) according to the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period. The gaming machine according to Appendix A65 or Appendix A66, which is characterized in that it is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A67, a plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a specified period according to one display order selected from the plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information. Therefore, depending on the display order included in the plurality of display orders and the selection rate thereof, it is easy to display the plurality of specific information in the specific display order, and it is difficult to display the plurality of specific information in the specific display order. It is possible to prevent a plurality of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. As a result, by appropriately setting the content and selection rate of a plurality of specific information, it is possible to display a plurality of specific information in various orders, so that the display order of the plurality of specific information becomes monotonous. Can be prevented.

[Appendix A68]
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A 67, wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A68, a plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix A69]
A second display control means (41) for displaying the predetermined information (number) indicating the predetermined numerical value information on the second display means (45) is further provided.
The display means (35, 39, 341) is provided at a position visible to the player.
The second display means (45) is provided at a position where the player's visibility is restricted.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary A1 to Supplementary A3, wherein the predetermined information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A69, specific information other than predetermined information is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player, and the second display means (2) provided at a position where the player's visibility is restricted. Predetermined information is displayed in 45). That is, when a specific condition is satisfied, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of types of numerical information is provided at a position visible to the player in a specified period. It is displayed on the first display means. As a result, the player can specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and can recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. It is possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information and, by extension, guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, so that the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, by providing predetermined information at a position where the player's visibility is restricted and displaying predetermined information on the second display means, a predetermined numerical value is displayed to the player based on the predetermined information displayed by the second display means during business hours. It is possible to prevent the information from being grasped. On the other hand, outside the business hours, the game hall side can grasp the predetermined information. As a result, the game hall side can confirm the predetermined numerical information based on the predetermined information displayed by the second display means outside the business hours, and when the predetermined numerical information is changed, the predetermined numerical information after the change can be confirmed. Since the predetermined information indicating the above can be confirmed, the work of changing the predetermined numerical information is facilitated.

[Appendix A70]
Further equipped with a game board (31) on which a game ball is launched,
The display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31).
The gaming machine according to Appendix A69, wherein the second display means (45) is provided on the back side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A70, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than predetermined numerical information is displayed on the first display means provided on the front side of the game board, and predetermined information indicating predetermined numerical information is displayed on the back side of the game board. It is displayed on the second display means provided in. Therefore, it is easy to visually recognize the specific information displayed on the first display means, and it is possible to easily limit the visibility of the predetermined information displayed on the second display means.

[Appendix A71]
The game board (31) is fixed to the frame body (12) so as to be openable and closable.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A 70, wherein the second display means (45) is provided at a position where the gaming board (31) can be visually recognized when the gaming board (31) is opened.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A71, a second display means is provided on the back surface side of the gaming board which is fixed to the frame body so as to be openable and closable. Therefore, by closing the game board, it is possible to prevent the predetermined information displayed on the second display means from being visually recognized by the player, while by opening the game board, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be prevented. Can be confirmed on the game hall side. As a result, it is possible to achieve a state in which the predetermined information of the second display means can be visually recognized and a state in which the visibility is restricted by a simple operation of opening and closing the game board.

[Appendix A72]
The second display control means (41)
It is possible to control between a display state in which the predetermined numerical value information is displayed on the second display means (45) and a non-display state in which the predetermined numerical value information is not displayed on the second display means (45).
When the first operation is performed on the specific operating means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31), the non-display state is controlled to the display state.
The gaming machine according to Appendix A70 or Appendix A71, wherein when a second operation is performed on the specific operating means (46), the display state is controlled to the non-display state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix A72, a display state in which predetermined information is displayed on the second display means and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed are selected by an operation on a specific operation means provided on the back side of the game board. can. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the business hours of the game hall, even when the game board is opened when a ball jam occurs in the game machine, the predetermined information is displayed by the second display means. It is possible to surely prevent it from being grasped.

[Appendix B1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A storage means (41) for storing each numerical information (game set value) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous judgment probabilities (big hit probabilities) different from each other, and
Selection means (41) for selecting each numerical information, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information, and
When a specific condition is satisfied, at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information is shown in a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. Display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) on display means (35, 39, 341), and
With
The specific condition can be satisfied when the game ball passes through the specific area (373).
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

Since the gaming machine according to Appendix B1 can be established when a specific condition passes through a specific area, the player can easily grasp that the specific condition is satisfied. This makes it more enjoyable as to whether or not certain conditions are met. Further, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the display control means controls the specific information displayed on the display means. Therefore, even in a situation where the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the game playability by paying attention to whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area.

[Appendix B2]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to Appendix B1, characterized in that it is present.

[Appendix B3]
The display control means (51) may cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to Appendix B1, characterized in that it is possible.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B2 or Appendix B3, not only specific information but also special information that does not show a plurality of types of numerical information or special information that indicates a part of a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the display means. As a result, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical information can be inferred and enjoyed based on the special information, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix B4]
A discharge port (373) for discharging the game ball is further provided on the back side of the game board (31) on which the game ball is launched.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B3, wherein the specific region is the discharge port (373).

[Appendix B5]
It also has multiple winning openings (313-316) where prize balls are paid out by entering a game ball.
The discharge port (373) includes a first discharge port (318) for discharging a game ball that has not been entered into the plurality of winning ports (313 to 316) to the back side of the game board (31), and the first discharge port (318). Includes a second outlet (373) that is different from the first outlet (318).
The gaming machine according to Appendix B4, wherein the specific area is the second discharge port (373).

[Appendix B6]
The gaming machine according to Appendix B5, wherein the second discharge port (373) is capable of entering a ball in the special game.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices B4 to B6, when a specific condition is satisfied when the gaming ball passes through the second discharge port where the gaming ball can enter in the special game, the specific information displayed on the display means is displayed. The displayed contents are controlled. Therefore, in a special game in which the game tends to proceed inorganically, it is possible to improve the game playability by paying attention to whether or not the game ball is inserted into the second discharge port.

[Appendix B7]
The plurality of winning openings (313 to 316) include a variable winning opening (316) capable of entering a game ball in the special game.
The gaming machine according to Appendix B6, wherein the second discharge port (373) allows a game ball that has passed through the variable winning port (316) to pass through.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B7, when a specific condition is satisfied when the gaming ball passes through the second discharge port through which the gaming ball that has entered the variable winning opening in the special game can pass, the display means is used. The display content of the specific information to be displayed is controlled. Therefore, in the special game, the game ball can be passed through the second discharge port by launching the game ball into the game area and letting the game ball win the variable winning port. Therefore, it is possible to display the specific information on the display means without requiring a special skill only by advancing the game as usual in the special game. As a result, it is possible to avoid playing a game on the gaming machine because a skill difference may occur as compared with a case where a skill difference may occur due to a game ball entering the second discharge port. Be prevented.

[Appendix B8]
The third discharge port (378), which is different from the second discharge port (373), allows the game ball that has entered the variable winning port (316) to pass through.
A distribution means (37) for distributing the game ball entered into the variable winning port (316) to either the second discharge port (373) or the third discharge port (378).
The gaming machine according to Appendix B7, which further comprises.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B8, since the game balls are distributed to the second discharge port and the third discharge port by the distribution means, it depends on the distribution of the game balls by the distribution means as to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied. The playability is given. As a result, it becomes possible to enjoy the game by paying attention to the behavior of the game ball in the sorting means regarding whether or not a specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix B9]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information.
When a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions B1 to B8.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B9, a plurality of specific information is displayed in a predetermined order in a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, conversely, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge the high or low of the advantage judgment probability, and the reverse. It can be set in an order where it is difficult to judge the level. As described above, a plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix B10]
When the number of times the specific condition is satisfied exceeds the specified number of times in the predetermined period, the display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined display order in the specified period. The gaming machine according to Appendix B9, which is characterized in that it is displayed on the machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix B10, when the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order in the specified period. When a specific condition exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied in this way, the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information by displaying all of the plurality of specific information on the display means in a predetermined display order. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the predetermined number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to Appendix B10 is a conventional slot machine in which information denying a high set value such as the maximum set value is not presented in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. Is different.

[Appendix C1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A storage means (41) for storing each numerical information (game set value) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous judgment probabilities (big hit probabilities) different from each other, and
Selection means (41) for selecting each numerical information, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information, and
When a specific condition is satisfied, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information is provided in a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. Display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the display means (35, 39, 341).
With
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341), and the predetermined information is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized in that the start of the predetermined period is set to the special gaming.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C1, when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which the start of the special game is set, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, the player can enjoy specifying the specific numerical information and, by extension, guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. Then, by setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, the game can be enjoyed by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix C2]
When the specific condition is satisfied, the display control means (51) displays the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not show the plurality of types of numerical information in the specified period. The gaming machine according to Appendix C1, characterized in that it can be displayed by means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix C3]
When the specific condition is satisfied, the display control means (51) provides the specific information and special information (a part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information in the specified period. The gaming machine according to Appendix C1, characterized in that it can be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C2 or Appendix C3, not only specific information but also special information that does not show a plurality of types of numerical information or special information that indicates a part of a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the display means. As a result, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical information can be inferred and enjoyed based on the special information, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix C4]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified. Usually a big hit) and
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. The second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode), is included.
The beginning of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state, from Supplementary note C1 to Supplementary note C3. The gaming machine described in any of.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C4, in the first gaming state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determining means is lower than that in the second gaming state, the result of the transition determination is the special gaming. It is set as a special game to be transferred when it is to be transferred to. That is, the beginning of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first hit special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each initial hit regardless of whether it is a single shot or a consecutive villa, so specific numerical information and thus specific numerical information are estimated or specified for each initial hit. Opportunity is guaranteed at least once.

[Appendix C5]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that give the player a game value.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C1 to C4, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C5, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, is the specific condition satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started? You can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not it is.

[Appendix C6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C1 to C5, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C6, the end of a predetermined period is set as a special gaming machine. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game may be reduced. On the other hand, by setting the end of the special game in addition to the start of the predetermined period, the interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is improved.

[Appendix C7]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified. Usually a big hit) and
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. The second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode), is included.
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine according to Appendix C6.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C7, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special gaming state in which the transition to the first gaming state is performed after the end of the special gaming. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, when the first hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, it is executed in the first special gaming state. The predetermined period ends in the special game to be played. On the other hand, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state is set. When the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without ending the predetermined period in the special game to be executed, the game is executed in the first special game state. The predetermined period ends in the special game. That is, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive villa ends. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive villa, a predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive villa. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that the number of times a specific condition is satisfied per consecutive villa is higher than that per single shot, and the greater the number of consecutive villas per consecutive villa, the higher the number of times a specific condition is satisfied. Become. As a result, the player can not only increase the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive villas increases, but also obtain a large amount of specific information indicating specific numerical information, and guess or guess the specific numerical information and thus the predetermined numerical information. You can get the benefit of being easier to identify.

[Appendix C8]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that give the player a game value, and an ending executed after the end of the value-adding game.
The gaming machine according to Appendix C6 or Appendix C7, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game, the game value is not given and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Appendix C8, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, if a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, By utilizing the blank period for the player, it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in a special game.

[Appendix C9]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information.
When a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions C1 to C8.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C9, a plurality of specific information is displayed in a predetermined order in a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, conversely, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge the high or low of the advantage judgment probability, and the reverse. It can be set in an order where it is difficult to judge the level. As described above, a plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix C10]
When the number of times the specific condition is satisfied exceeds the specified number of times in the predetermined period, the display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined display order in the specified period. The gaming machine according to Appendix C9, which is characterized in that it is displayed on the machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix C10, when the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order in the specified period. When a specific condition exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied in this way, the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information by displaying all of the plurality of specific information on the display means in a predetermined display order. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the predetermined number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to Appendix C10 is a conventional slot machine in which information denying a high set value such as the maximum set value is not presented in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. Is different.

[Appendix D1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A storage means (41) for storing each numerical information (game set value) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous judgment probabilities (big hit probabilities) different from each other, and
Selection means (41) for selecting each numerical information, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information, and
When a specific condition is satisfied, at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information is shown in a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. Display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) on display means (35, 39, 341), and
With
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341), and the predetermined information is not displayed.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specified period is set to an execution period of the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D1, specific information indicating specific numerical information when a specific condition is satisfied is displayed on the display means in a specified period set as the execution period of the special game. As a result, the player can enjoy specifying the specific numerical information and, by extension, guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means during the execution period (specified period) of the special game. The fun of the game is improved.

[Appendix D2]
When the specific condition is satisfied, the display control means (51) displays the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not show the plurality of types of numerical information in the specified period. The gaming machine according to Appendix D1, characterized in that it can be displayed by means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix D3]
When the specific condition is satisfied, the display control means (51) provides the specific information and special information (a part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information in the specified period. The gaming machine according to Appendix D1, characterized in that it can be displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D2 or Appendix D3, not only specific information but also special information that does not show a plurality of types of numerical information or special information that indicates a part of a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the display means. As a result, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical information can be inferred and enjoyed based on the special information, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix D4]
The special game includes a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that give the player a game value, and an ending executed after the end of the value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode). Have
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D1 to D3, wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game, the game value is not given and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Appendix D4, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, By utilizing the blank period for the player, it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in a special game.

[Appendix D5]
The display control means (51) displays specific information (numbers) indicating at least the specific numerical information (non-set value) in the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. Displayed on 39, 341)
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D1 to D4, wherein the specified period is set at least after the lapse of the predetermined period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D5, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed after the lapse of the predetermined period. Therefore, the player enjoys the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, and enjoys the game by paying attention to the specific information displayed on the display means after the elapse of the predetermined period. Can be done. As a result, the interest of the game in a series of periods from the start of the predetermined period to the elapse of the predetermined period until the specific information is displayed is improved.

[Appendix D6]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that give the player a game value.
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified. Usually a big hit) and
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. The second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode), is included.
The start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state.
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine according to Appendix D5.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D6, the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the special gaming state, which is shifted when the result of the transition determination is to shift to the special gaming state in the first gaming state. Will be done. That is, the beginning of the predetermined period is set to the special game which is the first hit. On the other hand, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special game state in which the specific game is changed to the first game state after the end of the specific game in the special game state. That is, the end of the predetermined period is set to the last special game to be executed regardless of whether it is the first hit or the consecutive villa hit. In this way, the predetermined period is started with the first hit as an opportunity, the end is set for the special game to be executed at the end, and the specific information is displayed on the display means after the lapse of the predetermined period. As a result, it is possible to impart a game property of presenting specific information indicating specific numerical information to the player by effectively utilizing the period during which the special game is executed. Further, in the case of a consecutive villa, it is possible to collectively present a number (amount) of information corresponding to the number of specific conditions satisfied per consecutive villa after a lapse of a predetermined period. Therefore, the player can confirm a lot of information about the specific information in a short period of time after the elapse of the predetermined period. Therefore, the specific numerical information, and eventually the predetermined numerical information, is based on the specific information indicating the specific numerical information. Convenience when identifying or guessing is improved.

[Appendix D7]
The predetermined period includes a specific period set for the special game that starts within the predetermined period.
The specified period is set after the lapse of the specific period,
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information when the specific condition is satisfied during the specific period. The gaming machine described in.

The gaming machine according to Appendix D7 includes a specific period set for a special game started within a predetermined period. That is, when a plurality of special games are started in a predetermined period such as per consecutive villa, a plurality of special periods are set according to the number of special games started in the predetermined period. In addition, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means after the lapse of a specific period. Therefore, if there are multiple specific periods in a predetermined period, it is determined whether the specific conditions are satisfied for each specific period, and if the specific conditions are satisfied in the specific period, it is specified each time the specific period elapses. The information is displayed on the display means. As a result, it is possible to focus on whether or not a specific condition is satisfied for each special game, and if the specific condition is satisfied, the specific information displayed on the display means can be focused on. Can be improved.

[Appendix D8]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that give the player a game value, and an ending executed after the end of the value-adding game.
The specific period includes a period during which the value-adding game is executed.
The gaming machine according to Appendix D7, wherein the specified period is set to the ending.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D8, it is determined whether or not the specific conditions are satisfied for each specific period including the value-adding game, and if the specific conditions are satisfied in the specific period, the value-adding game is completed. Specific information is displayed at the ending to be executed. Therefore, in the value-adding game, attention can be paid to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied, and if the specific condition is satisfied, the content of the specific information can be focused on in the ending after the end of the value-adding game. As a result, the playability of displaying specific information can be imparted by effectively utilizing the ending of the special game, and the progress of the game can be focused on as a whole of the special game, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix D9]
The specific condition is that the game ball passes through the specific area (373) and wins the display lottery executed when the game ball passes through the specific area (373).
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D1 to D8, wherein the specified period is after winning the display lottery.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D9, the specific information is displayed on the display means by winning the display lottery executed when the gaming ball passes through the specific area. By performing the display lottery as a condition for displaying the specific information on the display means in this way, whether or not the display lottery is won when the game ball passes through the specific area (whether or not the specific information is displayed). Because you can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to (?), The interest of the game is improved. Further, when the display lottery is performed as a condition for displaying specific information on the display means, it becomes easy to adjust the difficulty level and variation (difficulty level and variation for displaying specific information) in which the specific condition is satisfied. As a result, various playability can be imparted with respect to the display of specific information according to the winning probability in the display lottery, the lottery method, and the like.

[Appendix D10]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information.
When a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions D1 to D9.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D10, a plurality of specific information is displayed in a predetermined order in a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, conversely, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge the high or low of the advantage judgment probability, and the reverse. It can be set in an order where it is difficult to judge the level. As described above, a plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix D11]
When the number of times the specific condition is satisfied exceeds the specified number of times in the predetermined period, the display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined display order in the specified period. The gaming machine according to Appendix D10, which is characterized in that it is displayed on the machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix D11, when the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order in the specified period. When a specific condition exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied in this way, the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information by displaying all of the plurality of specific information on the display means in a predetermined display order. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the predetermined number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to Appendix D11 is a conventional slot machine in which information denying a high set value such as the maximum set value is not presented in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. Is different.

[Appendix E1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A storage means (41) for storing each numerical information (game set value) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous judgment probabilities (big hit probabilities) different from each other, and
Selection means (41) for selecting each numerical information, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information, and
When a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, at least of the plurality of types of numerical information in a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. A display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) indicating specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information on the display means (35, 39, 341).
With
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E1, when a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. As a result, the player can guess the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, and can specify all the specific numerical information by displaying all the specific information. .. It is also possible to recognize predetermined numerical information by specifying all specific numerical information. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying the specific numerical information, and by extension, guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means, so that the interest of the game is improved. In particular, since the special specific information is displayed on the display means based on the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period, the number of specific conditions satisfied while expecting that many specific conditions are satisfied in the predetermined period. You can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to.

[Appendix E2]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to Appendix E1, characterized in that it is present.

[Appendix E3]
The display control means (51) may cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to Appendix E1, characterized in that it is possible.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E2 or Appendix E3, not only specific information but also special information that does not show a plurality of types of numerical information or special information that shows a part of a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the display means. As a result, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical information can be inferred and enjoyed based on the special information, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix E4]
The game according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E1 to E3, wherein the display means is an information display means (35, 39, 341) capable of displaying information corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information. Machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E4, the display means is the information display means. Therefore, the player can visually grasp the specific information based on the display content of the display means. As a result, the player can easily grasp the specific information, so that it is easy to specify or infer the specific numerical information based on the specific information.

[Appendix E5]
The specific information includes a plurality of individual information.
The information display means has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G) corresponding to the plurality of individual information, and has a plurality of display areas (segments A to G).
The display control means (51) is characterized in that a number of the individual information corresponding to the number of the specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period is displayed by the plurality of display areas of the information display means. The gaming machine described in E4.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E5, the specific information includes a plurality of individual information, and the information display means has a plurality of display areas for displaying the plurality of individual information. Therefore, it is possible to individually display a plurality of individual information necessary for specifying the specific numerical information in any of the plurality of display areas. As a result, it is possible to provide a game property in which the difficulty of specifying or guessing the specific numerical information can be adjusted depending on which of the plurality of individual information is displayed, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix E6]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E5, wherein the individual information having a corresponding relationship among the specific information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas (segments A to G).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E6, since the individual information having a corresponding relationship among the plurality of individual information is displayed in each of the plurality of display areas, the specific numerical information should be specified or estimated based on the corresponding relationship. Becomes possible. Thereby, the player can enjoy the identification or guessing of the specific numerical information while looking forward to which individual information among the plurality of individual information is displayed when the specific condition is satisfied.

[Appendix E7]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E5 or Appendix E6, wherein the information display means (39) has a plurality of light emitting regions as the plurality of display regions.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E7, the information display means has a plurality of light emitting regions. Such an information display means can be realized by an easily available and low-cost display device such as a 7-segment display device. Therefore, it is possible to equip the information display means for displaying specific information while suppressing the complicated configuration of the gaming machine and the increase in the manufacturing cost.

[Appendix E8]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E5 or Appendix E6, wherein the information display means (341) can display the specific information as a specific image corresponding to the specific information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E8, since the information display means can display a specific image in which specific numerical information can be specified or can be inferred, there are many options for the mode of the specific image and the process for displaying the specific image. Therefore, it is possible to specify or infer the specific numerical information in various patterns according to the mode of the specific image and the process until the specific image is displayed. As a result, the playability for specifying or guessing the specific numerical information is improved.

[Appendix E9]
The information display means (341) is described in Appendix E8, which is an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image in which a symbol (decorative symbol) suggesting or clearly indicating the result of the transition determination is variablely displayed. Game machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E9, a specific image is displayed in an image display means capable of displaying a variable display image of a symbol that suggests or clearly indicates the result of the transition determination. Therefore, when a variable display image is displayed on the image display means in the gaming machine, the specific image can be displayed by using the image display means. As a result, the specific image is displayed by using the display means required for the gaming machine without separately providing the display means for displaying the specific image, which is advantageous in terms of manufacturing cost.

[Appendix E10]
The information display means (39) can display numbers or alphabets by the plurality of display areas.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E5 to E9, wherein the specific information is a number or an alphabet.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E10, the information display means can display numbers or alphabets, and specific information is displayed corresponding to the numbers or alphabets. As a result, all or part of the specific numerical information is displayed as simple identification information such as numbers and alphabets, so that it is easy to identify or guess the specific numerical information, and the specific numerical information can be specified without requiring advanced game knowledge. Or you can easily enjoy guessing.

[Appendix E11]
The information display means (35) has a plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) corresponding to each of the plurality of types of numerical information.
The display control means (51) is attached to the individual display unit (351-356) corresponding to the specific numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information according to the number of specific conditions satisfied in the predetermined period. The gaming machine according to Appendix E4, characterized in that the specific information is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E11, the specific information is displayed on the individual display unit corresponding to the specific numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information. That is, an individual display unit in which specific information is displayed for each specific numerical information is defined. Therefore, the specific information can be easily grasped by the type of the individual display unit on which the specific information is displayed, and the specific numerical information can be easily specified. This enhances convenience when specifying specific numerical information.

[Appendix E12]
The display control means (51) controls the individual display unit (351-356) in one of two modes, a display state in which the specific information is displayed and a non-display state in which the specific information is not displayed. The gaming machine according to Appendix E11.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E12, the individual display unit is controlled in one of two modes, a display state and a non-display state. Therefore, the specific numerical information can be easily specified depending on the mode of the individual display unit. This enhances convenience when specifying specific numerical information.

[Appendix E13]
The gaming machine according to Appendix E11 or Appendix E12, wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are arranged in a row, ring, matrix, or staggered pattern.

[Appendix E14]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E11 to E13, wherein the plurality of individual display units (351 to 356) are lamp groups.

In the gaming machines according to the appendices E13 and E14, it is possible to form the information display means easily and inexpensively.

[Appendix E15]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E1 to E14, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E15, when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which the start of the special game is set, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying the specific numerical information, and eventually guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. .. Then, by setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, the game can be enjoyed by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix E16]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified. Usually a big hit) and
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. The second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode), is included.
The beginning of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state. Pachinko machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E16, in the first gaming state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determining means is lower than that in the second gaming state, the result of the transition determination is the special gaming. It is set as a special game to be transferred when it is to be transferred to. That is, the beginning of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first hit special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each initial hit regardless of whether it is a single shot or a consecutive villa, so specific numerical information and thus predetermined numerical information are estimated or specified for each initial hit. Opportunity is guaranteed at least once.

[Appendix E17]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that give the player a game value.
The gaming machine according to Appendix E15 or Appendix E16, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E17, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, is the specific condition satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started? You can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not it is.

[Appendix E18]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E15 to E17, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E18, the end of a predetermined period is set as a special gaming. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game may be reduced. On the other hand, by setting the end of the special game in addition to the start of the predetermined period, the interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is improved.

[Appendix E19]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified. Usually a big hit) and
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. The second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode), is included.
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine according to Appendix E18.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E19, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special gaming state in which the transition to the first gaming state is performed after the end of the special gaming. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, when the first hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, it is executed in the first special gaming state. The predetermined period ends in the special game to be played. On the other hand, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state is set. When the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without ending the predetermined period in the special game to be executed, the game is executed in the first special game state. The predetermined period ends in the special game. That is, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive villa ends. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive villa, a predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive villa. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that the number of times a specific condition is satisfied per consecutive villa is higher than that per single shot, and the greater the number of consecutive villas per consecutive villa, the higher the number of times a specific condition is satisfied. Become. As a result, the player can obtain not only the expected value of the game value that can be acquired increases as the number of consecutive villas increases, but also a large amount of specific information for specifying the specific numerical information, and eventually the specific numerical information and the predetermined numerical information. Can benefit from the ease of guessing or identifying.

[Appendix E20]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that give the player a game value, and an ending executed after the end of the value-adding game.
The gaming machine according to Appendix E18 or Appendix E19, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game, the game value is not given and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Appendix E20, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, By utilizing the blank period for the player, it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in a special game.

[Appendix E21]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information.
When a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions E1 to E20.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E21, a plurality of specific information is displayed in a predetermined order in a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, conversely, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge the high or low of the advantage judgment probability, and the reverse. It can be set in an order where it is difficult to judge the level. As described above, a plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix E22]
When the number of times the specific condition is satisfied exceeds the specified number of times in the predetermined period, the display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined display order in the specified period. The gaming machine according to Appendix E21, which is characterized in that it is displayed on the machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix E22, when the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order in the specified period. When a specific condition exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied in this way, the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information by displaying all of the plurality of specific information on the display means in a predetermined display order. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the predetermined number of times.

The gaming machine according to Appendix E22 is a conventional slot machine in which information denying a high set value such as the maximum set value is not presented in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. Is different.

[Appendix F1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A storage means (41) for storing each numerical information (game set value) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous judgment probabilities (big hit probabilities) different from each other, and
Selection means (41) for selecting each numerical information, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information, and
When a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information is specified in a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. ) Is displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341), and the display control means (51).
A display order determining means (51) that determines a display order for displaying the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) when a predetermined condition is satisfied.
With
The display control means (51) is the display means based on the display order determined by the display order determining means (51) in the specified period when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. Display the specific information in (35, 39, 341).
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F1, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when a predetermined condition is satisfied. By determining the display order for displaying the specific information by satisfying the predetermined condition in this way, it is possible to prevent the display order of the specific information from being fixed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed, and it is possible to prevent the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F2]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to Appendix F1, characterized in that it is present.

[Appendix F3]
The display control means (51) may cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to Appendix F1, characterized in that it is possible.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F2 or Appendix F3, not only specific information but also special information that does not show a plurality of types of numerical information or special information that shows a part of a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the display means. As a result, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical information can be inferred and enjoyed based on the special information, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix F4]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions F1 to F3, wherein the predetermined condition is that the power of the gaming machine (10) is turned on.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F4, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by turning on the power of the gaming machine. By the way, the power of the gaming machine is often turned on before the opening of the gaming hall. Therefore, the display order of the specific information is determined when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, so that the display order of the specific information is determined for each business day. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display order of the specific information from being fixed, so that it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed even on different business days and to prevent the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F5]
The gaming machine according to any one of Appendix F1 to Appendix F3, wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined numerical information (set value) is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F5, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined by storing the predetermined numerical information in the numerical information storage means. This makes it possible to determine the display order of the specific information according to the predetermined numerical information, so that it is possible to prevent the display of the specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F6]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions F1 to F3, wherein the predetermined condition is that the predetermined period is started.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F6, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when the predetermined period is started. As a result, the display order of the specific information is determined for each predetermined period. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information from being monotonous.

[Appendix F7]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions F1 to F3, wherein the predetermined condition is that the special game is started.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F7, when the special game is started, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined. As a result, the display order of the specific information is determined for each special game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information from being monotonous.

[Appendix F8]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that give the player a game value.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions F1 to F3, wherein the predetermined condition is that the value-adding game is started.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F8, the display order for displaying the specific information on the display means is determined when the value-adding game is started. As a result, the display order of the specific information is determined for each value-adding game. Therefore, since the display order of the specific information is prevented from being fixed, it is possible to prevent the same specific information from being repeatedly displayed and the display of the specific information from being monotonous.

[Appendix F9]
A display order selection means (51) that selects one display order from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period when the predetermined condition is satisfied.
A selective display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51), and a display order storage means (51).
With more
The display control means (51) transmits the plurality of specific information to the display means (35, 39, 341) according to the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions F1 to F8, which is characterized in that it is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F9, a plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in the specified period according to one display order selected from the plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information. Therefore, depending on the display order included in the plurality of display orders and the selection rate thereof, it is easy to display the plurality of specific information in the specific display order, and it is difficult to display the plurality of specific information in the specific display order. It is possible to prevent a plurality of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. As a result, by appropriately setting the content and selection rate of a plurality of specific information, it is possible to display a plurality of specific information in various orders, so that the display order of the plurality of specific information becomes monotonous. Can be prevented.

[Appendix F10]
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information.
The gaming machine according to Appendix F9, wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F10, a plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix F11]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary note F1 to Supplementary note F10, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F11, when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which the start of the special game is set, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying the specific numerical information, and eventually guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. .. Then, by setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, the game can be enjoyed by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix F12]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified. Usually a big hit) and
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. The second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode), is included.
The description in Appendix F11, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state. Pachinko machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F12, in the first gaming state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determining means is lower than that in the second gaming state, the result of the transition determination is the special gaming. It is set as a special game to be transferred when it is to be transferred to. That is, the beginning of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first hit special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each initial hit regardless of whether it is a single shot or a consecutive villa, so specific numerical information and thus predetermined numerical information are estimated or specified for each initial hit. Opportunity is guaranteed at least once.

[Appendix F13]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that give the player a game value.
The gaming machine according to Appendix F11 or Appendix F12, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F13, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, is the specific condition satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started? You can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not it is.

[Appendix F14]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions F11 to F13, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F14, the end of a predetermined period is set as a special gaming machine. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game may be reduced. On the other hand, by setting the end of the special game in addition to the start of the predetermined period, the interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is improved.

[Appendix F15]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified. Usually a big hit) and
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. The second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode), is included.
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine according to Appendix F14.

In the gaming machine according to the appendix F15, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special gaming state in which the transition to the first gaming state is performed after the end of the special gaming. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, when the first hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, it is executed in the first special gaming state. The predetermined period ends in the special game to be played. On the other hand, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state is set. When the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without ending the predetermined period in the special game to be executed, the game is executed in the first special game state. The predetermined period ends in the special game. That is, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive villa ends. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive villa, a predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive villa. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that the number of times a specific condition is satisfied per consecutive villa is higher than that per single shot, and the greater the number of consecutive villas per consecutive villa, the higher the number of times a specific condition is satisfied. Become. As a result, the player can not only increase the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive villas increases, but also obtain a large amount of specific information indicating specific numerical information, and guess or guess the specific numerical information and thus the predetermined numerical information. You can get the benefit of being easier to identify.

[Appendix F16]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that give the player a game value, and an ending executed after the end of the value-adding game.
The gaming machine according to Appendix F14 or Appendix F15, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game, the game value is not given and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Appendix F16, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, if a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, By utilizing the blank period for the player, it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in a special game.

[Appendix F17]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information.
When a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions F1 to F16.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F17, a plurality of specific information is displayed in a predetermined order in a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, conversely, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge the high or low of the advantage judgment probability, and the reverse. It can be set in an order where it is difficult to judge the level. As described above, a plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix F18]
When the number of times the specific condition is satisfied exceeds the specified number of times in the predetermined period, the display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined display order in the specified period. The gaming machine according to Appendix F17, which is characterized in that it is displayed on the machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix F18, when the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order in the specified period. When a specific condition exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied in this way, the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information by displaying all of the plurality of specific information on the display means in a predetermined display order. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the predetermined number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to Appendix F18 is a conventional slot machine in which information denying a high set value such as the maximum set value is not presented in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. Is different.

[Appendix G1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A storage means (41) for storing each numerical information (game set value) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous judgment probabilities (big hit probabilities) different from each other, and
Selection means (41) for selecting each numerical information, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information, and
When a specific condition is satisfied, at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information is shown in a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. The first display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) on the first display means (35, 39, 341), and
A display content storage means (512) for storing the display content of the specific information displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period, and a display content storage means (512).
In order for the second display means (35, 39, 341) to display the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) in a special period (for example, a standby state) different from the specified period. The operating means (21) operated by the player and
When a player performs a predetermined operation on the operation means (21) in the special period, the display content stored in the display content storage means (512) is stored in the second display means (35, 39). , 341) and the second display control means (51),
With
A gaming machine characterized in that, during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G1, the display content of the specific information displayed in the specified period can be displayed by operating the operating means in a special period different from the specified period. As a result, the player can display the display content of the specific information displayed in the specified period on the second display means by operating the operation means in the special period. Therefore, the player should check the displayed contents in a special period when he / she wants to check the displayed contents of the specific information displayed in the specified period, for example, when he / she forgets the displayed contents or when the player is replaced. Can be done. As a result, the player can specify or infer specific numerical information by confirming the displayed contents in the specified period in the special period, and whether or not to play the game in the gaming machine according to the identification or inference. It becomes possible to judge.

[Appendix G2]
The display control means (51) may cause the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to Appendix G1, characterized in that it is possible.

[Appendix G3]
The display control means (51) causes the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to Appendix G1, which is characterized in that it is possible.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G2 or Appendix G3, not only specific information but also special information that does not show a plurality of types of numerical information or special information that shows a part of a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the first display means. .. As a result, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the first display means, but also when the special information is displayed on the first display means. Specific numerical information can be inferred based on special information. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical information can be inferred and enjoyed based on the special information, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix G4]
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is further provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions G1 to G3, wherein the special period is set to a period during which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G4, a special period during which the displayed contents can be confirmed in the specified period is set to a period during which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed. As a result, the player can carefully and carefully take time to check the displayed contents at his / her own pace and decide whether or not to play the game on the gaming machine without being restricted by time.

[Appendix G5]
The display content storage means (512) can store a plurality of display contents of the specific information displayed in a plurality of different specified periods.
The display content display control means (51) is stored in the display content storage means (512) when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (21) by the player during the special period. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions G1 to G4, wherein at least one of the display contents of the specific information of the above is displayed by the second display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix G6]
In the display content display control means (51), a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (21) by the player in the special period from the display contents of the plurality of specific information in the special period. The gaming machine according to Appendix G5, wherein the display content selected by the above is displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

[Appendix G7]
The display content display control means (51) is stored in the display content storage means (512) when a predetermined operation is performed on the operation means (21) by the player during the special period. The gaming machine according to Appendix G5, wherein two or more of the display contents of the specific information of the above are displayed on the second display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machines according to the appendices G5 to G7, at least one of the display contents of the plurality of specific information displayed in the plurality of specified periods can be presented to the second display means. For example, the second display means can be made to present the display content selected by the player from the display contents of the plurality of specific information stored in the display content storage means (512). In this case, since the player can select the presentation content to be presented to the second display means from the display contents of the plurality of specific information, the player can confirm the display content desired by himself / herself. As a result, the displayed contents can be effectively confirmed while avoiding the confirmation of the displayed contents such as the previously confirmed information and the information having a small amount of information, so that the displayed contents can be confirmed efficiently. Further, when two or more display contents are displayed on the second display means, many display contents can be confirmed at one time, so that the presentation contents can be efficiently confirmed also in this case.

[Appendix G8]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary note G1 to Supplementary note G7, wherein the first display means (35, 39) and the second display means (341) are different display means.

[Appendix G9]
The gaming machine according to Appendix G8, wherein the second display means (341) is a variable display image display means in which a symbol (decorative symbol) suggesting or clearly indicating the result of the transition determination is variablely displayed.

The gaming machines according to Appendix G8 and Appendix G9 are provided with a first display means displayed in a specified period and a second display means displayed in a special period, and are provided with different display means in each of the specified period and the special period. Specific information is displayed. Therefore, in the specified period, when information other than the specific information is displayed by the second display means, it is possible to prevent the display from being hindered. For example, when the second display means is a variable display image display means, it is possible to prevent the visual recognition of the image (for example, image effect) displayed by the variable display image display means from being hindered. On the other hand, in the special period (for example, in the standby state), the display content of the specific information in the specified period is presented by the second display means such as the variable display image display means in which the symbol is variablely displayed. In general, since the variable display image display means has a large display area, visibility is improved when the variable display image display means is presented with the display contents of specific information in a specified period. Further, the variable display image display means may be used to perform various settings such as an effect and a character executed in the gaming machine. Therefore, if the display content of the specific information in the specified period is presented to the variable display image display means, the display content of the specific information in the specified period can be changed and displayed by the same operation as the operation for making various settings. It becomes possible to have the image display means present it. Therefore, the convenience when displaying the display content of the specific information on the variable display image display means in the special period is improved.

[Appendix G10]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information.
When a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions G1 to G9.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G10, a plurality of specific information is displayed in a predetermined order in a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, conversely, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge the high or low of the advantage judgment probability, and the reverse. It can be set in an order where it is difficult to judge the level. As described above, a plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix G11]
When the number of times the specific condition is satisfied exceeds the specified number of times in the predetermined period, the display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined display order in the specified period. The gaming machine according to the appendix G10, which is characterized in that it is displayed on the machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix G11, when the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order in the specified period. When a specific condition exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied in this way, the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information by displaying all of the plurality of specific information on the display means in a predetermined display order. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the predetermined number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to Appendix G11 is a conventional slot machine in which information denying a high set value such as the maximum set value is not presented in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. Is different.

[Appendix H1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A storage means (41) for storing each numerical information (game set value) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous judgment probabilities (big hit probabilities) different from each other, and
Selection means (41) for selecting each numerical information, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information, and
When a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, a plurality of specific numerical information (non-) other than the predetermined numerical information among at least the plurality of types of numerical information in a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. Display control means (51) for displaying a plurality of specific information (numbers) indicating (set values) on display means (35, 39, 341) so as to be distinguishable from each other.
With
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order.
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H1, a plurality of specific information is displayed in a predetermined order in a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, conversely, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge the high or low of the advantage judgment probability, and the reverse. It can be set in an order where it is difficult to judge the level. As described above, a plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix H2]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to Appendix H1, characterized in that it is present.

[Appendix H3]
The display control means (51) may cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to Appendix H1, characterized in that it is possible.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H2 or Appendix H3, not only specific information but also special information that does not show a plurality of types of numerical information or special information that indicates a part of a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the display means. As a result, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical information can be inferred and enjoyed based on the special information, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix H4]
A display order selection means (51) that selects one display order from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period, and
A selective display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51) is further provided.
The display control means (51) transmits the plurality of specific information to the display means (35, 39, 341) according to the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H1 to H3, characterized in that it is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H4, a plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in the specified period according to one display order selected from the plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information. Therefore, depending on the display order included in the plurality of display orders and the selection rate thereof, it is easy to display the plurality of specific information in the specific display order, and it is difficult to display the plurality of specific information in the specific display order. It is possible to prevent a plurality of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. As a result, by appropriately setting the content and selection rate of a plurality of specific information, it is possible to display a plurality of specific information in various orders, so that the display order of the plurality of specific information becomes monotonous. Can be prevented.

[Appendix H5]
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information.
The gaming machine according to Appendix H4, wherein the one display order is selected from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H5, a plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix H6]
The gaming machine according to Appendix H5, wherein the plurality of display orders include display orders having different probabilities (selection rates) of being selected by the display order selection means (51).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H6, it is possible to make it easy to select a specific display order and to make it difficult to select a specific display order. That is, unlike the case where all the display orders have the same probability of being selected, it is easy to identify a specific non-setting value, and conversely, it is difficult to specify a specific non-setting value. Will also be possible. As a result, it is possible to adjust the high / low possibility of having a high setting value and the high / low possibility of having a low setting value.

[Appendix H7]
The plurality of display orders are the first display having the lowest priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of advantageous determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information. Including order,
The first display order is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than the display order other than the first display order. The gaming machine according to Appendix H6.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H7, the first display order in which the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of advantageous judgment probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information has the lowest priority is the lowest. Is easy to select. That is, except for the advantageous determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information, the specific information indicating the specific numerical information having the lowest advantageous determination probability and the most disadvantageous to the player has the lowest priority in the display order. Therefore, since the specific numerical value information that is most disadvantageous to the player is displayed at the end, the most disadvantageous advantageous judgment probability for the player and the advantage for the player are more advantageous until the last specific information is displayed. The possibility of an advantageous judgment probability remains. As a result, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp that it is the most unfavorable advantage judgment probability for the player, so that it is possible to prevent the game from being terminated early in the game machine, and the operating rate of the game machine can be reduced. The decrease can be suppressed.

[Appendix H8]
The specific information includes the first specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of advantageous determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific numerical information, and the plurality of advantageous determination probabilities. Including the second specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage judgment probability having the highest probability among them.
The plurality of display orders include a second display order in which the first specific information and the second specific information have two lower priorities.
The second display order is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than the display order other than the second display order. The gaming machine according to Appendix H6.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H8, the second display order in which the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability having the lowest probability among the plurality of advantageous judgment probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information has a low priority is Easy to choose. Therefore, as with the gaming machine according to Appendix H6, it is difficult for the player to grasp the most unfavorable advantage determination probability for the player, so that the game on the gaming machine is terminated early. It can be suppressed, and the decrease in the operating rate of the gaming machine can be suppressed. Further, in the second display order, the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the most probable advantage determination probability among the plurality of advantage determination probabilities corresponding to the plurality of specific information is low. Therefore, it becomes difficult for the player to grasp not only the advantageous determination probability that is disadvantageous to the player but also the advantageous determination probability that is advantageous to the player. In this way, the advantage is contradictory to the player because the priority of the two specific information indicating the two specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability that is disadvantageous to the player and the advantageous judgment probability that is advantageous to the player is low. Since it becomes difficult to determine which of the two advantageous determination probabilities to be performed until the end, it is possible to improve the interest in the specific information displayed on the display means.

[Appendix H9]
In the plurality of display orders, the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability having a higher probability than the first advantageous determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is the first advantageous determination. Including a third display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having a lower probability than the probability.
The third display order is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than the display order other than the third display order. The gaming machine according to Appendix H6.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H9, the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage judgment probability having a higher probability than the first advantage judgment probability becomes the advantage judgment probability having a lower probability than the first advantage judgment probability. The selection rate of the third display order, which is lower than the specific information indicating the corresponding specific numerical information, is set high. Since the selection rate of the third display order is set high, the player is informed that the advantage judgment probability is higher than the actual first advantage judgment probability until immediately before the first advantage judgment probability is grasped. You can expect it. As a result, the specific information (predetermined information) can be inferred and enjoyed while expecting the possibility that the advantage determination probability is high until immediately before the first advantage determination probability is grasped.

[Appendix H10]
In the plurality of display orders, the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability having a lower probability than the first advantageous determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is the first advantageous determination. Including a fourth display order lower than the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage determination probability having a higher probability than the probability.
The fourth display order is characterized in that the probability (selection rate) of being selected by the display order selection means (51) is set higher (including 100%) than the display order other than the fourth display order. The gaming machine according to Appendix H6.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H10, the priority of the specific information indicating the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantage judgment probability lower than the first advantage judgment probability becomes the advantage judgment probability having a higher probability than the first advantage judgment probability. The selection rate of the fourth display order, which is lower than the specific information indicating the corresponding specific numerical information, is set high. Since the selection rate of the fourth display order is set high, the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous judgment probability having a lower probability than the first advantageous judgment probability is obtained immediately before the first advantageous judgment probability is grasped. The indicated specific information is left as hidden specific information. As a result, the final candidate for the first advantageous determination probability becomes specific information indicating the actual first advantageous determination probability and the specific numerical information corresponding to the advantageous determination probability whose probability is lower than the first advantageous determination probability. As a result, in the end, the predetermined numerical information corresponding to the player's advantageous first advantage determination probability is grasped as the first advantage determination probability (predetermined numerical information), so that the set value is grasped. The joy of is improved.

[Appendix H11]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H1 to H10, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H11, when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which the start of the special game is set, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying the specific numerical information, and eventually guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. .. Then, by setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, the game can be enjoyed by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix H12]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified. Usually a big hit) and
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. The second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode), is included.
The beginning of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state. Pachinko machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H12, in the first gaming state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determining means is lower than that in the second gaming state, the result of the transition determination is the special gaming. It is set as a special game to be transferred when it is to be transferred to. That is, the beginning of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first hit special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each initial hit regardless of whether it is a single shot or a consecutive villa, so specific numerical information and thus specific numerical information are estimated or specified for each initial hit. Opportunity is guaranteed at least once.

[Appendix H13]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that give the player a game value.
The gaming machine according to Appendix H11 or Appendix H12, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H13, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, is the specific condition satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started? You can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not it is.

[Appendix H14]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H11 to H13, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H14, the end of a predetermined period is set as a special gaming. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game may be reduced. On the other hand, by setting the end of the special game in addition to the start of the predetermined period, the interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is improved.

[Appendix H15]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified. Usually a big hit) and
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. The second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode), is included.
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine according to Appendix H14, characterized in that.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H15, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special gaming state in which the transition to the first gaming state is performed after the end of the special gaming. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, when the first hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, it is executed in the first special gaming state. The predetermined period ends in the special game to be played. On the other hand, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state is set. When the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without ending the predetermined period in the special game to be executed, the game is executed in the first special game state. The predetermined period ends in the special game. That is, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive villa ends. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive villa, a predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive villa. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that the number of times a specific condition is satisfied per consecutive villa is higher than that per single shot, and the greater the number of consecutive villas per consecutive villa, the higher the number of times a specific condition is satisfied. Become. As a result, the player can not only increase the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive villas increases, but also obtain a large amount of specific information indicating specific numerical information, and guess or guess the specific numerical information and thus the predetermined numerical information. You can get the benefit of being easier to identify.

[Appendix H16]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that give the player a game value.
The gaming machine according to Appendix H14 or Appendix H15, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set after the end of the value-adding game.

By the way, from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game, the game value is not given and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Appendix H16, since the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game, if a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, By utilizing the blank period for the player, it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in a special game.

[Appendix H17]
When the number of times the specific condition is satisfied exceeds the specified number of times in the predetermined period, the display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined display order in the specified period. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions H1 to H15.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix H17, when the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order in the specified period. When a specific condition exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied in this way, the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information by displaying all of the plurality of specific information on the display means in a predetermined display order. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the predetermined number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to Appendix H17 is a conventional slot machine in which information denying a high set value such as the maximum set value is not presented in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. Is different.

[Appendix I1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A storage means (41) for storing each numerical information (game set value) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous judgment probabilities (big hit probabilities) different from each other, and
Selection means (41) for selecting each numerical information, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information, and
When a specific condition is satisfied, at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information is shown in a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. Display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) on display means (35, 39, 341), and
A display limiting means (51) that restricts the display of the specific information on the display means (35, 39, 341) during a period other than the specified period.
With
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I1, it is restricted that the specific information is displayed on the display means during a period other than the specified period. Therefore, the display of the specific information is executed as a privilege for the player who has played the game that satisfies the specific condition for displaying the specific information. As a result, it is possible to prevent another player from piggybacking on the privilege obtained by the previous player and obtaining specific information for specifying or guessing specific numerical information.

[Appendix I2]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to Appendix I1, characterized in that it is present.

[Appendix I3]
The display control means (51) may cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to Appendix I1, characterized in that it is possible.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I2 or Appendix I3, not only specific information but also special information that does not show a plurality of types of numerical information or special information that shows a part of a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the display means. As a result, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical information can be inferred and enjoyed based on the special information, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix I4]
A notification game execution means (41) for executing a notification game (variable game) for notifying the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is further provided.
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary note I1 to Supplementary note I3, wherein the period other than the specified period is a period of a standby state in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I4, it is restricted that the specific information is displayed on the display means during the standby state in which neither the special game nor the notification game is executed. Here, the change of players is generally performed during the standby period. Therefore, by limiting the display of the specific information on the display means during the standby state, another player piggybacks on the privilege obtained by the previous player and identifies or infers the specific numerical information. It is possible to more reliably prevent the acquisition of specific information for the purpose.

[Appendix I5]
The display limiting means (51) is characterized in that, in a period other than the specified period, the display of the specific information previously displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) is restricted in the specified period. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary note I1 to Supplementary note I4.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I5, the display of the specific information previously displayed on the display means in the specified period is restricted in the period other than the specified period. That is, the specific information is displayed only during the specified period, and the display history of the past specific information is also restricted outside the specified period. As a result, it is not possible to confirm the specific information displayed in the past based on the display history, so another player piggybacks on the privilege obtained by the previous player based on the display history and identifies the specific numerical information. Alternatively, it is possible to more reliably prevent obtaining specific information for guessing.

[Appendix I6]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information.
When a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions I1 to I5.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I6, a plurality of specific information is displayed in a predetermined order in a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, conversely, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge the high or low of the advantage judgment probability, and the reverse. It can be set in an order where it is difficult to judge the level. As described above, a plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix I7]
When the number of times the specific condition is satisfied exceeds the specified number of times in the predetermined period, the display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined display order in the specified period. The gaming machine according to Appendix I6, which is characterized in that it is displayed on the machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix I7, when the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order in the specified period. When a specific condition exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied in this way, the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information by displaying all of the plurality of specific information on the display means in a predetermined display order. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the predetermined number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to Appendix I7 is a conventional slot machine in which information denying a high set value such as the maximum set value is not presented in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. Is different.

[Appendix J1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A storage means (41) for storing each numerical information (game set value) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous judgment probabilities (big hit probabilities) different from each other, and
Selection means (41) for selecting each numerical information, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information, and
When the first specific condition or the second specific condition different from the second specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, at least the plurality of types are satisfied in the specified period from the predetermined start timing to the predetermined end timing. Display control for displaying a plurality of specific information (numbers) indicating a plurality of specific numerical information (non-set values) other than the predetermined numerical information among the numerical information of the above on the display means (35, 39, 341) so as to be distinguishable from each other. Means (51) and
With
The display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information (numbers) in the first display order when the first specific condition is satisfied. When the second specific condition is satisfied, the plurality of specific information (numbers) are displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341) in a second display order different from the first display order.
A gaming machine characterized in that during the specified period, predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed on the display means (35, 39, 341).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J1, a plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in the first display order when the first specific condition is satisfied, and a plurality of specific information is displayed when the second specific condition is satisfied. Information (numbers) is displayed on the display means in a second display order different from the first display order. That is, the display order of a plurality of specific information is set according to the type of the specific condition that is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to recognize the display order of the plurality of specific information, and it is possible to prevent the plurality of specific numerical information from being easily specified or recognized based on the specific information. This prevents the player from early grasping that the advantage determination probability is low when the advantage determination probability is low. As a result, even if the advantage determination probability is low, it is possible to prevent the gaming machine from ending the game at an early stage, and to prevent the operating rate of the gaming machine from decreasing.

[Appendix J2]
The display control means (51) can cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not indicate the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to Appendix J1, which is characterized by being present.

[Appendix J3]
The display control means (51) may cause the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to Appendix J1, characterized in that it is possible.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J2 or Appendix J3, not only specific information but also special information that does not show a plurality of types of numerical information or special information that indicates a part of a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the display means. As a result, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical information can be inferred and enjoyed based on the special information, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix J4]
The first specific condition includes that the first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means (41).
In the second specific condition, the second predetermined numerical information (set value) different from the first predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from the plurality of types of numerical information is the numerical information storage means (41). The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions J1 to J3, which comprises being stored in.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J4, the first specific condition includes that the first predetermined numerical information is stored in the numerical information storage means, and the second specific condition is the second predetermined numerical value in the numerical information storage means. Including that the information is stored. That is, the type of a specific condition depends on the predetermined numerical information. Therefore, the display order is defined by the predetermined numerical information, and a plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in the specified period according to the display order. That is, since the display order can be set in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix J5]
When the first specific condition or the second specific condition is satisfied, one display order is selected from a plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined period. Display order selection means (51) and
A selective display order storage means (51) for storing the one display order selected by the display order selection means (51) is further provided.
The display control means (51) transmits the plurality of specific information to the display means (35, 39, 341) according to the one display order stored in the display order storage means (51) during the specified period. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions J1 to J4, characterized in that it is displayed.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J5, a plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in the specified period according to one display order selected from the plurality of display orders that define the priority of the display order of the plurality of specific information. Therefore, depending on the display order included in the plurality of display orders and the selection rate thereof, it is easy to display the plurality of specific information in the specific display order, and it is difficult to display the plurality of specific information in the specific display order. It is possible to prevent a plurality of specific information from being displayed depending on the display order. As a result, by appropriately setting the content and selection rate of a plurality of specific information, it is possible to display a plurality of specific information in various orders, so that the display order of the plurality of specific information becomes monotonous. Can be prevented.

[Appendix J6]
The plurality of display orders are defined for each of the plurality of types of numerical information.
The gaming machine according to Appendix J5, wherein the display order selection means (51) selects the one display order from the plurality of display orders based on the predetermined numerical information.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J6, a plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined period according to a display order selected from a plurality of display orders based on predetermined numerical information. That is, since it is possible to set a plurality of display orders in relation to the predetermined numerical information, the display order can be set for each predetermined numerical information. As a result, the display order can be set based on whether the advantage determination probability corresponding to the predetermined numerical information is high or low, and it is also possible to characterize the display of a plurality of specific information for each predetermined numerical information.

[Appendix J7]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions J1 to J6, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J7, when a specific condition is satisfied during a predetermined period in which the start of the special game is set, specific information indicating specific numerical information is displayed on the display means. Therefore, the player can enjoy guessing or specifying the specific numerical information, and eventually guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the display means when the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period. .. Then, by setting the start of the predetermined period to the special game, the game can be enjoyed by paying attention to whether or not a specific condition is satisfied in the special game.

[Appendix J8]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified. Usually a big hit) and
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. The second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode), is included.
The beginning of the predetermined period is set to the special game to be shifted when the result of the shift determination is to shift to the special game in the first game state. Pachinko machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J8, the result of the transition determination is the special game in the first gaming state in which the probability that the start of the predetermined period is determined to shift to the special gaming state by the transition determination means is lower than that in the second gaming state. It is set as a special game to be transferred when it is to be transferred to. That is, the beginning of the predetermined period is set to a so-called first hit special game. As a result, a predetermined period is always set for each initial hit regardless of whether it is a single shot or a consecutive villa, so specific numerical information and thus predetermined numerical information are estimated or specified for each initial hit. Opportunity is guaranteed at least once.

[Appendix J9]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that give the player a game value.
The gaming machine according to Appendix J7 or Appendix J8, wherein the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J9, since the start of the predetermined period is set between the start time of the special game and the start time of the value-adding game, is the specific condition satisfied at least after the value-adding game is started? You can enjoy the game by paying attention to whether or not it is.

[Appendix J10]
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions J7 to J9, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J10, the end of a predetermined period is set as a special gaming machine. That is, the predetermined period starts in the special game and ends in the special game. Here, in the special game, the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, there is a concern that the interest of the player in the special game may be reduced. On the other hand, by setting the end of the special game in addition to the start of the predetermined period, the interest in the special game, which tends to decrease, is improved.

[Appendix J11]
The special game state is
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the first special game state (5R) is shifted to the first game state (low probability mode) in which the result of the transition determination by the transition determination means (41) is notified. Usually a big hit) and
After the end of the special game in the special game state, the probability that the transition determination means (41) determines to shift to the special game state is higher than that in the first game state, and the result of the transition determination is notified. The second special gaming state (5R probability variation jackpot gaming state and 16R probability variation jackpot gaming state), which is shifted to the second gaming state (high probability mode), is included.
The end of the predetermined period is set to a special game (5R normal jackpot) executed in the first special game state, which is shifted to the first game state after the end of the special game in the special game state. The gaming machine according to Appendix J10, characterized in that.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J11, the end of the predetermined period is set to the special game executed in the first special gaming state in which the transition to the first gaming state is performed after the end of the special gaming. Therefore, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the first special gaming state, that is, when the first hit is shifted to the first special gaming state, it is executed in the first special gaming state. The predetermined period ends in the special game to be played. On the other hand, when the result of the transition determination of the first gaming state is to shift to the second special gaming state, that is, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special gaming state, the second special gaming state is set. When the result of the transition determination of the second game state is to shift to the first special game state without ending the predetermined period in the special game to be executed, the game is executed in the first special game state. The predetermined period ends in the special game. That is, in the case of a consecutive villa where the first hit is shifted to the second special game state, the predetermined period ends in the first special game in which the consecutive villa ends. Therefore, in the case of a consecutive villa, a predetermined period is set across the first special game at the end of the consecutive villa. The period will also be longer. As a result, there is a high possibility that the number of times a specific condition is satisfied per consecutive villa is higher than that per single shot, and the greater the number of consecutive villas per consecutive villa, the higher the number of times a specific condition is satisfied. Become. As a result, the player can not only increase the expected value of the game value that can be acquired as the number of consecutive villas increases, but also obtain a large amount of specific information indicating specific numerical information, and guess or guess the specific numerical information and thus the predetermined numerical information. You can get the benefit of being easier to identify.

[Appendix J12]
The special game has a value-adding game (opening / closing execution mode) including a plurality of unit games (round games) that give the player a game value, and an ending executed after the end of the value-adding game.
The gaming machine according to Appendix J10 or Appendix J11, wherein the end of the predetermined period is set to the ending.

By the way, from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game, the game value is not given and the result of the transition determination is not notified. Therefore, the period from the end of the value-adding game to the end of the special game is a kind of blank period for the player. On the other hand, in the gaming machine according to Appendix J12, the end of the predetermined period is set between the end of the value-adding game and the end of the special game. Therefore, when a specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period, By utilizing the blank period for the player, it becomes possible to display specific information indicating specific numerical information on the display means. This makes it possible to display specific information on the display means in a time-efficient manner in a special game.

[Appendix J13]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information.
When a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions J1 to J12.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J13, a plurality of specific information is displayed in a predetermined order in a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, conversely, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge the high or low of the advantage judgment probability, and the reverse. It can be set in an order where it is difficult to judge the level. As described above, a plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix J14]
When the number of times the specific condition is satisfied exceeds the specified number of times in the predetermined period, the display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined display order in the specified period. The gaming machine according to Appendix J13, which is characterized in that it is displayed on the machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix J14, when the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order in the specified period. When a specific condition exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied in this way, the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information by displaying all of the plurality of specific information on the display means in a predetermined display order. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the predetermined number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to Appendix J14 is a conventional slot machine in which information denying a high set value such as the maximum set value is not presented in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. Is different.

[Appendix K1]
A transition judgment means (big hit lottery) for determining whether or not to shift to a special game state (big hit game state) in which a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the judgment condition (big hit lottery). 41) and
A storage means (41) for storing each numerical information (game set value) corresponding to a plurality of advantageous judgment probabilities (big hit probabilities) different from each other, and
Selection means (41) for selecting each numerical information, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
Numerical information storage means (41) for storing one predetermined numerical information (set value) selected from a plurality of types of numerical information, and
When a specific condition is satisfied, at least specific numerical information (non-set value) other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information is shown in a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing. The first display control means (51) for displaying specific information (numbers) on the first display means (35, 39, 341), and
A second display control means (41) that causes the second display means (45) to display predetermined information (numbers) indicating the predetermined numerical information.
With
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided at a position visible to the player.
The second display means (45) is provided at a position where the player's visibility is restricted.
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined information is not displayed on the first display means (35, 39, 341) during the specified period.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K1, specific information other than predetermined information is displayed on the first display means provided at a position visible to the player, and the second display means (2) provided at a position where the player's visibility is restricted. Predetermined information is displayed in 45). That is, when a specific condition is satisfied, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than one predetermined numerical information selected from a plurality of types of numerical information is provided at a position visible to the player in a specified period. It is displayed on the first display means. As a result, the player can specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, and can recognize the predetermined numerical information by displaying all the specific numerical information. It is possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy grasping the specific numerical information and, by extension, guessing or specifying the predetermined numerical information based on the specific information displayed on the first display means, so that the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, by providing predetermined information at a position where the player's visibility is restricted and displaying predetermined information on the second display means, a predetermined numerical value is displayed to the player based on the predetermined information displayed by the second display means during business hours. It is possible to prevent the information from being grasped. On the other hand, outside the business hours, the game hall side can grasp the predetermined information. As a result, the game hall side can confirm the predetermined numerical information based on the predetermined information displayed by the second display means outside the business hours, and when the predetermined numerical information is changed, the predetermined numerical information after the change can be confirmed. Since the predetermined information indicating the above can be confirmed, the work of changing the predetermined numerical information is facilitated.

[Appendix K2]
The first display control means (51) causes the first display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of the numerical value) that does not show the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to Appendix K1, characterized in that it is possible.

[Appendix K3]
The first display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the specific information and special information (a part of a number) indicating a part of the plurality of types of numerical information. The gaming machine according to Appendix K1, characterized in that it is possible.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K2 or Appendix K3, not only specific information but also special information that does not show a plurality of types of numerical information or special information that shows a part of a plurality of types of numerical information is displayed on the first display means. .. As a result, the player can not only specify the specific numerical information based on the specific information when the specific information is displayed on the display means, but also based on the special information when the special information is displayed on the display means. Specific numerical information can be inferred. Therefore, even when the specific information is not displayed, the specific numerical information can be inferred and enjoyed based on the special information, so that the interest of the game is improved.

[Appendix K4]
Further equipped with a game board (31) on which a game ball is launched,
The first display means (35, 39, 341) is provided on the front side of the game board (31).
The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions K1 to K3, wherein the second display means (45) is provided on the back side of the gaming board (31).

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K4, specific information indicating specific numerical information other than predetermined numerical information is displayed on the first display means provided on the front side of the game board, and predetermined information indicating predetermined numerical information is displayed on the back side of the game board. It is displayed on the second display means provided in. Therefore, it is easy to visually recognize the specific information displayed on the first display means, and it is possible to easily limit the visibility of the predetermined information displayed on the second display means.

[Appendix K5]
The game board (31) is fixed to the frame body (12) so as to be openable and closable.
The gaming machine according to Appendix K4, wherein the second display means (45) is provided at a position where the gaming board (31) can be visually recognized when the gaming board (31) is opened.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K5, a second display means is provided on the back surface side of the gaming board that is fixed to the frame body so as to be openable and closable. Therefore, by closing the game board, it is possible to prevent the predetermined information displayed on the second display means from being visually recognized by the player, while by opening the game board, the predetermined information displayed on the second display means can be prevented. Can be confirmed on the game hall side. As a result, it is possible to achieve a state in which the predetermined information of the second display means can be visually recognized and a state in which the visibility is restricted by a simple operation of opening and closing the game board.

[Appendix K6]
The second display control means (41)
It is possible to control between a display state in which the predetermined information is displayed on the second display means (45) and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed on the second display means (45).
When the first operation is performed on the specific operating means (46) provided on the back side of the game board (31), the non-display state is controlled to the display state.
The gaming machine according to Appendix K4 or Appendix K5, wherein when a second operation is performed on the specific operating means (46), the display state is controlled to the non-display state.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K6, a display state in which predetermined information is displayed on the second display means and a non-display state in which the predetermined information is not displayed are selected by an operation on a specific operation means provided on the back side of the game board. can. Therefore, by selecting the non-display state during the business hours of the game hall, even when the game board is opened when a ball jam occurs in the game machine, the predetermined information is displayed by the second display means. It is possible to surely prevent it from being grasped.

[Appendix K7]
The specific information includes a plurality of specific information.
When a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period, the display control means (51) causes the display means (35, 39, 341) to display the plurality of specific information in the specified period in a predetermined display order. The gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Provisions K11 to K6.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K7, a plurality of specific information is displayed in a predetermined order in a specified period. The predetermined order can be set as appropriate, for example, an order in which it is easy to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, conversely, an order in which it is difficult to narrow down and recognize the predetermined numerical information, an order in which it is easy to judge the high or low of the advantage judgment probability, and the reverse. It can be set in an order where it is difficult to judge the level. As described above, a plurality of specific information can be displayed in various orders, and by appropriately selecting the display order, it is possible to prevent the display order of the plurality of specific information from becoming monotonous.

[Appendix K8]
When the number of times the specific condition is satisfied exceeds the specified number of times in the predetermined period, the display control means (51) displays all of the plurality of specific information in the predetermined display order in the specified period. The gaming machine according to Appendix K7, which is characterized in that it is displayed on the machine.

In the gaming machine according to Appendix K8, when the number of times that a specific condition is satisfied in a predetermined period exceeds the specified number of times, all of the plurality of specific information is displayed on the display means in a predetermined display order in the specified period. When a specific condition exceeding the specified number of times is satisfied in this way, the player can grasp the predetermined numerical information by displaying all of the plurality of specific information on the display means in a predetermined display order. It will be possible. Therefore, the player can enjoy the progress of the game by paying attention to whether or not the number of times that the specific condition is satisfied in the predetermined period exceeds the predetermined number of times.

Note that the gaming machine according to Appendix K8 is a conventional slot machine in which information denying a high set value such as the maximum set value is not presented in that all of a plurality of specific information (non-set values) can be displayed on the display means. Is different.

10: Game machine 31: Game board 316: Variable winning opening 341: Symbol display unit 35: Lamp display unit 351: First individual lamp unit 352: Second individual lamp unit 353: Third individual lamp unit 354: Fourth individual lamp unit Part 355: 5th individual lamp part 356: 6th individual lamp part 37: Kroon device 373: Special out ball mouth 38: Game ball retention part 381: Retention lane 383: Stopper part 384: Special out ball sensor 39: 7 segment display Parts A to G: Segment 4: Main controller 41: MPU
411: ROM
412: RAM
45: Set value display unit 46: Set value change operation unit 47: ROM
5: Voice lamp control device 51: MPU
511: ROM
512: RAM
6: Display control device

Claims (1)

A transition determination means for determining whether or not to transition to a special game state in which a special game advantageous to the player is executed based on the establishment of the determination condition, and a transition determination means.
A storage means for storing each numerical information corresponding to a plurality of advantageous judgment probabilities, and
Probability setting means for setting which of the above numerical information is used to perform the transition determination by the transition determination means, and
It is a gaming machine equipped with
Numerical information storage means for storing one predetermined numerical information set from a plurality of types of numerical information, and
When a specific condition is satisfied, in a specified period from a predetermined start timing to a predetermined end timing, at least a number or a character corresponding to the specific numerical information other than the predetermined numerical information among the plurality of types of numerical information is input. display control means for controlling a plurality of types displayed in a predetermined area of the display unit specific information to be displayed using,
With
During the specified period, the predetermined information indicating the predetermined numerical information is not displayed in the predetermined area of the display means, and the predetermined information is not displayed.
Based on the type of the predetermined numerical data stored in the numerical data storage unit, that the display order of the plurality of types of the specific information to be displayed on the predetermined region of the display unit in the specified period is set A featured gaming machine.

Images